Page 1

Built 4 Living Design A Home 4 Living; A Home 4 Life With over 50 years in the custom-home building experience, Nationwide Homes understands the benefits of personalized customization. Our customers want their home built to meet their needs & lifestyle now & later. Built 4 Living design is about choices, adaptability, convenience & functionality. Our B4L Designs & Packages can be personalized so that your home is built for life, now and later. Built 4 Living is part of Nationwide’s HiPerformance Design. A HiPerformance Nationwide home delivers custom benefits simply not available in many alternatives. By selecting one of our B4L Design Packages, you could save thousands of dollars because your home will adapt with your life stages more easily.

BUILT FOR LIVING

Nationwide Homes Introduces our Exclusive:

Š Copyright 2010, Nationwide Homes, Inc.


B4L Convenient Living Package: • Additional light in hallway for maximum lighting • Allowance for at least 1 “No-Step” Entry Door • Single-Lever faucets at all sinks • Non-Slip Foyer Flooring • Pull-Out Spray faucet at Kitchen • Built in bracing for (future) grab bars in all baths • Adjustable (height) Hand-Held Shower Nozzle (Main Bath) • Light in Main Bath Shower Stall • 19” High commodes in all baths • Rocker-style Light Switches • Roll-out trays in (base cabinets) To personalize your Built 4 Living Design, simply meet with our (Home Consultant/Independent, Authorized Builder) to select the package that meets your desires & budget.

B4L Functional Living Package: Custom Performance

• All items from Convenient Living Package • Motion Sensor Exterior Light (1) • Entry Door sidelite or peephole (plan specific) • 36” Interior Doors • Built in blocking behind kitchen cabs for future height adjustments • Lazy Susan in Kitchen • (4) Glass front overhead cabinet doors

B4L Appliance Package: The average cost to retro-fit a front door to Nationwide’s standard is $3,300. Source: Planetizen

• Side-by-side refrigerator doors • Wall-Mounted Microwave • Wall Oven • Raised Dishwasher with push-button controls • Electric cook-top Range

NOTE:

Due to variation in plans, not all package items will work in every model/design selected. Please consult with your (Home Consultant/Independent, Authorized Builder) to review plans.

• Easy Access Shower stall – 36” wide


B4L Convenient Living Package: • Additional light in hallway for maximum lighting • Allowance for at least 1 “No-Step” Entry Door • Single-Lever faucets at all sinks • Non-Slip Foyer Flooring • Pull-Out Spray faucet at Kitchen • Built in bracing for (future) grab bars in all baths • Adjustable (height) Hand-Held Shower Nozzle (Main Bath) • Light in Main Bath Shower Stall • 19” High commodes in all baths • Rocker-style Light Switches • Roll-out trays in (base cabinets) To personalize your Built 4 Living Design, simply meet with our (Home Consultant/Independent, Authorized Builder) to select the package that meets your desires & budget.

B4L Functional Living Package: Custom Performance

• All items from Convenient Living Package • Motion Sensor Exterior Light (1) • Entry Door sidelite or peephole (plan specific) • 36” Interior Doors • Built in blocking behind kitchen cabs for future height adjustments • Lazy Susan in Kitchen • (4) Glass front overhead cabinet doors

B4L Appliance Package: The average cost to retro-fit a front door to Nationwide’s standard is $3,300. Source: Planetizen

• Side-by-side refrigerator doors • Wall-Mounted Microwave • Wall Oven • Raised Dishwasher with push-button controls • Electric cook-top Range

NOTE:

Due to variation in plans, not all package items will work in every model/design selected. Please consult with your (Home Consultant/Independent, Authorized Builder) to review plans.

• Easy Access Shower stall – 36” wide


B4L Convenient Living Package: • Additional light in hallway for maximum lighting • Allowance for at least 1 “No-Step” Entry Door • Single-Lever faucets at all sinks • Non-Slip Foyer Flooring • Pull-Out Spray faucet at Kitchen • Built in bracing for (future) grab bars in all baths • Adjustable (height) Hand-Held Shower Nozzle (Main Bath) • Light in Main Bath Shower Stall • 19” High commodes in all baths • Rocker-style Light Switches • Roll-out trays in (base cabinets) To personalize your Built 4 Living Design, simply meet with our (Home Consultant/Independent, Authorized Builder) to select the package that meets your desires & budget.

B4L Functional Living Package: Custom Performance

• All items from Convenient Living Package • Motion Sensor Exterior Light (1) • Entry Door sidelite or peephole (plan specific) • 36” Interior Doors • Built in blocking behind kitchen cabs for future height adjustments • Lazy Susan in Kitchen • (4) Glass front overhead cabinet doors

B4L Appliance Package: The average cost to retro-fit a front door to Nationwide’s standard is $3,300. Source: Planetizen

• Side-by-side refrigerator doors • Wall-Mounted Microwave • Wall Oven • Raised Dishwasher with push-button controls • Electric cook-top Range

NOTE:

Due to variation in plans, not all package items will work in every model/design selected. Please consult with your (Home Consultant/Independent, Authorized Builder) to review plans.

• Easy Access Shower stall – 36” wide


Built 4 Living Design A Home 4 Living; A Home 4 Life With over 50 years in the custom-home building experience, Nationwide Homes understands the benefits of personalized customization. Our customers want their home built to meet their needs & lifestyle now & later. Built 4 Living design is about choices, adaptability, convenience & functionality. Our B4L Designs & Packages can be personalized so that your home is built for life, now and later. Built 4 Living is part of Nationwide’s HiPerformance Design. A HiPerformance Nationwide home delivers custom benefits simply not available in many alternatives. By selecting one of our B4L Design Packages, you could save thousands of dollars because your home will adapt with your life stages more easily.

BUILT FOR LIVING

Nationwide Homes Introduces our Exclusive:

www.futurehomesnc.com

Future Homes Hubert, NC 1075 Freedom Way - Highway 24 Hubert, NC 28539 Phone: 910.577.6400 Future Homes Hampstead, NC 16663 Highway 17 N. Hampstead, NC 28443 Phone: 910.270.3313

Each Office Is Independently Owned And Operated

Š Copyright 2010, Nationwide Homes, Inc.


Built 4 Living Design A Home 4 Living; A Home 4 Life With over 50 years in the custom-home building experience, Nationwide Homes understands the benefits of personalized customization. Our customers want their home built to meet their needs & lifestyle now & later. Built 4 Living design is about choices, adaptability, convenience & functionality. Our B4L Designs & Packages can be personalized so that your home is built for life, now and later. Built 4 Living is part of Nationwide’s HiPerformance Design. A HiPerformance Nationwide home delivers custom benefits simply not available in many alternatives. By selecting one of our B4L Design Packages, you could save thousands of dollars because your home will adapt with your life stages more easily.

BUILT FOR LIVING

Nationwide Homes Introduces our Exclusive:

Š Copyright 2010, Nationwide Homes, Inc.


Build a Green home the easy way with HiPerformance Green


Our “Green Made Easy” promise. No matter what level of Green you want for your family, Nationwide Custom Homes has the right answer for you. • HiPerformance Clarity—Nationwide takes the confusion out of Green building • HiPerformance Standard—Green is the standard at Nationwide • HiPerformance Savings Advantage—As a Nationwide homeowner, you will save money • HiPerformance Choice—Nationwide can build a home that meets your desired level of Green

Building with HiPerformance Green


GREEN MADE EASY

NATIONWIDE NON-CERTIFIED GREEN HOME

NATIONWIDE CERTIFIED GREEN HOME

NATIONWIDE BUILT WITH MANY AVAILABLE “DARK GREEN” OPTIONS

SYSTEMS-BUILT HOME TO BASIC CODE

SITE BUILT HOME TO BASIC CODE

EXISTING HOME BUILT 20 YEARS AGO

AVERAGE NEWER EXISTING HOME

Printed on recycled paper

EXISTING HOME BUILT BETWEEN 5-20 YEARS AGO


Traditions exterior

It’s no wonder home buyers are confused. At Nationwide Custom Homes, we have a Green building process we call “Green Made Easy”. We put substance, not fluff, into our Green offerings. We have years of experience in high performance building and we will help you through the vast and sometimes confusing amount of information about Green home building.

HiPerformance Clarity. Nationwide takes the confusion out of Green home building. Green is the buzzword these days, but as a consumer do you feel confident or confused when talking about Green building programs? If you feel confused you’re not alone!

HiPerformance Standard. Green is the standard at Nationwide. • Nationwide Green is not an expensive option, but included in every home we build • Nationwide is the original NAHB Bronze and Energy Star Ready modular builder

There are over 50 different local and state Green building

Simply, every home we build is Green. It is not an option

organizations with various definitions and standards that

and importantly it doesn’t come at a premium price.

create tremendous confusion in the marketplace. Green is

Green starts with the fundamentals of our System Plus

made more confusing by companies that rely on “window

Construction. No matter what rating system is used (NAHB

dressing” marketing that creates the illusion of substance

/National Association of Home Builders or LEED/Leadership

rather than delivering true benefits.

in Energy and Environmental Design), Green points are


awarded for our basic construction processes that are

Not only are Green homeowners using less energy, they are

simply not available in a site-built home. Green points are

often paying less per unit of energy used! These Green

awarded for better use of materials, healthier products,

credits vary by region and change frequently. At Nationwide

healthier applications and minimized site disturbance to

Custom Homes, we review these changes frequently to help

name just a few.

you stay informed. We are your Green expert.

All Nationwide homes are built standard to meet NAHB’s Bronze certification and the Energy Star Certified program requirements*.

HiPerformance Savings. Nationwide Green homes will save you money. It’s a fact. • Green homes have lower utility costs, healthier air quality and higher resale value than site-built homes • State, Federal and Regional tax credits are available to encourage the consumer to buy Green certified homes • Many utility companies offer discounts or rebates for building Green

Traditions interior

*NAHB Bronze and Energy Star Certification require on-site construction and verification provided by a Nationwide Custom Homes Authorized Independent Builder. Homes produced by Nationwide Custom Homes are NAHB Green and Energy Star Ready at our building centers.


HiPerformance Choice.

GREEN DEFINED.

Nationwide Green goes from light Green to dark Green.

Green Building is a Whole-System approach to building that takes into consideration 7 factors. Most certification systems require the builder to take steps to meet minimum requirements in all 7. They are:

Nationwide has the resources to help you choose your level of Green—from light Green (Bronze) to the darkest shade of Green (Gold). We also have the experience to meet the needs of customers who want Green options that include solar, geo-thermal and more. A Green project must include a well rounded approach in seven areas (see side bar). Because “Custom” is our middle name, our experts can help you determine the level of Green that meets your specific needs. No matter what choices you make for your Green home, Nationwide has the practical and sustainable answer.

Lot design, Preparation and Development Soil disturbance, protecting and enhancing the natural vegetation and landscaping. Resource Efficiency Reducing waste, recycling, enhancing durability and reducing maintenance. Energy Efficiency These requirements are adhering with Energy Star and result in lower utility costs. Designed for both comfort and efficiency. Water Efficiency Water conservation: low volume showerheads, dual flush toilets etc. all designed to reduce the use of water while maintaining a modern lifestyle. Indoor Environmental Quality Improving interior air quality includes reducing and eliminating pollutants and maintaining moisture control. We select and use materials with your health in mind. Operation Maintenance and Homeowner Education Educating the homeowner on how to properly maintain and operate the home for best performance. We help homeowners put Green living into practice. Global Impact Using products that are not harmful to the environment while partnering with other companies/suppliers that also work to protect the environment. When you consider a home, ask what your builder does to make an impact on all seven categories.


Palm Harbor Standard Specifications…..PLUS…..ENCORE VALUE ADDED PACKAGE (EVAP):

Luxury Master Bath “Suite” -Separate Soaker Tub and 48” or 60” Shower with Door (See floor plan)

Stainless Steel Appliance Package with Designer Rangehood 18+cf Bottom Freezer Refrigerator, Smoothtop Range, Dishwasher

• •

Kitchen Island Bar: Sink with BN Gooseneck Faucet and Two Pendant Lights

Crescent Countertop Edging in Kitchen (Optional in Bathrooms)

"Classic Reclaimed" Collection Laminate or "Ventures" VCT Flooring (Foyer/LR/DR/Kitchen)

"Ventures" Vinyl Tile Flooring (Bathrooms & Utility)

Shaw 25oz Carpet (Bedrooms/Family Room)

Front Door with Rectangular Glass (#684)

Pro-Set

Engineering Fees/Submittal Fees (Up to $715) 6/2/2018


Palm Harbor Homes DISCOVERY SPECIFICATIONS January 16, 2019 FLOOR SYSTEM: ¾ T&G osb subfloor 2x10 joists @ 16" o.c. for all models VCT Vinyl floor tiles @ utility & baths 25 oz. FHA carpet w/ deluxe pad at all bedrooms/den Classic laminate or Ventures VCT in foyer, living, dining, and kitchen INSULATION: Batt Ext. Walls R-19 Floors: optional Ceiling: R-38 (R-30 BETWEEN KNEEWALLS UNDER FLOOR DECKING OF CAPES AND TRIPLE WIDE MODELS) MILLWORK/PRIMED FINISH 5-1/4" Speed Base Mold 2-1/4" Col door & window casing Shoe mold @ vinyl areas Stairs: Sloped wall just above leading edge of tread w/ cap, white pickets and prefinished beech handrail WALL SYSTEM: 2x6 16"oc exterior walls 2x4 24” oc interior walls 2x3/2x4, 16” oc mating walls 1/2" Drywall all walls All walls primed Antique White SIDING: 5/5 Vinyl lap siding w/ white corners Shutters @ front elevation as shown Typar Housewrap Vinyl Soffit Metal Fascia Drip edge 4" Vinyl post wrap & vinyl pickets @ porches (where design allows) PLUMBING: PEX supply PVC DWV Plumb for icemaker in wall (not floor) Gooseneck kitchen faucet, (Brushed Nickel) 22x33 Dbl. bowl SS sink w/ sgl lever

Glass shower enclosure in applicable models

SHEATHING: Exterior walls & roof 7/16" OSB

ELECTRICAL: 200 amp main panel Non-metallic wire, 12 gauge Smoke detectors per plan Return air grille w/ plenum and pull wire for thermostat included 50 gal.electric water heater, Wire & brace for paddle fans at LR & master bedroom (Overhead lights included) 1 Telephone jack std TV outlets Optional LED Recessed lights @ Kitchen, Foyer, and over shower Wall mounted vanity lighting 110 CFM Exhaust fan @ M-Bath Two pendant lights included at standard island bar One exterior receptacle front/rear Doorbell at front door Arc Fault Breakers

BATHROOM: White fixtures

CEILING & ROOF: Ranches: 7/12 w/ STORAGE 24" o.c Triple-wides: 9/12 pitch rafters 24”o.c. (8/12 w/ 14’-6”wide modules ilo 13’-0”) 1/2" High Strength Drywall Architectural fiberglass shingles Typar Surround SR underlayment Ceiling height 9' (8’ upper of stack) 12" overhangs 12” gable extensions Ceiling taped, smooth & primed Bone Typar roof underlayment CABINETS BY FOREVERMARK: Hardwood Raised Panel (optional shaker) 36”/42” wall cab’s stepped w/ crown, Soft-Close hinges at doors and drawers Brushed nickel cabinet knobs Laminate c-tops w/ crescent edge & 1 row 6" ceramic backsplash Matching toe-kicks All islands have decorative furr-down above 24” deep cabinet with doors over refrigerator

Whole house shut-off valve One exterior hose bibb

Bath faucets, single lever chrome Elongated toilets Fiberglass tub/shower Fiberglass shower Pencil edge mirror @ vanities Laminate c-tops w/ crescent edge & 4” laminate backsplash Laminate tub deck Tall vanity @ master Matching toe-kicks Designs w/8' shower have fiberglass base w/ceramic seat, hand held shower and LED light in ceiling APPLIANCES: (Stainless Steel) Dishwasher Self-cleaning smooth surface electric range w/ ventless Designer range hood Refrigerator, 25cf side by side w/ ice and water dispenser Includes dryer vent box Dryer ducted by Purchaser All others optional DOORS: Ext. Doors: S17 front, #118 rear Others per plan Interior two panel hardboard Schlage Lever locksets interior Kwikset Smart Key Knob w/ deadbolt on all exterior doors (deluxe handle optional) WINDOWS BY WEST: Single hung vinyl Low-E DP35 & Argon with 6/6 grids & screens Includes mini blinds HVAC: Toe kick registers in kit & baths Floor registers installed at lower levels CONSTRUCTION ZONE DESIGN: 20# roof load 90 mph wind zone/115 Vult Pro Set included in BHP 2/10 Warranty

PALM HARBOR HOMES RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SUBSTITUTE BRANDS OF EQUAL VALUE DUE TO MATERIAL AVAILABILITY. SPECIFICATIONS AND PRICING SUBJECT TO REVIEW PENDING THIRD PARTY AND/OR STATE REVIEW AND APPROVAL PROCESS.

Page 1 of 1


Palm Harbor Homes ENCORE SPECIFICATIONS January 16, 2019 FLOOR SYSTEM: 2x8 FLOOR JOISTS 16" O.C. FOR 26’ WIDE AND LESS, 2X10 16” O.C. FOR 28’ & 32’ WIDE MODELS 3/4" T & G OSB Decking BEAUFLOOR VINYL @ KITCHEN, UTILITY & BATHS 18 OZ. CARPET 6# FHA REBOND PAD INSULATION: EXT. WALLS - R-15 BATT FLOORS – R-30 BATT CEILING – R-38 BATT (R-30 BETWEEN KNEEWALLS UNDER FLOOR DECKING OF CAPES AND TRIPLE WIDE MODELS) WINDOWS: KINRO 9750 SINGLE HUNG, VINYL, LOW-E, DP50, SCREENS & 4/1 GRIDS AT ALL WINDOWS EXCEPT OVER TUB MINI BLINDS INCLUDED PLUMBING: PEX SUPPLY/ PVC DRAIN, UNDERFLOOR PLUMBING SUPPLIED BY PURCHASER CHROME SINGLE LEVER FAUCETS THROUGHOUT 22X33 8” DBL. BOWL SS KITCHEN SINK W/ SGL LEVER FAUCET W/ SPRAY PLUMB FOR ICE MAKER IN WALL (NOT THRU FLOOR) WHOLE HOUSE SHUT-OFF ONE EXTERIOR HOSE BIBB MILLWORK/PRIMED FINISH: MDF 3-1/4” SPEED BASE 2-1/4” DOOR/WINDOW CASING OPTIONAL DECORATIVE ENTRY WAY WALL SYSTEM: 2X4 16” O.C. EXTERIOR WALLS 24” O.C. INTERIOR WALLS (NONLOADBARING) 2X3 16” O.C. MATING WALLS ½” DRYWALL ALL WALLS PRIMED ANTIQUE WHITE STAIRS: SLOPED WALL JUST ABOVE LEADING EDGE OF TREAD w/ CAP, WHITE PICKETS AND PREFINISHED BEECH HANDRAIL SIDING: D5 AMERICAN DREAM DUTCH LAP VINYL SIDING WHITE VINYL CORNERS HOUSEWRAP STANDARD (WEATHER SEAL) VINYL SOFFIT METAL FASCIA SHUTTER WINDOW TREATMENT or 4” WHITE TRIM AT FRONT ELEVATION PER CUTSHEET

P.T. POST & P.T. PICKETS @ PORCHES CEILING & ROOF: RANCH and T-RANCH MODELS: 5/12 RAFTER w/ STORAGE 24”O.C. 2 STORY MODELS: 7/12 RAFTER w/ STORAGE 24”O.C. 12” OVERHANGS 12” GABLE EXTENSIONS 3 TAB FIBERGLASS SHINGLES 15# FELT UNDERLAYMENT DRIP EDGE CEILING HEIGHT 8’ CEILINGS SMOOTH FINISH PAINTED BONE WHITE ½” HIGH STRENGTH DRYWALL BATHROOM: ELONGATED TOILETS FIBERGLASS TUB/SHOWER PER PLAN FIBERGLASS SHOWER (DOOR OR ROD @ MASTER OPTIONAL) FIBERGLASS GARDEN TUB PER PLAN PENCIL EDGE MIRRORS LAMINATE C-TOPS W/SQUARE EDGING & LAMINATE BACKSPLASH LAMINATE TUB DECK DESIGNS W/8' SHOWER HAVE FIBERGLASS BASE & SEAT APPLIANCES: STD. CLEAN ELECTRIC RANGE VENTLESS RANGE HOOD WITH LIGHT 18CF TOP FREEZER REFRIGERATOR DRYER VENT BOX INSTALLED DRYER DUCTED BY PURCHASER ALL OTHERS OPTIONAL *MUST ORDER PREP FOR DW IF DESIRED SHEATHING: EXTERIOR WALLS & ROOF 7/16” OSB ELECTRICAL: 200 AMP MAIN PANEL SMOKE DETECTORS PER PLAN PROGRESS BRAVO NICKEL LIGHTS 50 GAL ELEC WATERHEATER RETURN AIR GRILL PULL WIRE & INSTALL T-STAT WIRE/BRACE FOR CEILING FAN IN LR & BR’s (OVERHEAD LIGHTS INCLUDED) 1 TELEPHONE JACK STD. TV JACKS ARE OPTIONAL LED RECESSED LIGHTS IN KITCHEN & FOYER WALL MOUNTED VANITY LIGHTS 110 CFM EXHAUST FAN @ M.BATH ARC-FAULT BREAKERS 2 OUTSIDE ELECTRICAL RECEPTICALS

CABINETS: FOREVERMARK, HARDWOOD RAISED PANEL (OPTIONAL SHAKER) 30/36” WALL CABS STEPPED w/ CROWN MOULDING & S.C. DOOR AND DRAWER HINGES BRUSHED NICKEL CABINET KNOBS MATCHING TOE-KICKS LAMINATE C-TOPS W/ SQUARE EDGING & LAMINATE BACKSPLASH TALL VANITIES @ ALL BATHS (STD hgt if cabinets upgraded to Marsh) ISLAND BARS GET SKIN FINISH ON REAR (EVEN IF RAISED BAR) 24” DEEP CABINET w/ DOORS OVER REFRIGERATOR DOORS: EXT. DOORS: #108 FRONT & REAR (OTHERS & SIDELITES OPTIONAL) INTERIOR TWO PANEL HARDBOARD SCHLAGE INTERIOR LEVER STYLE LOCKSETS, BN KWIKSET SMART KEY KNOB WITH DEADBOLT ON ALL EXT. DOORS (DELUXE EXT HANDLE OPTIONAL) HVAC: UPFLOW ELECTRIC FURNACE W/ FIBERGLASS DUCT & CEILING DIFFUSERS (Ranch only). RAG IN WALL A/C COIL OPTIONAL ALL OTHER BY PURCHASER CONSTRUCTION ZONE DESIGN: 90 mph WIND/115Vult 20# ROOF LOAD 2/10 WARRANTY PRO SET INCLUDED IN BHP *Note: See E.V.A.P. for special upgraded features.

PALM HARBOR HOMES RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SUBSTITUTE BRANDS OF EQUAL VALUE DUE TO MATERIAL AVAILABILITY. SPECIFICATIONS AND PRICING SUBJECT TO REVIEW PENDING THIRD PARTY AND/OR STATE REVIEW AND APPROVAL PROCESS.

Page 1 of 1


HomeExterior Doors

Your Door

Simulated Divided Lites 6 Lite Craftsman 2-Panel (Shaker) with Shelf Simulated Divided Lites Model: 868SDL LOWE SHELF


H:\Shared Files - Engineering\DETAILS\Door-wdwsched\Door & Window Schedule PH (Discovery).dwg, 7/30/2018 1:06:56 PM, jxm14


H:\Shared Files - Engineering\DETAILS\Door-wdwsched\Door & Window Schedule PH.dwg, 7/30/2018 1:05:55 PM, jxm14


Smooth Fiberglass Entry Door CLEAR GLASS

21

20

23

122

59

140L

GBG GLASS

659IM

684IM

684PIM

686IM

692IM

692PIM


Smooth Fiberglass Entry Door DECORATIVE GLASS 578ME

632BRE

632BRE

632BRE

TRANSOMS

694ME

686ME

521ME

694ME

692ME

684ME

PATIO/DOUBLE DOORS

3711RIM 3/0

5111RIM 3/0-1/0

6411RIM 1/0-3/0-1/0

6413EIM 1/0-3/0-1/0

59

686IM

692ME


10 reasons why TYPAR is reaching new heights. 1. The Best Warranty in the Industry. Only the complete TYPAR® Weather Protection System offers the security of a lifetime limited product warranty (for single-family residential applications) plus an incredible 10-year limited warranty on labor and materials (restrictions apply, see warranty for details). 2. The Best Balance of Water Holdout and Perm Rating. A weather barrier system’s effectiveness is measured by the combined performance of water holdout and perm-rating. TYPAR offers the best balance, which helps prevent moisture — and the problems associated with moisture — in wall cavities. 3. Unbeatable Tear Strength. A TYPAR weather barrier withstands the rigors of the jobsite. Grab tensile strength is the preferred testing method for tear strength, and TYPAR performs at more than twice the industry standard. 4. Optimal Moisture Vapor Transmission. The average home generates 3 to 6 gallons of moisture vapor each day, a lot of which dissipates into the wall cavities. TYPAR delivers the optimal MVT rate, allowing moisture vapor to escape from the wall cavities, which helps prevent mold, mildew and water damage. Additionally, TYPAR weather barriers will not absorb or retain water.

6. Excellent Surfactant Resistance. TYPAR will not degrade over time due to surfactants. TYPAR successfully resists cedar oil from siding and soaps from powerwashing. 7. Outstanding UV Performance. Ultraviolet stability is vital to the performance of a weather barrier before it’s covered. Even limited exposure to ultraviolet rays causes other weather barriers to deteriorate. UV inhibitors are in TYPAR weather barriers’ coating as well as its fibers, providing the ultimate in UV protection.

10. A Total System for Your Needs. From the roof to the foundation, TYPAR offers a complete line of weather resistant barriers for your applications: TYPAR® HouseWrap, TYPAR® MetroWrap™ (for commercial applications), Surround SR Roof Underlayment, TYPAR® Construction Tape and TYPAR® Flashings. All TYPAR Weather Protection System components are backed by a 10-year limited warranty when installed properly and together as a system.

Made In USA • Literature No: TOP 10 SELL SHEET (9/14) TYPAR® is a registered trademark of Polymer Group, Inc.

IT

M

9. Easy to Handle and Install. TYPAR is less reflective than its biggest competitors and is less noisy.

ETIME LIF

LI

8. High Slip Resistance. TYPAR weather barriers offer a high co-efficient of friction against OSB board. Ladders are also less likely to slip when leaned against TYPAR versus other competitive products.

The TYPAR® Weather Protection System is the smart choice for your homes. Better yet, it provides the added protection and security of a lifetime limited product warranty (for single-family residence applications) plus an incredible 10-year warranty on labor and materials.*

ED

TY

5. Superior Air Holdout. TYPAR provides superior air barrier performance in addition to preventing air leakage through gaps, cracks, or penetrations, resulting in improved energy efficiency.

WA R R

AN

That’s peace of mind for you and your homebuyers. For more information, visit typar.com. *Restrictions apply. For complete warranty details, visit typar.com.


TYPAR vs. Tyvek. Moisture Vapor Transmission Based on published results according to ASTM E-96-95 Procedure A testing. Source: Polymer Group, Inc. (formerly Fiberweb).

OPTIMAL BREATHABILITY ZONE

TOO BREATHABLE

Tear Strength

TYPAR® TYVEK®

Based on published results for tear strength according to ASTM D-5733-99 testing.

Compare the TYPAR Difference. Properties

TYPAR® Tyvek®

What it means

MVT

11.7 perms

54 perms

Tyvek is outside optimal range (between 10–20)

Trap Tear (md/xd)

33/33 lbs

8/6 lbs

TYPAR is 4X stronger than Tyvek

UV Exposure Rating

180 days

120 days

TYPAR offers 50% longer UV protection

70 Old Hickory Blvd., Old Hickory, TN 37138 www.typar.com TYPAR® is a registered trademark of PGI. MetroWrap™ and Surround™ are trademarks of PGI. Tyvek® is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont. Made In USA • copyright©2014


ENERGY SAVINGS AND COMFORT ARE BUILT RIGHT IN WITH ZIP SYSTEM WALL SHEATHING. ®

Building site courtesy of Miller & Smith.

SHEATHING & TAPE

Utility prices are on the rise. So it’s no surprise

WHAT IS ZIP SYSTEM WALL SHEATHING?

that energy efficiency is the first thing that

ZIP System Wall sheathing is an easy to install

comes to mind when building a new home. A little known fact is that heating and cooling account for an incredible 50% to 70% of the total energy used

structural engineered wood panel with a water resistive barrier and air barrier built right in. When used in conjunction with ZIP System™ flashing

OUTSIDE

INSIDE

surface is achieved,

in the average home. Air leakage is one of the most

resulting in a superior

significant contributors to this waste. The science behind ZIP System sheathing is the solution.

level of insulation. EXTERIOR CLADDING

DRYWALL ZIP SYSTEM SHEATHING INSULATION

SHEATHING & TAPE

tape, a seamless protective


SEE WHAT YOU CAN SAVE

HOW DOES IT WORK? The technology behind ZIP System sheathing helps eliminate gaps in what is known as the ‘building envelope’, reducing air leakage from areas such as wall joints. ZIP System Wall sheathing is so advanced; it eliminates the need for conventional housewrap, once and for all. FOR A HOMEOWNER, A TIGHTER HOME MEANS: • Energy savings- Homeowners with ZIP System sheathing save an average of 10.5% on their utility bills. • Increased comfort inside the homeProtecting against air leakage and drafts leads to a more comfortable living space where it counts the most.

AVERAGE ANNUAL SAVINGS ON HEATING AND COOLING COSTS

ANNUAL ZIP SYSTEM WALL SAVINGS ($ SAVINGS)

• Improved air quality- Air barrier systems such as ZIP System Wall sheathing keep families safe by protecting them against harmful pollutants.

WASHINGTON

9.1%

$187

WHAT IS THE R-VALUE AND HOW DO WE PROTECT IT?

PHILADELPHIA

10.5%

$225

BOSTON

13%

$353

DETROIT

12.5%

$242

SYRACUSE

12%

$318

PORTLAND

13.7%

$380

CITY

Calculations are estimated, based on a 2 story, 3,200 sq./ft home on slab foundation with gas heat and central air. Based on the following average utility prices: Electricity: 0.0750 $/kWh Gas: 10.67 $/mcf

R-value (also known as the resistance value) is the way the building industry measures the inherent thermal resistance of insulation. The higher the R-value, the greater the resistance to heat flowing through the wall cavity. Air leakage lessens the ability of insulation to do its job, namely to resist heat flow. The solution is an efficient wall system that creates a tight seal and allows insulation to perform at its intended level. ZIP System Wall sheathing is one of the easiest, most efficient ways to seal the wall system and prevent air leakage from degrading the R-value.

SHEATHING & TAPE

For more information, visit www.zipsystem.com/energyefficiency Sales Office: 10925 David Taylor Drive, Suite 300 Charlotte, NC 28262 Telephone: 800.933.9220 Fax: 704.547.9228 www.zipsystem.com © 2015 Huber Engineered Woods LLC. Zip System, the accompanying ZIP System logo and design are trademarks of Huber Engineered Woods LLC. Huber is a registered trademark of J.M. Huber Corporation. Patents Pending. HUB 8098 REV 3/15 Printed on 50% recycled paper from sources that have been independently certified for sustainable and well managed forestry practices.

Limitations and restrictions apply - visit zipsystem.com for details.


ENERGY SAVINGS AND COMFORT ARE BUILT RIGHT IN WITH ZIP SYSTEM WALL SHEATHING. ®

Building site courtesy of Miller & Smith.

SHEATHING & TAPE

Utility prices are on the rise. So it’s no surprise

WHAT IS ZIP SYSTEM WALL SHEATHING?

that energy efficiency is the first thing that

ZIP System Wall sheathing is an easy to install

comes to mind when building a new home. A little known fact is that heating and cooling account for an incredible 50% to 70% of the total energy used

structural engineered wood panel with a water resistive barrier and air barrier built right in. When used in conjunction with ZIP System™ flashing

OUTSIDE

INSIDE

surface is achieved,

in the average home. Air leakage is one of the most

resulting in a superior

significant contributors to this waste. The science behind ZIP System sheathing is the solution.

level of insulation. EXTERIOR CLADDING

DRYWALL ZIP SYSTEM SHEATHING INSULATION

SHEATHING & TAPE

tape, a seamless protective


SEE WHAT YOU CAN SAVE

HOW DOES IT WORK? The technology behind ZIP System sheathing helps eliminate gaps in what is known as the ‘building envelope’, reducing air leakage from areas such as wall joints. ZIP System Wall sheathing is so advanced; it eliminates the need for conventional housewrap, once and for all. FOR A HOMEOWNER, A TIGHTER HOME MEANS: • Energy savings- Homeowners with ZIP System sheathing save an average of 10.5% on their utility bills. • Increased comfort inside the homeProtecting against air leakage and drafts leads to a more comfortable living space where it counts the most.

AVERAGE ANNUAL SAVINGS ON HEATING AND COOLING COSTS

ANNUAL ZIP SYSTEM WALL SAVINGS ($ SAVINGS)

ORLANDO

3.8%

$58

ATLANTA

7.5%

$165

CHARLOTTE

7.5%

$151

NASHVILLE

9.1%

$130

CITY

Calculations are estimated, based on a 2 story, 3,200 sq./ft home on slab foundation with gas heat and central air. Based on the following average utility prices: Electricity: 0.0750 $/kWh Gas: 10.67 $/mcf

• Improved air quality- Air barrier systems such as ZIP System Wall sheathing keep families safe by protecting them against harmful pollutants. WHAT IS THE R-VALUE AND HOW DO WE PROTECT IT?

R-value (also known as the resistance value) is the way the building industry measures the inherent thermal resistance of insulation. The higher the R-value, the greater the resistance to heat flowing through the wall cavity. Air leakage lessens the ability of insulation to do its job, namely to resist heat flow. The solution is an efficient wall system that creates a tight seal and allows insulation to perform at its intended level. ZIP System Wall sheathing is one of the easiest, most efficient ways to seal the wall system and prevent air leakage from degrading the R-value.

SHEATHING & TAPE

For more information, visit www.zipsystem.com/energyefficiency Sales Office: 10925 David Taylor Drive, Suite 300 Charlotte, NC 28262 Telephone: 800.933.9220 Fax: 704.547.9228 www.zipsystem.com © 2015 Huber Engineered Woods LLC. Zip System, the accompanying ZIP System logo and design are trademarks of Huber Engineered Woods LLC. Huber is a registered trademark of J.M. Huber Corporation. Patents Pending. HUB 8097 REV 3/15 Printed on 50% recycled paper from sources that have been independently certified for sustainable and well managed forestry practices.

Limitations and restrictions apply - visit zipsystem.com for details.


SHEATHING & TAPE

KEEPING THE ELEMENTS OUT AND COMFORT AND SAVINGS IN SHEATHING & TAPE

For more information please visit www.ZIPSystem.com.

Energy Efficient Air Barrier Moisture Protection Structural Performance

© 2015 Huber Engineered Woods LLC. ZIP System, logo and design are trademarks of Huber Engineered Woods LLC. Huber is a registered trademark of J.M. Huber Corporation. Limitations and restrictions apply—visit ZIPSystem.com for details. HUB 8096 REV 3/15

www.ZIPSystem.com


The exterior sheathing system on your home

The best builders use ZIP System sheathing and tape. It’s the fastest way to a perfect tight house. And even though homebuyers typically don’t see it, especially after the home is complete, your builder has chosen to use a high-quality product that you’ll appreciate for years to come.

can significantly impact energy efficiency, comfort and all around build quality. Rest assured, your builder chose ZIP System® sheathing and tape. It’s a one-of-a-kind structural system with a built-in energy efficient barrier that keeps the elements

Structural Durability

This is an engineered wood product, created for superior stability and durability. We use the same technology and resins as award-winning AdvanTech® subflooring. So you can rest assured that your home is solidly built with the strongest wall system.

out while keeping comfort and savings in.

Superior Moisture Protection

During construction, your home is exposed to the elements. But with ZIP System sheathing, the water resistive barrier is built into the panel, which protects your walls from water. In fact, these panels have a 180-day exposure guarantee and there’s absolutely no need for housewrap.

Energy Efficiency Air Barrier

If your home’s walls are not well sealed, it could cost you a lot of money on your energy bills. Fortunately, your home is well-built with a system that reduces air leakage into and out of your walls, protecting the R-Value of your insulation. Housewrap simply can’t compete; it must be properly installed with fasteners, caulked and sealed, which rarely happens – it’s just too labor intensive.

Peace of Mind

We are so confident in ZIP System wall sheathing, that we back it with a best-in-class 30-Year Limited Warranty. And if you ever decide to sell your home, the fact that it’s built with high-quality, durable materials will likely impress prospective buyers.


A legacy of integrity. The Exterior Portfolio® brand of Royal Building Products is recognized as the category leader in innovative exterior design products and tools for remodelers, contractors, architects, builders and homeowners. Exterior Portfolio is synonymous with category innovations like CraneBoard® Solid CoRe Siding,® Portsmouth™ Shake and Shingles and Architectural Essentials™ trim and accessories as well as cutting-edge marketing tools like the Dream Designer® online visualizer tool and Dream Designer Boards. Through Royal Building Products, the Exterior Portfolio brand continues to bring to market exterior design innovations that make a confident and creative statement.

For more design inspiration, visit www.ExteriorPortfolio.com Find us on Facebook.

1441 Universal Road PO Box 1058 Columbus, OH 43216 800.366.8472

Innovators to the core.

© 2014 Royal Building Products

INSULATED

SIDING

ASTM D7793 & D6864/D7251

®


Window & Door Trim

Accents to make your home complete. Distinctive finishing details give a home a final touch of craftsmanship. Depending on the effect you’re going for, they can provide clean contrast

5" and 3.5" Window Lineal

Window Crown Molding

or matching harmony. Solid CoRe™ Architectural Essentials™ Accessories give you a wide selection of architectural accents, from a decorative threepiece corner post system to stately crown molding. Most Architectural Essentials Accessories are available in the same Smart Styles™ color palettes as CraneBoard.® All are engineered to fit smoothly with any CraneBoard

Windowsill Lineal

Integral Window Trim

Window Crown Molding, Windowsill Lineal, and Integral Window Trim are only available in Aspen White, Country Beige and Clay.

Corners

design style you choose.

smart styles expressions

For a decorative 3-piece corner system, combine the corner connector with any of the window styles.

3-Piece Corner System

Espresso

Regatta

Nutmeg

Graphite

Olive

Slate

Stratford Blue

Lighthouse Red

5.5" Corner Post

Decorative Trim

smart styles

Finish Board

Crown Molding

Clean styling makes an extraordinary statement.

Harbor Blue

Country Beige

Wheat

Aspen White

Cypress

Pearl

Mocha

Saddle

Clay

Honey Oak

Bone

Greystone

Rye

Driftwood

Desert

CraneBoard 6, CraneBoard 7 and CraneBoard Board & Batten are available in all 23 colors.

Give your home a classic, crisp-looking exterior with CraneBoard® 6. It’s the 21st century version of a time-tested surface that works in beautiful harmony with accents of stone, shake and board & batten, or can be used to cover an entire façade with smooth integrity. The triple-width, insulated span bridges structural imperfections for a flawless appearance. The milled cedargrain texture, straight face and deep shadows of the 6" profile give your house a solid, authentic presence.

1

Architectural Essentials Accessories are available in up to 18 colors depending on the product style. Exterior Portfolio® is more than beautiful, long lasting exterior products for your home. We believe in a sustainable future for everyone. For you, this means a home made from environmentally preferred materials. For us, it means cladding products offering benefits such as durability and low maintenance. All of our products provide a long service life that requires no harmful finishes. Because our commitment to the environment stretches from our home to yours, we engineer sustainable benefits into our product development process through innovations such as our Smart Track ™ moisture management system and our Solid CoRe™ insulation. To learn more, please visit www.ExteriorPortfolio.com.

6


CraneBoard® 6

CraneBoard® 7

Works in beautiful harmony with accents of stone, shake and board & batten.

A tried and true choice for a variety of architectural styles.

CraneBoard 6 Performance Features

CraneBoard 7 Performance Features

Authentic, straight-face design with hand-milled cedargrain beauty

Authentic, straight-face design with hand-milled cedargrain beauty

Smooth, locked edges, designed for “seamless” appearance

Smooth, locked edges, designed for “seamless” appearance

No Painting. No Scraping. True Maintenance Freedom!

No Painting. No Scraping. True Maintenance Freedom!

Neopor adds up to a 19% better R-value depending on profile

Neopor® adds up to a 19% better R-value depending on profile

Absorbs and reflects radiant heat with Neopor ®

Absorbs and reflects radiant heat with Neopor ®

Reduces thermal conductivity

Reduces thermal conductivity

®

®

®

200% stronger bond with our TXL Lamination Technology

200% stronger bond with our TXL™ Lamination Technology

64% greater impact resistance

64% greater impact resistance

Quiet! Reduces noise up to 45%

Quiet! Reduces noise up to 45%

Wind resistant up to 160 mph

Wind resistant up to 160 mph

Available in 23 colors

Available in 23 colors

Life of the Home Limited Warranty

Life of the Home Limited Warranty

Board & Batten

Architectural Essentials

Adds charm and dimension to a conventional façade.

Finishing details that give your home a final touch of craftsmanship.

Board & Batten Performance Features

Architectural Essentials Performance Features

Authentic, straight-face design with hand-milled cedargrain beauty

Natural, smooth look and feel

Smooth, locked edges, designed for “seamless” appearance

No Painting. No Scraping. True Maintenance Freedom!

No Painting. No Scraping. True Maintenance Freedom!

64% greater impact resistance

Neopor® adds up to a 19% better R-value depending on profile

Quiet! Reduces noise up to 45%

Absorbs and reflects radiant heat with Neopor

®

Reduces thermal conductivity 200% stronger bond with our TXL™ Lamination Technology 64% greater impact resistance Quiet! Reduces noise up to 45% Wind resistant up to 130 mph

Available in up to 18 colors depending on style Life of the Home Limited Warranty

Beauty meets versatility. The 7" clapboard plank is the tried-and-true choice for an infinite variety of architectural styles. From the traditional Colonial to the most groundbreaking Contemporary design, CraneBoard® 7 can be used as both a starting point and an exciting accent. Its expansive, architecturally correct width combines with a perfectly straight, deeply shadowed shape and hand-milled cedar finish. Add to this design superiority a selection of expressive colors and it’s a distinctive option for any home.

Available in 23 colors Life of the Home Limited Warranty

5

2


Straighter. Stronger. Smarter. • Only Solid CoRe™ backer foam has moisture management ridges that provide space for ventilation. •S  olid CoRe Siding® is made with Neopor,®* from BASF SE, that helps to absorb and reflect radiant heat.

Elements that add immeasurable impact. Architecture has rhythm and flow. Adding the charm and dimension of rustic, cedargrain CraneBoard® Board & Batten to a conventional façade offers a lively change in tempo. It can be the

• With Neopor,® the R-value of Solid CoRe Siding is up to 19% higher than standard insulated siding. • Our exclusive TXL™ Lamination Technology provides greater surface adhesion and that means over 200% more bond strength between the siding and foam.

influential element of a number of popular homes styles, from Craftsman to Contemporary. In

• Only Solid CoRe Siding has 64% greater compression strength, resulting in enhanced impact resistance. • The tensile strength of Solid CoRe Siding is 40% higher than standard insulated siding, which gives it a more durable, just-installed appearance. • Our denser Solid CoRe foam has 53% higher flexural strength compared to standard insulated siding, which means smoother, straighter walls. • Solid CoRe Siding also reduces noise by up to 45% so homeowners can enjoy peace and quiet while inside their home.

addition to its exceptional weather resistance, as an accent or a theme, CraneBoard Board & Batten

• Better technology means a better warranty. Our Life of the

brings vitality and interest to design.

Home Limited Warranty, the only warranty of its kind, is completely transferable to every subsequent owner.

3

Greater adhesion coverage *® = registered trademark of BASF SE

4


A legacy of integrity. Royal® Building Products’ Exterior Portfolio® brand continues to design innovations that make confident and creative statements. Recognized as the category leader, Exterior Portfolio is synonymous not just with state-of-the-art products like Architectural Essentials™ trim and accessories—but with cutting-edge tools like the Dream Designer® online visualizer, too.

For inspiring tools, design ideas and information about more products, visit ExteriorPortfolio.com. 855.769.2585 © 2017 Royal Building Products

VINYL SIDING ASTM D3679 & D6864/D7251

Consult the VSI website at www.vinylsiding.org for a current list of certified products and colors.

ELM GROVE DOUBLE 4" IN CYPRESS

The full expression of home. And you.


Make your statements personal and complementary. The shapes, textures and colors that surround you are all yours. They should reflect your view of the world, in which every shift in mood signifies a developing taste and an evolving perspective. So the place you find yourself and reveal your character is the same.

ELM GROVE FEATURES

AVAILABLE PROFILES

Raised grain finish features the texture of real wood No painting. No scraping. Virtually no maintenance Partial rollover nailing hem provides up to 155 mph wind load performance SlipStop® Lock system is engineered for great-looking installation every time

DOUBLE 4" IN CYPRESS

DOUBLE 4" DUTCHLAP IN CLAY

DOUBLE 5" DUTCHLAP IN GREYSTONE

SMART STYLES™

1/2” profile edge enhances the beauty and rigidity of each panel .040” nominal thickness

HARBOR BLUE

COUNTRY BEIGE

WHEAT

ASPEN WHITE

CYPRESS

PEARL

MOCHA

SADDLE

CLAY

BONE

GREYSTONE

RYE

Lifetime Limited Warranty

DRIFTWOOD

ELM GROVE D4 IN CYPRESS; PORTSMOUTH SHAKE CEDAR SHINGLES IN COUNTRY BEIGE; TRIM IN WHITE


A legacy of integrity. Royal® Building Products’ Exterior Portfolio® brand continues to design innovations that make confident and creative statements. Recognized as the category leader, Exterior Portfolio is synonymous not just with state-of-the-art products like Architectural Essentials™ trim and accessories—but with cutting-edge tools like the Dream Designer® online visualizer, too.

For inspiring tools, design ideas and information about more products, visit ExteriorPortfolio.com. 855.769.2585 © 2017 Royal Building Products

Consult the VSI website at www.vinylsiding.org for a current list of certified products and colors.

MARKET SQUARE® DOUBLE 5" IN GREYSTONE

Some moments occur as naturally as the world around them.


Bask in the serenity of your refuge. What if there were a place where joy and inspiration flowed like a spring stream? Where beauty lasted as if it were frozen in time. Where the only thing that surrounded you was comfort. Turns out: That place exists. And it’s OK if you don’t know about it yet. Just know it’s closer than you think.

MARKET SQUARE® DOUBLE 5" IN MOCHA MARKET SQUARE D4 IN RYE; PORTSMOUTH CEDAR SHINGLES IN CYPRESS; TRIM IN PEARL

AVAILABLE PROFILES

MARKET SQUARE® FEATURES Beautifully textured grain of forest-grown cedar

No painting. No scraping. Virtually no maintenance

SMART STYLES™ EXPRESSIONS Extra-wide 5/8" profile edge with square bottom edge provides enhanced shadow lines for greater visual appeal

.044" nominal thickness

CANYON1

OCEANSIDE1

HILLSIDE GREEN1

SLATE1

CARBON1

INDIGO1

ESPRESSO1

REGATTA1

LIGHTHOUSE RED1

GRAPHITE1

OLIVE1

MOCHA

SADDLE

DOUBLE 4" IN REGATTA

Special rolled-over nailing hem provides up to 180 mph wind load performance

Integri-Lock® locking system snaps panels tightly together for secure installation

Lifetime Limited Warranty

SMART STYLES™

DOUBLE 4.5" DUTCHLAP IN GRAPHITE

HARBOR BLUE

COUNTRY BEIGE

WHEAT

ASPEN WHITE

CYPRESS

PEARL

CLAY

BONE

GREYSTONE

RYE

DRIFTWOOD

HONEY OAK

DOUBLE 5" IN OLIVE

1

Not available in Double 5”


FIBERON GOOD LIFE Capped Composite Decking

fiberondecking.com

Cabin

Low-maintenance Good Life™ composite decking offers an unbeatable combination of price, performance and looks. Now anyone can break free from the limitations and upkeep of wood decking− at a price that doesn’t break the bank. •

Delivers exceptional value, unbeatable durability

Prefinished with a protective surface on three sides

Resists mold and mildew

Won’t rot, warp or splinter like wood

Never needs staining or painting

Backed by a 25-year limited warranty

www.nationwide-homes.com

Backed by the industry’s first Stain and Fade Warranty

Cabin

Cottage Actual products may vary from colors shown.


FIBERON GOOD LIFE Capped Composite Decking

fiberondecking.com

Cottage

Square Edge (SE)

Grooved Edge (GV)

Grooved Edge deck boards: Nominal .93 in. x 5.3 in.. Available in 12 ft., 16 ft. and 20 ft. lengths. Square Edge deck boards: Nominal .93 in. x 5.3 in. x 20 ft. Fascia: Nominal .75 in. x 11.25 in. x 12 ft. Fascia colors: Cabin and Cottage

Phantom® Hidden Fasteners • For a smooth, fastener-free surface with grooved edge deck boards • End clip fastener secures perimeter boards

Cottage

www.nationwide-homes.com

Line Fastener

Butt Joint Fastener

End Clip Fastener

Cabin


Cambridge

LIMITED LIFETIME ARCHITECTURAL SHINGLES

Color featured is Dual Brown


Cambridge LIMITED LIFETIME ARCHITECTURAL SHINGLES Cambridge is IKO’s most popular shingle among contractors and discerning homeowners alike. Cambridge shingles add architectural interest that boosts your home’s curb appeal. With their dimensional profile and deep shadow bands which mimic the look of wood shake construction, they can create a high-end designer look for your home, all at an affordable cost. Choose from a huge array of colors to coordinate perfectly with your home’s style; whether rustic or urban, traditional or modern. Even if you live in a maritime climate or area of high humidity, you can enjoy having a gorgeously colored roof free from streaks and discoloration. Cambridge premium architectural laminated shingles come in IKO’s special Advantage size. They’re bigger and heavier than most competitors’ products of comparable quality. Constructed with one of the heaviest mats in the industry for their class, Cambridge is engineered to withstand the elements for years, making them among the most durable shingles you can buy.

When you choose Cambridge, your new roof will keep on looking as great as it performs. •  •  • • • •

Color featured is Dual Black

Built-in algae-resistant3 granules 15-Year IKO Iron Clad Protection1 Limited Lifetime Warranty1 Includes up to 110 mph (177 km/h) Limited Wind Warranty1 Optional Limited High Wind Warranty Upgrade of 130 mph (210 km/h) available1,2 Miami-Dade Approved*


Cambridge Color Blends

AR

3

Algae Resistant

Product availability may vary by region.

Dual Black

Charcoal Grey

Harvard Slate

Dual Grey

Dual Brown

Weatherwood

Driftwood

Aged Redwood

Earthtone Cedar

Riviera Red

Vintage Green

These Cambridge color blends are only available in select shipping areas.

Exhibit 11a – Board of Directors, February 25, 2010

National Blue**◊

Super White†† ◊ RATED PRODUCT

††

Cambridge Super White is CRRC® listed and ENERGY STAR® qualified.

Patriot Slate ◊

Beachwood ◊ Product and color availability may vary by region, please refer to chart. 1 See Limited Warranty for complete terms, conditions, restrictions and application requirements. 2 High Wind Application is required. 3 This article contains a preservative to prevent discoloration by algae. * Miami-Dade Approved for Cambridge product made in Kankakee. **Blue granules may fade after extensive exposure to the sun’s ultraviolet rays. ◊ Limited Availability in USA and Canada.


cambridge

Everything You Need in One Roofing System

the iko advantage Limited Warranty1

Limited Lifetime 15 Years

Shingles alone are sometimes not enough to protect your home. IKO has developed a superior multi-layered roofing system incorporating our industry-leading products.

Limited Wind Warranty1

110 mph (177 km/h)

A complete roofing system ensures your roof’s optimum performance.

Limited High Wind Warranty Upgrade1,2

130 mph (210 km/h)

Iron Clad Protection1

Yes

Algae Resistant

3

4

Ridge Cap Shingles

3

Starter Strips

product specifications Length

40 7/8 in (1038 mm)

Width

13 3/4 in (349 mm)

Exposure

5 7/8 in (149 mm) 33.3 ft2 (3.1 m2)

Coverage Per Bundle

Underlayment

standards† ASTM D3462

ASTM D7158 - Class H

ASTM D3018

CSA A123.5

ASTM D3161- Class F

CSA A123.51

Eave Protection

ASTM E108 - Class A

Colors

2 1

1. Eave Protection - GoldShield, ArmourGard, or StormShield

Eastern U.S.A.

Western U.S.A.

Western Canada

Cambridge

Cambridge

Cambridge

Dual Black Charcoal Grey Harvard Slate Dual Grey Dual Brown Weatherwood Driftwood Aged Redwood Earthtone Cedar Riviera Red

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Vintage Green

4

4

4

Beachwood ◊ Patriot Slate ◊

4 4

Ice & Water Protectors IKO’s Ice & Water Protectors provide a second line of defense against water penetration due to ice dams or wind-driven rain and the costly damage it can cause. This product is also strongly recommended for sealing around vents, low pitch areas, ridges, hips, rake edges, chimneys, dormers, vent stacks, and skylights.

2. Underlayment - RoofGard-Cool Grey or StormTite® Underlayment Use our innovative RoofGard-Cool Grey or StormTite® synthetic underlayment for total deck protection.

3. Roof Starters - Leading Edge Plus Starter Strips

Fast, easy and convenient. IKO’s Starter Strips are already cut to size saving valuable time during the installation of the first course of shingles. Compatible These Cambridge color blends are only available in select shipping areas: with all existing IKO Shingles, Leading Edge Plus includes a sealant strip at the National Blue**◊ 4 bottom edge allowing for a tight seal. Super White†† ◊ 4 4 Exhibit 11a – Board of Directors, February 25, 2010

Note: All values shown are approximate. Miami-Dade Approved for Cambridge product made in Kankakee.† Product is designed and tested to comply with ASTM/CSA standards at time of manufacture prior to

4. Ridge Cap Shingles - Hip and Ridge, Hip & Ridge Plus,

Hip & Ridge 12 or Ultra HPTM High Profile Ridge Cap Shingles Ridge cap shingles are required where roof planes meet, and provide additional protection along these high stress areas of the roof, enhancing your home’s aesthetic appeal by accentuating the roof line.

packaging. **Blue granules may fade after extensive exposure to the sun’s ultraviolet rays. ◊ Limited Availability in USA and Canada. 1See Limited Warranty for complete terms, conditions, restrictions and application requirements. 2High Wind Application is required. 3This article contains a preservative to prevent discoloration by algae. Product and color availability may vary by region.

RATED PRODUCT

††Cambridge

Super White is CRRC® listed and ENERGY STAR® qualified in the US.

Shingle Swatches and House Photography shown are as accurate as modern printing processes allow. Shingle swatches shown do not fully represent the entire color blend range of the shingles. To ensure complete satisfaction, please make your final color selection from several full size shingles and view a sample of the product installed on a home. Be sure to look at the color sample of all material in natural sunlight, at different times of day to ensure that your color choices are complementary. The information in this literature is subject to change without notice. We assume no responsibility for errors that may appear in this literature. Find out more about our products now by talking to an IKO Sales Representative, your Professional Roofing Contractor or contact us directly at: United States 1-888-IKO-ROOF (1-888-456-7663), Canada 1-855-IKO-ROOF (1-855-456-7663) or visit our web site at: www.iko.com. © Copyright 01/15 - MR1L005


©

H:\Shared Files - Engineering\DETAILS\Dormers\Dormer Elevations Sheet.dwg, 9/4/2018 10:51:16 AM, jxm14


H:\Shared Files - Engineering\DETAILS\Door-wdwsched\Door & Window Schedule PH (Discovery).dwg, 7/30/2018 1:06:56 PM, jxm14


H:\Shared Files - Engineering\DETAILS\Door-wdwsched\Door & Window Schedule PH.dwg, 7/30/2018 1:05:55 PM, jxm14


WestEdge

â„¢

WINDOW SERIES


West Window Corporation

Mailing Address: West Window Corporation P.O. Drawer 3071 Martinsville, VA 24115

Phone: (276) 638-2394 www.westwindow.com

This information is current at the time of printing. Changes to product(s) may have been made since publication. Please consult your sales representative prior to purchasing.


DESIGNED WITH YOU IN MIND.

What do we see when we look through one of our windows? We see comfort, style, and versatility for our customers. The WestEdge™ family of windows was designed to be all of these things and more. Quality materials and consistent processes allow us to craft a beautifully engineered and durable product that lasts for years.


BUILT TO LAST. Our windows offer an environment of strength to brave the outside elements while efficiently maintaining the comfort level inside your home. We independently test and certify our products to meet most building codes and energy requirements. West Window’s attention to detail creates value and reliability you have come to trust over the years.


TOP-NOTCH

SERVICE. West’s windows are built to last and so are our customer relationships. We take great pride in personally responding to your needs without the use of automated systems. Representatives, with an average of 25 years of experience in the industry, provide exceptional service based on extensive knowledge of the products we offer.

Call us anytime at

276.638.2394


ENERGY-MINDED

Choosing windows for your home that provide the highest level of comfort and energy efficiency year-round is very important. With advanced technology Low-E2 glass, the WestEdge™ Window Series helps block the sun’s relentless heat and reduces fading of your home’s interior furnishings, all while quietly improving the comfort level in your home. Our standard dual seal warm edge insulating glass spacer and available Argon gas fill helps assure the utmost in comfort and efficiency. 1

WARM EDGE GLASS SPACER Our dual seal spacer system provides excellent thermal performance, a long-lasting seal, and improved sound control.

2

1 2

PREMIUM VINYL PROFILES SunShield® High Performance vinyl compounds are formulated to withstand the harsh effects of weather and ultraviolet light.

3

3

CARDINAL LoE2 GLASS

Go beyond ordinary glass and let Low-E2-270 help you handle the weather.

LoE 2

270

LoE2

LoE3

STANDARD

OPTIONAL

240

366

Advanced performance glass for most climates

Solar and Glare Control

Ultimate performance glass for all climates

OPTIONAL

ENERGY STAR qualified versions of this product are available for whatever region your home is in. Ask your sales representative for details.

For MORE GLASS OPTIONS please contact your West Window sales representative.

MADE TO CUSTOMIZE

WestEdge™ windows are custom crafted for your home and can be customized to complement your home’s unique style and character. Select from several grid-between-the-glass designs, custom exterior colors, and glass options to make your new windows a perfect fit for your home.

STANDARD VINYL COLORS

GRID DESIGN OPTIONS

INTERIOR/EXTERIOR

EXTERIOR PAINT OPTIONS

Grid-between-the-glass (GBG) options include our 9/16” or 3/4” Flat grid as well as 11/16” or 1” Contoured grid in several different patterns to suit your design taste.

Euro White

Euro White

Hunter Green Brick Red

Black

Tan

Brown

Terratone

Tan

Custom Color matching is also available. Replacement orders may require a custom color match.

Bronze

Actual colors may be slightly different than those shown.

Flat

Contoured


WINDOW STYLES

The WestEdge™ Window Series is designed to fit the versatile needs of your home. Whatever style and size you need, West Window has you covered.

AVAILABLE IN SIX DIFFERENT STYLES

Double Hung

Single Hung

Fixed Picture

DOUBLE HUNG

SINGLE HUNG

A Variety of Fixed Architectural Shapes

IF YOU CAN DREAM IT, WE CAN MAKE IT. Double Slider

Single Slider

Why

All of our windows are custom built to your order. Speak to your West Window sales representative for more information on custom shapes, sizes and options.

WestEdge

WINDOW SERIES

x2

BOTH SASHES SLIDE & OPEN

SLIDING WINDOWS

Our easy operating sliders look and perform great year after year.

EASY MAINTENANCE & OPERATION Durable solid vinyl construction for long lasting beauty and tilt in sashes for easy cleaning make the WestEdge™ simple to maintain and enjoy.

COMFORT

DOUBLE SLIDING

x2

BOTH SASHES SLIDE & OPEN

High efficiency vinyl combined with advanced Low-E2 glass and warm edge spacer technology help keep your home comfortable year-round.

CONFIDENCE WestEdge™ windows are independently tested and certified, and made by a company that has faithfully stood behind their products with great quality and service since 1949.

SINGLE SLIDING


We appreciate you considering West Window. We have built a reputation of being a manufacturer that has a solid understanding of what makes us successful. The key to our success over these many years comes from our belief that this is a people business that relies on attention to details and unparalleled customer service. Since 1949, we have demonstrated our commitment to providing exceptional products that are beautifully designed and engineered with ever-evolving building standards and energy requirements in mind.

W.E. Giesler, Chairman

PLEASE VISIT OUR WEBSITE AT WWW.WESTWINDOW.COM TO LEARN ABOUT OTHER PRODUCTS WE OFFER, SUCH AS: • Casement, Bow & Bay Windows • Storm Windows & Doors • Sliding Glass Doors • Room Enclosures AND MORE!


Autofroth Polyurethane Foam System ®

Better Home, Better Planet™ As the world’s leading chemical company, BASF plays a leadership role in shaping a sustainable future. We are committed to developing products that make homes more energy efficient, durable and affordable to own. Through innovation, consumer education and professional training, we are changing the way homes are built around the world. BASF is an ENERGY STAR® partner and a member of the U.S. Green Building Council.

At BASF, innovation comes in all shapes and sizes. What shape will yours take? BASF Corporation 1609 Biddle Avenue Wyandotte, Michigan 48192 www.basf.com/pur purconstruction@basf.com

AUTOFROTH® and slogan are registered trademarks of BASF. ENERGY STAR® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

Adding Strength and Efficiency to Modular and Manufactured Homes


Autofroth Polyurethane Foam System ®

A Keystone to Good Home Construction Insulation is a key component in a building’s performance. It is part of the building envelope, which separates the interior living space from the exterior elements. The right kind of insulation

Choose Spray Polyurethane Foam and Profit from Performance Keeps Good Air In and Moisture Out

Stronger and More Durable Studies show that ccSPF insulation, like Autofroth, significantly ®

increases rack and shear resistance, making a home two to three

Air leakage accounts for 25 to 40 percent of the energy used for heating and cooling in a typical home.1 Autofroth

®

ccSPF can help eliminate the leakage by creating a

should provide optimal energy efficiency; create a healthier, more

single, continuous, insulating air barrier from the floor to

comfortable interior; and resist the effects of moisture, making a

the wall and across the roof. By controlling air leakage

home’s construction more durable. Currently, there are a variety

home, builders can save by specifying smaller, more

of insulation products on the market, from the most popular,

efficient HVAC system components.

times stronger than traditional construction.3 The foam also bonds well to other construction materials and is stiffer and stronger than conventional insulation. In a factory built environment, this can mean a reduction in framing material, increased durability and fewer cracks during transportation.

and improving thermal performance in a factory-built

fiberglass, to the most effective – closed-cell spray polyurethane

Autofroth ccSPF insulation also minimizes moisture

foam ( ccSPF).

movement and is considered semi-impermeable to

Homeowners benefit from Autofroth ccSPF insulation because it:

water vapor (< 1 perm) at a one-inch thickness. In

• Improves energy efficiency, reducing energy bills

addition, it helps reduce wood decay, rot and mold

• Helps maintain consistently comfortable interior temperatures

®

BASF’s complete Autofroth® ccSPF system offers modular and

®

• Improves indoor air quality

growth. Closed-cell foams, like Autofroth, are the only ®

cavity insulations classified by FEMA as flood-resistant.

2

manufactured home builders a more effective and efficient way

• Helps reduce mold growth • Provides greater structural integrity • Is environmentally friendly

to insulate compared to other insulation products. It requires a

• Helps homeowners qualify for Energy Efficient Mortgages as well as consumer tax credits and rebates

low capital investment and has proven field performance.

Autofroth closed-cell SPF insulation helps builders meet Energy Star, and other high-performance and green building program requirements. ®

Photo courtesy of Palm Harbor Homes, Inc.

1. www.energystar.gov 2. Flood resistant materials requirements for buildings located in special flood hazard areas in accordance with the national flood insurance program, FEMA technical bulletin 2-93. 3. Studies performed by the National Association of Home Builders (NAHB).


What is SPF? Spray applied Polyurethane Foam (SPF), like Autofroth,® is the sprayed application of a liquid, two-component, non-fibrous product. When applied, the two components create a foam, which bonds to the substrate and dries, cures and hardens in seconds.

The Autofroth® equipment is easy to handle and operate. Drill shown for scale.

Autofroth Closed-cell SPF is the Better Solution ®

Autofroth Closed-cell SPF vs. Other Insulation Products ®

Autofroth® ccSPF provides builders with superior performance over conventional insulation and can act as an insulation, air barrier1 and vapor retarder.2

Feature

Autofroth® Closed-cell Spray Polyurethane Foam

Open-cell Spray Polyurethane Foam

Fiberglass

Blown Cellulose

Not Your Typical SPF Insulation The Autofroth SPF system is a closed-cell foam packaged in ®

Per inch R-value3

6.0

3.5 - 4.0

3.0 - 3.5

3.0 - 3.5

pressurized cylinders and applied with BASF dispensing equipment. Unlike other SPF systems, Autofroth is applied at low-pressure, ®

which makes spraying the foam safer and more economical to use

Approved air barrier at 1.5" thickness

at 5.5" thickness

in a plant environment.

Both Autofroth equipment and BASF’s high®

performance spray polyurethane foams have been successfully and reliably field-tested. At the plant level, we provide the expertise for Autofroth

Easy Setup, Less Cost

Seamless construction

Making You Feel Right at Home

The simple configuration of Autofroth ’s equipment goes a long ®

setup, layout and design, as well as polyurethane and equipment training, in-plant demonstrations, and ecology, health and safety support.

way to reduce setup costs. The polyurethane components are

Rigid

Fully adheres

contained in portable, returnable pressurized containers, which

Working with BASF also gives you the support you’d

eliminate the cost associated with drum disposal. And with the

expect from the world’s leading chemical company.

complete Autofroth system, you get dependable BASF support,

We can help you communicate the value of our

including local field technical service for quick response and next-

ccSPF insulation to your dealers and to consumers.

day spare parts service.

From concept through development, testing,

®

Adds structural strength

manufacturing and to market, we’re there with you.

Long service life

Fills difficult spaces

Low water absorption4 < 4% v/v

> 40% v/v

1. At a 1.5-inch thickness 2. At a one-inch thickness 3. R means resistance to heat flow. The higher the R-value, the greater the insulating power. 4. v/v is volume of water per volume of insulation. Table source: ASHRAE 2005 Handbook, Chapter 25, Table 4-Thermal Properties. This brochure complies with the Federal Trade Commission labeling and advertising of home insulation rules and regulations, Federal Register, 16 CFR 460 Labeling and Advertising of Home Insulation: Trade Regulation Rule; Final Rule, Tuesday, May 31, 2005.


Improved Technology Bolsters Your Bottom Line Easy and Flexible Autofroth Foam Dispensing Equipment: ®

• Can be portable or fixed • Provides spray or pour options • Has a low setup cost • Setup can be customized to individual plants to work with production process • Uses 110V electrical, so no additional wiring is needed • Readily available and quickly set up • Offers options such as programmable timers to monitor foam weights and foam quality

Safely Used Indoors

The Straight Shooter

1

The Autofroth ccSPF system is a low-pressure ®

spray that is easy to use and operate. 1

It uses nitrogen pressure to “pump” two polyurethane components through the gun.

2

The flow controller dispenses equal volumes of the two components.

3

The streams combine in a static mixer. The mixer helps maintain the foam’s consistent texture and pattern.

Nitrogen Supply

B

A

Component

Component

Autofroth dispensing equipment is designed to mix the polyurethane ®

components at significantly lower temperatures and pressures compared to traditional spray equipment. The low-pressure spray helps reduce the amount of personal protection equipment (PPE) requirements for both the operator

2

and surrounding workers. Typical recommended PPE for an operator includes gloves, long sleeves and a half-mask respirator. Static Mix Tube

3

Using Autofroth dispensing equipment and the proper ventilation, ®

surrounding workers can build as usual. Ask how BASF can tailor the Autofroth dispensing equipment to your plant requirements as well ®

as perform monitoring on a plant-by-plant basis.

Each Autofroth® system is comprised of a dispensing unit and cylinders containing Autofroth® components.


Kraft-Faced JM FORMALDEHYDE-FREE FIBER GLASS INSULATION JM Formaldehyde-free™ fiber glass building insulation offers superior thermal and acoustical performance— and it improves indoor air quality because it’s made without formaldehyde. Why is that important? Because the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) recommends limiting exposure to formaldehyde as much as possible, and the California Air Resources Board, a division of the California EPA, recommends that homeowners, builders and architects use building materials and insulation made without formaldehyde when building a home or remodeling. JM is the only company in the industry with a complete line of fiber glass building insulation made without formaldehyde. Visit specJM.com for more information. ™

JM Formaldehyde-free™ Thermal and Acoustical Fiber Glass Insulation

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Johns Manville Kraft-Faced insulation is a lightweight thermal and acoustical fiber glass insulation made of long, resilient glass fibers bonded with an acrylic thermosetting binder. The kraft facing can serve as an integral vapor retarder. AVAILABLE FORMS • Pre-cut batts – fit standard wall cavities and are faster to install than roll products. • Rolls – can be cut to fit any size cavity and installed in any part of a building. APPLICATIONS • Wood frame construction – residential homes and light commercial buildings • Metal frame construction – commercial buildings • Pre-manufactured homes – modular or manufactured housing • Engineered wood construction – assemblies framed with 12" to 19.2" (305 mm to 488 mm) on-center cavities, wide-spaced wood trusses or I-joists • Interior wall sound control – interior walls and floor and ceiling assemblies (for sound class ratings for wall assemblies, see the appropriate STC values data sheet for either steel or wood framing) INSTALLATION Kraft-faced insulation cuts easily with an ordinary utility knife. Stapling tabs are provided for attachment to wood framing. The insulation can also be installed with fasteners or simply pressed in place between studs or joists. The kraft facing on this product will burn and must not be left exposed. It must be covered with gypsum board or another approved interior finish. Where an exposed application is required, use FSK-25 flame-resistant faced insulation. Note: In colder climate areas, vapor retarders (whether attached to the insulation or applied separately) are often placed toward the heated or conditioned side of the wall. This is done to reduce water vapor penetration into the wall from the building interior. Conversely, in predominantly hot, humid climates local practices often call for placing the vapor retarder toward the outside of the wall cavity. Check your local building codes for vapor retarder requirements. PACKAGING This insulation is compression-packaged for savings in storage and freight costs. RECOMMENDED STORAGE AND TRANSPORT Store insulation indoors. Keep insulation clean and dry at all times. When transporting, cover completely with a waterproof tarpaulin as necessary. SPECIFICATION COMPLIANCE ASTM C 665, Type II, Class C, Category 1 ASTM E 96 Permeability (Kraft) 1.0 Perm

PERFORMANCE ADVANTAGES • Improves indoor air quality – because it’s made without formaldehyde. • Thermally efficient – provides effective resistance to heat transfer with R-values up to R-38 (RSI-6.7). • Controls moisture – kraft facing resists water vapor transmission. • Controls sound – reduces transmission of conversations and equipment noises through interior and exterior walls and floor and ceiling assemblies. • Noncorrosive – does not accelerate corrosion of pipes, wiring or metal studs. • Durable – unaffected by moisture, oil, grease and most acids. It will not rot, mildew or otherwise deteriorate. • Resilient – bonded glass fibers will not pull apart during normal applications and resist settling, breakdown and sagging from vibration. • Flexible – forms readily around corners and curved surfaces.


Kraft-Faced

Visit our website at specJM.com

JM Formaldehyde-free™ Thermal and Acoustical Fiber Glass Insulation

BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE AND FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION

ICBO SBCCI BOCA IBC/IRC

Kraft-Faced

Types III, IV, V

Types III, V, VI

Types III, IV, V

Types III, IV, V/All Types

Flame Spread*

Smoke Developed*

Not Rated

Not Rated

*Per ASTM E 84.

AVAILABLE FORMS* Specification Compliance ASTM C 665 Kraft-Faced Type II, Class C Category 1

R-Value (hr•ft 2•°F/Btu)

RSI-Value (m 2•°C/Watts)

38c 38 30c 30 25 22 21 19 15 13 11

6.7 6.7 5.3 5.3 4.4 3.9 3.7 3.3 2.6 2.3 1.9

Thickness** (in) (mm) 10 1⁄4 13⁄ ,4 8 1⁄4 10 1⁄4 8 1⁄2 7 1⁄2 5 1⁄2 6 1⁄2 3 1⁄2 , 3 5⁄8 3 1⁄2 , 3 5⁄8 3 1⁄2 , 3 5⁄8

260 330 210 260 216 191 140 165 89, 92 89, 92 89, 92

Metal Framing (in)

Wood Framing (in)

— 16, 24 — 12, 16, 24 — — — 16, 24 — 16, 24 16, 24

15 1⁄2, 23 5⁄8 16, 24 15 1⁄4, 23 5⁄8 12, 16, 19, 24 15, 23 15, 19, 23 15, 23 11, 15, 19, 23 15, 23 11, 15, 23 11, 15, 23

Width*** Metal Framing (mm) — 406, 610 — 304, 406, 610 — — — 406, 610 — 406, 610 406, 610

Wood Framing (mm) 394, 600 406, 610 394, 600 305, 406, 483, 610 381, 584 381, 483, 584 381, 584 279, 381, 483, 584 381, 584 279, 381, 584 279, 381, 584

* Consult your local JM sales representative or product availability chart for other available sizes and R-values (RSI-values). ** Thickness may vary by producing location. *** Special widths and lengths may be available. Check with your local JM sales representative. Standard product lengths include 48”, 93” and 96” (1.22 m, 2.36 m and 2.44 m) batts. c Cathedral ceiling application

SHORT FORM SPECIFICATION All insulation shown on drawings or specified herein shall be “Johns Manville Kraft-Faced Formaldehyde-free Thermal and Acoustical Fiber Glass Insulation.” Thermal resistance “R” values (RSI) of the insulation shall be R (RSI) ________ in ceilings, R (RSI) ________ in walls, and R (RSI) ________ in floors over unheated spaces. LIMITATIONS OF USE Check applicable building codes. Kraft-faced insulation should not be left exposed.

Technical specifications as shown in this literature are intended to be used as general guidelines only. The physical and chemical properties of kraft-faced thermal and acoustical fiber glass insulation listed herein represent typical, average values obtained in accordance with accepted test methods and are subject to normal manufacturing variations. They are supplied as a technical service and are subject to change without notice. Any references to numerical flame spread or smoke developed ratings are not intended to reflect hazards presented by these or any other materials under actual fire conditions. Check with the sales office nearest you for current information. All Johns Manville products are sold subject to Johns Manville’s Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedy. For a copy of the Johns Manville Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedy or for information on other Johns Manville thermal and acoustical insulation and systems, call or write to the 800 number or address listed below.

Properly insulating a structure using Johns Manville building insulation helps preserve our environment by reducing energy consumption for heating and cooling, reducing the pollution resulting from fuel burning, reducing the emission of hazardous air pollutants during manufacturing and reducing waste through the utilization of recycled materials. Look for the cross and globe emblem on Johns Manville building insulation which indicates independent certification by Scientific Certification Systems, Inc . of 25% or more recycled glass content.

Distributed by:

Insulation Systems 717 17th St. Denver, CO 80202 (800 ) 654 -3103 specJM.com BID-0016 10-09 (Replaces 10-08) © 2009 Johns Manville


Formaldehyde-Free™ Fiber Glass Insulation Enhanced with Bio-Based Binder

UNFACED KRAFT FACED FOIL FACED

PRODUCT DATA SHEET

COMPANY Johns Manville is committed to creating more comfortable, healthier and energy efficient indoor environments. We revolutionized the building insulation industry by pioneering the development of Formaldehyde-free™ fiber glass building insulation over a decade ago. We continue to build on our legacy of innovation with a new Formaldehyde-free™ fiber glass insulation solution that utilizes an innovative bio-based binder, made mostly with rapidly renewable plant-based materials, that continues to offer excellent thermal and acoustical performance as well as improved handling, easier cutting and less dust than our previous product. At JM, we believe that in every detail, materials matter. DESCRIPTION JM Formaldehyde-free™ thermal and acoustical insulation is made of long, resilient glass fibers bonded with our bio-based binder. A wide range of thermal resistance R-values is available to provide thermal control for both vertical and horizontal applications. JM insulation is available unfaced or faced with a variety of facings, including kraft or foil vapor retarder. USE JM Formaldehyde-free™ thermal and acoustical insulation can be used in a wide variety of wood frame, engineered wood and steel frame construction applications, including: New Construction: residential homes and commercial buildings interior and exterior walls, floors and ceilings for thermal and sound control, as well as basement wall insulation. Retrofit: adding insulation to attics, crawl spaces and above suspended ceilings. INSTALLATION JM insulation cuts easily with an ordinary utility knife, and unfaced or tabless versions install easily by simply pressing in place between studs or joists in standard framing. Standard facings have stapling tabs for attachment to framing if additional securement is required. PACKAGING JM insulation is compression-packaged for savings in storage and freight costs. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS Kraft and standard foil facings on this product will burn and must not be left exposed. It must be covered with gypsum board or another approved interior finish. Where an exposed application is required, use FSK-25 flame-resistant faced insulation. In colder climate areas, vapor retarders (whether attached to the insulation or applied separately) are often placed toward the heated or conditioned side of the wall. This is done to reduce water vapor penetration into the wall from the building interior. Check your local building codes for vapor retarder requirements. Refer to JM guide specifications for further design considerations and required installation instructions. LIMITATIONS OF USE Check applicable building codes.

PERFORMANCE ADVANTAGES Formaldehyde-free: will not off-gas formaldehyde in the indoor environment. Thermal Efficiency: provides effective resistance to heat transfer with R-values up to R-38 (RSI-6.7). Sound Control: reduces transmission of sound through exterior and interior walls and floor or ceiling assemblies. Fire Resistant and Noncombustible: see Specification Compliance. Durable Inorganic Glass: will not rot, mildew or deteriorate and is noncorrosive to pipes, wiring and metal studs. Superior Performance: bonded glass fibers are dimensionally stable and will not slump within the wall cavity, settle or break down during normal applications. ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT


Formaldehyde-Free™ Fiber Glass Insulation Enhanced with Bio-Based Binder UNFACED | KRAFT FACED | FOIL FACED

PRODUCT DATA SHEET

APPLICABLE STANDARDS & BUILDING CODE CLASSIFICATION* JM UNFACED INSULATION ASTM C665, Type I; ASTM E136 IBC, ALL TYPES

JM KRAFT FACED INSULATION ASTM C665, Type II Class C, Category 1 IBC TYPES II, IV, V

JM FOIL FACED INSULATION ASTM C665, Type III, Class B, Category 1 IBC TYPES III, IV, V

*JM Insulation complies with IBC (International Building Code), model code requirements for building construction types listed above.

STANDARD SIZES* R-VALUE (hr • ft2 • ºF/Btu) ∆ 11 13 15 19 21 22 25 30 30c 38 38c

RSI VALUE (m2 • ºC/Watts) ∆ 1.9 2.3 2.6 3.3 3.7 3.9 4.4 5.3 5.3 6.7 6.7

THICKNESS** in (mm) 2¾ (70) 3½ (89) 35⁄8 (92) 3½ (89) 35⁄8 (92) 3½ (89) 6½ (165) 5½ (140) 7½ (191) 8½ (216) 10¼ (260) 8¼ (210) 13 (330) 10¼ (260)

WIDTH† METAL FRAMING in (mm) 16 (406) 24 (610) 16 (406) 24 (610) 16 (406) 24 (610) — 16 (406) 24 (610) 16 (406) — 16 (406) 24 (610) 16 (406) 24 (610) — 16 (406) 24 (610) —

WOOD FRAMING in (mm) — 15 (381) 19 (483) 23 (584) 15 (381) 23 (584) 15 (381) 15 (381) 19 (483) 23 (584) 15 (381) 23 (584) 15 (381) 15 (381) 19 (483) 23 (584) 16 (406) 19 (483) 24 (610) 15½ (394) 235⁄8 (600) 16 (406) 24 (610) 15½ (394) 235⁄8 (600)

*Consult your local JM sales representative or product availability chart for available sizes and R-values (RSI-values) including wide-roll products. **Thickness may vary by producing location. † Special widths and lengths may be available. Check with your local JM sales representative. Standard product lengths include 48", 93" and 96" (1219 mm, 2362 and 2438 mm) batts. ∆For sound control applications in interior walls. cCathedral ceiling application.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES* PRODUCTION Unfaced Foil Faced Kraft Faced

FLAME SPREAD <25 <75 N/R

SMOKE DEVELOPED VAPOR RETARDER (PERMS) <50 N/A <150 0.05 N/R 1

WATER VAPOR SORPTION <5% N/A N/A

DIMENSIONAL STABILITY Less than 0.1% Less than 0.1% Less than 0.1%

*Products are tested in accordance: R-value ASTM C518 | Surface Burning Characteristics ASTM E84 | Perm Rating ASTM E96 | Water Vapor Sorption ASTM C1104 Kraft and standard foil facing will burn. Do not leave exposed. Facing must be installed in substantial contact with an approved ceiling, floor or wall material. Keep open flame and other heat sources away from facing. Do not place insulation within 3" of light fixtures or similar electrical devices unless device is labeled for contact with insulation. Use only unfaced insulation between wood framing and masonry chimneys. Do not use insulation in spaces around metal chimneys, fireplaces, or flues. JM Unfaced insulation is considered non-combustible by model building codes. Flame Spread 25 products are flame spread rated and can be left exposed where codes allow. See package for warnings, fire hazard and installation instructions, or call 800-654-3103. Due to potential skin irritation, unfaced insulation should not be used for exposed applications where it will be subject to human contact.

Visit our website at www.JM.com or call 800-654-3103 | Building Insulation Division P.O. Box 5108 | Denver, CO 80217-5108 Technical specifications as shown in this literature are intended to be used as general guidelines only. The physical and chemical properties of thermal and acoustical fiber glass insulation listed herein represent typical, average values obtained in accordance with accepted test methods and are subject to normal manufacturing variations. They are supplied as a technical service and are subject to change without notice. Any references to numerical flame spread or smoke developed ratings are not intended to reflect hazards presented by these or any other materials under actual fire conditions. Check with the sales office nearest you for current information. All Johns Manville products are sold subject to Johns Manville’s Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedy. For a copy of the Johns Manville Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedy or for information on other Johns Manville thermal and acoustical insulation and systems, visit the website or call the 800 number above. 717 17th Street Denver CO, 80202 BID-0144 6/14

© 2014 Johns Manville. All Rights Reserved.


®

COREtec Plus Engineered Luxury Vinyl Floor Commercial Maintenance Guidelines

Safety Precautions • • • •

When performing any wet maintenance, always put out wet floor signs and caution tape. When wet maintenance is finished and the floor is dry, remove all caution signs & tape. Carefully read and follow each product’s label instructions for proper use. Refer to each product’s MSDS for use of personal protective equipment.

Newly Installed Floor Care • •

Always use plywood or other boards when moving heavy objects across the floor. Follow the Initial & Routine Maintenance instructions below.

Important Note: If the floor was glued down: • Remove adhesive residue using a clean cloth dampened with mineral spirits. Follow label instructions • Permit light foot traffic on the new floor after 3-4 hours giving the adhesive time to set up. • Keep furniture, fixtures and rolling traffic off the new floor for 48 hours. • Wait 72 hours (3 days) before wet cleaning the new floor. This will allow the adhesive to fully cure.

Initial & Routine Maintenance (Daily or as needed) • • • •

Sweep, dust mop or vacuum the floor to remove all loose dirt and grit. Do not use treated dust mops. Clean the floor using a properly diluted Neutral pH cleaner (Hilway Direct – Neutral Cleaner) in cool water. Follow label instructions. Mop or machine clean using 175-rpm “Swing-arm” machine or auto scrubber with a 3M 5100 Red pad (or equal). Rinse the floor thoroughly with clean water and allow it to dry. Fans or air movers can speed up the drying time.

Daily Cleaning Directions: • • • • •

Sweep floor to remove loose dirt & soil. Using Mop & Bucket (2-bucket system) or Auto-Scrub Machine, dilute Hilway Direct Neutral Cleaner as directed on product label. Mop floor with the cleaning solution. Trail mop excess soil and wet areas with a clean, tightly wrung out mop. No rinsing required. Allow floor to air dry completely. C a u t i o n : Eye irritant. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Do not taste or swallow. In case of contact with eyes or skin, flush with plenty of water. If irritation develops, seek medical attention. In case of ingestion, flush mouth with water, drink large quantities of water and seek immediate medical attention, DO NOT induce vomiting. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. N o t e : Avoid solution contact with sensitive surfaces such as wood, metal, furnishings. When applying finish, avoid strong sunlight and drafts. Turn off under floor heat prior to application. Read full MSDS (available for download: www.hilway.com) and product label prior to use. H a n d l i n g a n d S t o r a g e : Protect from freezing. Recommended storage temperature: 68°F (20°C). Avoid storing in direct sunlight and high temperatures. Do not store near food.

3580 Corporate Dr. | Dalton, GA 30720 USA Phone: 800-404-2675 | Fax: 706-733-8120 | www.usfloorsllc.com

For reference purposes only if printed or downloaded.


®

COREtec Plus Engineered Luxury Vinyl Floor Commercial Maintenance Guidelines

Periodic Deep Cleaning • •

• •

Sweep, dust mop or vacuum the floor to remove loose dirt and grit. Do not use treated dust mops. Machine scrub the floor using a properly diluted Neutral pH cleaner (Hilway Direct – Neutral Cleaner or mild Alkaline cleaner (Call 1-877-356-6748 for recommended cleaner) solution in cool water. Use a 3M 5300 Blue pad (or equal). Let solution stand for 5-10 minutes. Do not use a black or brown pad. Completely remove the cleaning solution with a wet-dry vacuum or auto scrubber and do not allow the solution to dry on the floor. Rinse the floor thoroughly with clean water and allow floor to dry. Fans or air movers can speed up the drying time.

Hilway Direct Floor Finish – Matte Application Directions: • •

• • •

Dry sweep then damp mop floor to remove loose dirt and soil from floor. Thoroughly clean floor with Hilway Direct Neutral Cleaner or Allsafe Stripper. Remove any old site-applied acrylic coating. This usually can be done with Hilway Direct Allsafe Stripper diluted 1:5 or 1:10 with clean water, in an auto scrubber or low rpm swing machine with a red or blue pad or equivalent. Always rinse and neutralize floor with clean water after removing old coating. Do not let stripper solution dry on floor. Shake H i l w a y D i r e c t F l o o r F i n i s h - M a t t e vigorously for 30 seconds then let it settle for 5 minutes. Apply undiluted in a thin, even coat using a microfiber applicator mop. Do not use treated dust mops. Apply 2-3 coats. Allow each coat to air dry completely (generally 30-60 minutes) before applying next coat. Allow floor surface to dry overnight before heavy traffic use. A p p l i c a t i o n C o v e r a g e : Undiluted, single coat: 1500 – 2000 square feet/ 1.33 gallons. Coverage may vary depending on porosity of flooring material.

For more information on Hilway Direct products Order: www.1877floorguy.com/usflco.html Contact 12 McCullough Dr, Suite 10 New Castle, DE 19720 877-356-6748 support@hilway.com Website: www.hilway.com

COREtec Plus Commercial Maintenance Guidelines

For reference purposes only if printed or downloaded.

Page 2 of 2

Revised 8/15/14


®

COREtec Plus Comprehensive Warranty Program

COREtec Plus® Comprehensive Warranty Program This document details of coverage and limitations for the following warranties for COREtec Plus™ flooring planks and tiles: • Lifetime Limited Residential Wear Warranty • Lifetime Limited Structure Warranty • Lifetime Limited Waterproof Warranty • Lifetime Limited Petproof Warranty • 10 Year Limited Medium Commercial Wear Warranty Lifetime Limited Residential Wear Warranty The vinyl layer of the floor plank is warranted by USFloors, Inc. not to wear through under normal use for the life of the product. Vinyl layer wear-through is defined as 100% vinyl layer wear-through that exposes the core material over a minimum of 3% of the total installation. (Gloss reduction or surface scratches are not considered surface wear.) Dull finish can be corrected with spot or overall recoating care systems. If 100% vinyl layer wear-through is determined to have occurred, USFloors will arrange a pro-rated credit based on the terms outlined below in the section headed “Terms of Lifetime Limited Warranties”. This warranty is non-transferable and applies only to the original purchaser. This lifetime limited residential wear warranty is made subject to the following conditions: 1. The floor must be installed properly and according to USFloors’ installation instructions. Proper installation includes, but is not limited to the following: a. If glue is used, glue entire floor with glue that meets or exceeds PVAC dispersion with a viscosity of 8000 +/- 1000 cpc spindle 6/20 at 20 degrees centigrade – density of 1.11 =/- 0.02 g/cm on a dry content of 48 =/- 1% (weight). Upon completion of glued installation, the floor must be allowed to set overnight for 24 hours before resuming normal usage of the room. The glue down method must be used if the flooring will be exposed to temperatures above 140° F (60° C) or below 32° F (0° C). 2. The flooring must be used only indoors in a climate controlled area. 3. The flooring must be maintained in accordance with USFloors maintenance instructions. 4. This limited warranty does not apply to USFloors moldings and trims. 5. Installation of flooring that contains any manufacturing defect is not covered by this limited wear warranty. Lifetime Limited Structure Warranty The floor plank and/or tile is warranted to be free from manufacturing or material defects for the life of the product. Should a defect occur, USFloors will arrange a credit based on the original purchase of the product. Should a problem attributable as a manufacturing defect develop after flooring is installed, the cost of labor for repair will be covered by this warranty. This warranty is not transferable by the purchaser of the floor. Lifetime Limited Structure Warranty Coverage: Upon determination of a valid manufacturing defect, credit will be issued to the dealer and will be good toward the purchase of a replacement. When a defective product is installed, credit applies to material only and does not include labor since it is the responsibility of the installer to determine suitability of material prior to installation. Should a problem attributable to a manufacturing defect develop after flooring is installed, the cost of labor for repair will be covered by the Lifetime Limited Structure Warranty. The Limited Lifetime Residential Wear and Lifetime Limited Structure Warranty do not cover: 1. Damage due to adhesives or tape, scratches, gouges, scuffs, punctures, cuts, indentations, burns, accidents, lack of proper furniture rests, such as chair pads,etc., rolling and/or non-foot traffic, or any intentional misuse of the product. Loss of finish gloss over time is consistent with normal wear & tear and is not a product flaw. 2. It is normal and expected for there to be color variations due to use of natural components, exposure to UV light and/or sunlight, and age of material. Therefore, color inconsistency between samples, replacement product or illustrations and actual product is not a manufacturing flaw. 3580 Corporate Dr. | Dalton, GA 30720 USA Phone: 800-404-2675 | Fax: 706-733-8120 | www.usfloorsllc.com

For reference purposes only if printed or downloaded.


3. Manufacturer makes no guarantee that USFloors products will match or coordinate with customer furnishings, trim, cabinetry, railings, etc. 4. Noncompliance with installation instructions and maintenance guidelines as recommended by USFloors. Manufacturer cannot assume responsibility for the suitability of flooring material and accompanying products for each individual installation as manufacturer has no control over the installer's proper application. Should an individual piece be doubtful as to appearance or dimension the installer should not use this piece. 5. Cracking, warping, soiling, fading, improper maintenance or abuse caused by items such as roller skates, golf shoes or pets. 6. Floor covering installed in inappropriate locations is excluded from this warranty. 7. Gloss reduction or surface scratches are not considered surface wear. Dull finish can be corrected with spot or overall recoating care systems. 8. Damage to floor caused by flooring that is installed using the floating method that subsequently is heated to temperature above 140° F (60° C) or is exposed to temperatures below 32° F (0° C). Flooring exposed to these conditions must be installed using the glue down method in order to maintain warranty coverage. Lifetime Limited Waterproof Warranty The floor plank or tile is warranted to be 100% waterproof and the structural integrity of the floor plank or tile will not be significantly diminished by exposure to water for the life of the product. While moisture will not affect the floor's integrity, it is probable that, when excessive moisture accumulates in buildings or on building materials, mold (and/or) mildew growth can occur (particularly if the moisture problem remains undiscovered or unaddressed). USFloors moisture warranty excludes damage resulting from mold and/or mildew growth due to prolonged exposure to moisture. If the floor plank or tile is structurally impugned, resulting from exposure to water, USFloors will arrange a pro-rated credit based on the terms outlined below in the section headed “Terms Of Lifetime Limited Warranties”. This warranty is not transferable by the purchaser of the floor. This Lifetime Limited Waterproof Warranty excludes all casualty events involving water coming in contact with your floor and failures normally covered by homeowners insurance including, but not limited to, damages caused by flooding or standing water from leaky pipes, faucets, or household appliances. Also excluded are damages caused by flooding or standing water from hydrostatic pressure or other casualty events. The Limited Waterproof Warranty does not cover: 1. Damage to surrounding structure, walls, subfloor, fixtures, furniture, underlayment, moldings, trims, subfloor heating elements, or anything that is not the floor plank or tile. 2. Damage resulting from mold & mildew growth due to prolonged exposure to moisture. 3. Flooring that is installed outdoors. Lifetime Limited Petproof Warranty USFloors warrants that your COREtec Plus® luxury vinyl floor will resist staining caused by pet (domestic cat or dog) stains, including urine, feces, and vomit. Stain resistance means the ability of your floor to resist (i.e., minimize or withstand) permanent stains for as long as you own your floor. Cleaning of the affected area should begin immediately upon discovery. The more time that elapses before removal, the more difficult a stain will be to remove. The Limited Petproof Warranty does not cover: • Any urine, feces, or vomit stains other than pet. Terms of Lifetime Limited Warranties: • Within One Year: Claims on defects of this product as covered by this warranty that are reported in writing within one year of purchase, USFloors will arrange a credit based on the original purchase of the product or replace the product. Reasonable labor costs are included. • Between Year One - Five: Claims on defects of this product, as covered by this warranty, that are reported in writing after one year but within five years of purchase, USFloors will arrange a credit based on the original purchase of the product or replace the product. USFloors will pay 50% of reasonable labor costs.

®

COREtec Plus Comprehensive Warranty Program

For reference purposes only if printed or downloaded.

Page 2 of 4

Revised 5/20/15


Between Year Five - Ten: Claims on defects of this product, as covered by this warranty, that are reported in writing after five years but within ten years of purchase, USFloors will arrange a credit based on the original purchase of the product or replace the product. Labor costs are not included. After Ten years: Claims on defects of this product, as covered by this warranty, that are reported in writing after ten years of purchase, USFloors will provide the sufficient replacement amount of the product to repair the defective area of floor. Labor costs are not included.

10 Year Medium Commercial Limited Wear Warranty The vinyl layer of the floor plank is warranted by USFloors, Inc. not to wear through under normal medium commercial use for a period of ten (10) years from the date of purchase. Vinyl layer wear-through is defined as 100% vinyl layer wearthrough that exposes the core material over a minimum of 3% of the total installation. (Gloss reduction or surface scratches are not considered surface wear.) Dull finish can be corrected with spot or overall recoating care systems. If 100% vinyl layer wear-through is determined to have occurred, USFloors will arrange a pro-rated credit based on the terms outlined below in the section headed “Terms of 10 Year Commercial Warranty”. This warranty is non-transferable and applies only to the original purchaser and only if used in the following commercial areas: • • • • •

Retail: Novelty Shops/Boutiques, Product Display Areas, Sales Floors, Showrooms, Hair Salons, Hallways, Entryways (walkoff mats required) Medical Offices: Waiting Rooms, Patient Rooms, Examination Rooms, Storage Rooms, Hallways, Entryways (walk off mats required) Hotels: Guest Rooms, Conference/Meeting Rooms, Lobby Offices and Restaurants: Offices, Conference/Meeting Rooms, Showrooms, Restaurant Floor, Break Rooms Institutional: Classrooms, Training Rooms, Meeting Rooms, Commons Areas, Residence Halls, Hallways

This 10 year limited medium commercial wear warranty is made subject to the following conditions: 1. The floor must be installed properly and according to USFloors’ installation instructions. Proper installation includes, but is not limited to the following: a. If glue is used, glue entire floor with glue that meets or exceeds PVAC dispersion with a viscosity of 8000 +/- 1000 cpc spindle 6/20 at 20 degrees centigrade – density of 1.11 =/- 0.02 g/cm on a dry content of 48 =/- 1% (weight). Upon completion of glued installation, the floor must be allowed to set overnight for 24 hours before resuming normal usage of the room. The glue down method must be used if the flooring will be exposed to temperatures above 140° F (60° C) or below 32° F (0° C). 2. The flooring must be used only indoors in a climate controlled area. 3. The flooring must be maintained in accordance with USFloors maintenance instructions. 4. This limited warranty does not apply to USFloors moldings and trims. 5. Installation of flooring that contains any manufacturing defect is not covered by this limited wear warranty. The 10 Year Medium Commercial Limited Wear Warranty does not cover: 1. Damage due to adhesives or tape, scratches, gouges, scuffs, punctures, cuts, indentations, burns, accidents, lack of proper furniture rests, such as chair pads,etc., rolling and/or non-foot traffic, or any intentional misuse of the product. Loss of finish gloss over time is consistent with normal wear & tear and is not a product flaw. 2. It is normal and expected for there to be color variations due to use of natural components, exposure to UV light and/or sunlight, and age of material. Therefore, color inconsistency between samples, replacement product or illustrations and actual product is not a manufacturing flaw. 3. Manufacturer makes no guarantee that USFloors products will match or coordinate with customer furnishings, trim, cabinetry, railings, etc. 4. Noncompliance with installation instructions and maintenance guidelines as recommended by USFloors. Manufacturer cannot assume responsibility for the suitability of flooring material and accompanying products for each individual installation as manufacturer has no control over the installer's proper application. Should an individual piece be doubtful as to appearance or dimension the installer should not use this piece. 5. Cracking, warping, soiling, fading, improper maintenance or abuse caused by items such as roller skates, golf shoes or pets. 6. Floor covering installed in inappropriate locations is excluded from this warranty.

®

COREtec Plus Comprehensive Warranty Program

For reference purposes only if printed or downloaded.

Page 3 of 4

Revised 5/20/15


7. Gloss reduction or surface scratches are not considered surface wear. Dull finish can be corrected with spot or overall recoating care systems. 8. Damage to floor caused by flooring that is installed using the floating method that subsequently is heated to temperature above 140° F (60° C) or is exposed to temperatures below 32° F (0° C). Flooring exposed to these conditions must be installed using the glue down method in order to maintain warranty coverage. Terms of 10 Year Commercial Warranty: • Within One Year: Claims on defects of this product as covered by this warranty that are reported in writing within one year of purchase, USFloors will arrange a credit based on the original purchase of the product or replace the product. Reasonable labor costs are included. • Between Year One - Five: Claims on defects of this product, as covered by this warranty, that are reported in writing after one year but within five years of purchase, USFloors will arrange a credit based on the original purchase of the product or replace the product. USFloors will pay 50% of reasonable labor costs. • Between Year Five - Ten: Claims on defects of this product, as covered by this warranty, that are reported in writing after five years but within ten years of purchase, USFloors will arrange a credit based on the original purchase of the product or replace the product. Labor costs are not included. How to Make a Claim Any claim made under either of these limited warranties must be made by contacting your retailer within 30 days after the basis of the claim is detected. In addition, any claim under either of these limited warranties must be made before the end of the applicable limited warranty period. Proof of purchase including the date of purchase, must be presented to make a claim.

®

COREtec Plus Comprehensive Warranty Program

For reference purposes only if printed or downloaded.

Page 4 of 4

Revised 5/20/15


COREtec Plus Enhanced US Patent # 9,156,233 Technical Specifications

Description:

Patented Premium Engineered COREtec Plus​ ​Enhanced Luxury Vinyl Long Plank Floating Floor with Attached Cork Underlayment & Enhanced Beveled Edges

Warranty:

Lifetime Limited Residential Wear Warranty Lifetime Limited Structural Warranty Lifetime Limited Waterproof Warranty 10 Year Limited Commercial Wear Warranty

Installation:

Float, Glue Down

Size/Packaging:

Plus Enhanced 7” 7.09" x 48.03" x 8.0 mm Planks 23.64 sq. ft./carton, 10 planks per carton, 40 lbs. each carton, 35 cartons per pallet Plus Enhanced 7” - Color# 00764 7.09" x 48.03" x 8.0 mm Planks 28.37 sq. ft./carton, 12 planks per carton, 48 lbs. each carton, 30 cartons per pallet Plus Enhanced Large Tile 18” x 24” x 8.0mm Large Tiles 24 sq. ft./carton, 8 tiles per carton, 41 lbs. each carton, 32 cartons per pallet Plus Enhanced Tile 11.97” x 23.62” x 8.0 mm Tiles 19.63 sq./ft. carton, 10 tiles per carton, 34.17 lbs. each carton, 42 cartons per pallet Plus Enhanced Slim Tile 7.09” x 23.62” x 8.0 mm Slim Tile 18.60 sq. ft./carton, 16 tiles per carton, 32 lbs. each carton, 40 cartons per pallet

Pattern Repeat:

Plus Enhanced 7”- 5 Plus Enhanced Large Tile-4 Plus Enhanced Tile- 6 Plus Enhanced Slim Tile- 5

Construction:

1.7 mm virgin PVC (0.5 mm/20 mil wear surface) 4.8 mm COREtec WPC core 1.5 mm cork underlayment

Edges/Ends:

Enhanced Bevel

Wear Finish:

UV-cured acrylic

Gloss Level:

2% - 4%

TEST DATA ASTM-E648 Critical Radiant Flux: ASTM E492-09 Impact Sound Conduction: ASTM E90-09 Airborne Sound Conduction: ASTM C518 Thermal Resistance: NALFA 3.2 Thickness Swell: NALFA 3.3 Xenon Light Resistance: NALFA 3.4 Cleanability-Stain Resistance:

Meets or exceeds, Class 1 IIC 62 db STC 62 db R Value – 0.57 Class 4, Heavy Commercial Class 4, Heavy Commercial Class 4, Heavy Commercial

USFloors Inc. | 3580 Corporate Dr. | Dalton, GA 30721

USFloors Technical Services

Page 1

​www.usfloorsllc.com

Created/Revised 8/14/2017


COREtec Plus Enhanced US Patent # 9,156,233 Technical Specifications NALFA 3.5 Large Ball Impact Resistance: NALFA 3.6 Small Ball Impact Resistance: NALFA 3.8 Dimensional Tolerance: NALFA 3.9 Caster Chair: NALFA 3.10 Surface Bonding: ASTM C 1028-96 Static Coefficient of Friction: ASTM F-970-07 Static Load Limit: ASTM-F2753 Rolling Load Over Resilient FC: ASTM F 1514 Color Resistance to Heat: ASTM F 1515 Color Resistance to Light:

Class 4, Heavy Commercial Class 4, Heavy Commercial Class 4, Heavy Commercial Class 3, Commercial 1.31 N/mm – Exceeds Class 3 Commercial Requirement 0.68 (slip resistance) Passes ADA/OSHA standard 0.005 inch – Passes at 500 psi 0.024 inch Meets <8.0 Delta E Requirement Meets <8.0 Delta E Requirement

Certifications:

CARB Compliant GREENGUARD GOLD Certified

Environmental Statement:

USFloors' commitment is to provide consumers and specifiers with beautiful and durable floors at a good value, while minimizing our impact on the environment and enhancing and improving it whenever possible. USFloors is a member of the USGBC.

Country of Origin:

Manufactured in China

USFloors Inc. | 3580 Corporate Dr. | Dalton, GA 30721

USFloors Technical Services

Page 2

​www.usfloorsllc.com

Created/Revised 8/14/2017


1

COREtec™ Plank & Tile Floating Installation Instructions ATTENTION! READ BEFORE INSTALLING! In 2014, COREtec Plus® transitioned from a drop & lock glueless profile to an angle/tap glueless profile. The installation instructions below are for the angle/tap profile. For a copy of the installation instructions for COREtec Plus products with the drop & lock profile, visit www. usfloorsllc.com/products/usfloors.technical-documents/. FOR BEST VISUAL REPRESENTATION OF YOUR FLOOR This flooring replicates the look of a natural product which has natural variations in color, texture, and sheen/gloss. For best visual effect, shuffle planks or tiles from several cartons and do not install similar planks or tiles next to one another. SUBFLOOR PREPARATION Subfloor should be dry and level to 3/16” per 10 ft. radius for best installation results.

Angle-Tap Installation Instructions for COREtec Brand Floors READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS THOROUGHLY BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION. If the following instructions leave any unanswered questions or if additional information is required, please call USFloors toll free at 800-404-2675 (706-733-6120). FLOORING MATERIAL SHOULD BE INSPECTED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION Responsibility for the suitability of USFloors® flooring and accompanying products for each individual installation cannot be assumed by USFloors, since USFloors has no control over the installer’s proper application. Should an individual plank or tile be doubtful as to appearance or dimension the installer should not use this piece. USFloors will send a replacement in a timely fashion. NOTE: USFloors COREtec Plus floors may be installed with a direct glue-down method on approved wooden (or) concrete substrates that are on or above grade only. Use only USFloors Cork Underlayment Adhesive (or) comparable premium multi-purpose adhesives. Please consult with adhesive manufacturer to determine if suitable for use with this material. READ BEFORE INSTALLING While COREtec Plus is waterproof, it’s not a moisture barrier. It’s still a good idea to make sure concrete is cured and tested for moisture and that a moisture barrier is installed in the crawl space and even under a COREtec Plus floor over a concrete subfloor. Moisture won’t damage COREtec Plus, but it can get in the walls and structure of the home. A couple of extra dollars and a few minutes is a small investment for the added protection and peace of mind. Because houses and buildings, as well as adjacent hardwood or laminate floors, expand and contract, USFloors recommends to leave a ¼” expansion gap between the perimeter walls and any adjacent hardwood floor. Do not install COREtec Plus floors as a floating floor where it will be exposed to temperatures greater than 140° F. In areas where the floor may be exposed to direct, intense sunlight resulting in excessive heat to the floor, use the glue down method. Use good common sense installation practices, and you’ll have a successful installation that results in a beautiful floor. PRE-INSTALLATION JOBSITE REQUIREMENTS USFLOORS cannot be held responsible for site conditions. Carefully examine the flooring prior to installation for color, finish, sheen, and quality. Ensure adequate lighting for proper inspection. If flooring is not acceptable, contact your supplier immediately and arrange for a replacement. USFLOORS cannot accept responsibility for flooring installed with visible defects. Prior to installation of any flooring, the installer must ensure that the jobsite and subfloor meet the requirements of these instructions. USFLOORS is not responsible for flooring failure resulting from unsatisfactory jobsite and/or subfloor conditions. Flooring should be one of the last items installed in any new construction or remodel project. Crawl spaces must be a minimum of 18" (46 cm) from the ground to the underside of the joists. A ground cover of 6–20 mil black polyethylene film is essential as a vapor barrier. Joints must be lapped 6" (15 cm) and sealed with moisture resistant tape. The crawl space should have perimeter venting equal to a minimum of 1.5% of the crawl space square footage. These vents should be properly located to foster cross ventilation. Where necessary, local regulations prevail. Room temperature and humidity of installation areas should be consistent with normal, year-round living conditions for at least one week before installation of flooring. Maintaining an optimum room temperature of 70° F and a humidity range of 30-50% is recommended.

Visit our website for the current http://www.usfloorsllc.com/technical-info/ For reference purposes onlymost if printed orinstructions: downloaded.

022818


2

PRE-INSTALLATION SUBFLOOR REQUIREMENTS All Subfloors must be:

This floor can be installed on all levels

• Dry

of the home using

• Structurally sound • Clean: Thoroughly swept and free of all debris

floating method.

• Level: Flat to 3/16” per 10-foot radius Wood subfloors must be dry and well secured. Nail or screw every 6” along joists to avoid squeaking. If not level, sand down high spots and fill low spots with a Portland-based leveling patch. Concrete subfloors must be fully cured, at least 60 days old, and 6-mil polyfilm is recommended between concrete and ground. Subfloor should be flat and level within 3/16” per 10’ radius. Use cementitious patching and leveling compounds that meet or

exceed Shaw’s maximum moisture level and pH requirements. Use of gypsum-based patching and/or leveling compounds which contain Portland or high alumina cement and meet or exceed the compressive strength of 3,000 psi are acceptable. Ceramic tile, resilient tile and sheet vinyl must be well-bonded to subfloor, in good condition, clean, and level. Do not sand existing vinyl floors, as they may contain asbestos. INSTALLATION TOOLS • • • • •

For all installation methods: Tape measure Chalk Line 3M Scotch Blue™ 2080 Tape Hammer Pull Bar

• • • • •

Acceptable subfloor types: CDX Underlayment Grade Plywood (at least ½” thick) Underlayment Grade Particleboard OSB (at least ¾” thick) • Concrete Slab Existing Wood or Laminate Floor • Ceramic Tile Resilient Tile • Non-Cushioned Sheet Vinyl

• • • •

Pencil Crosscut Power Saw ¼” Spacers Tapping Block

STARTING YOUR INSTALLATION Because houses and buildings, as well as adjacent hardwood or laminate floors, expand and contract, USFloors recommends leaving a ¼” expansion gap between the perimeter walls and any adjacent hardwood floor. Work from several open boxes of flooring and “dry lay” the floor before permanently laying the floor. This will allow you to select varying textures, colors, and sheens, and to arrange them in a harmonious pattern. Remember, it is the installer’s responsibility to determine the expectations of what the finished floor will look like with the end user first and then to cull out pieces that do not meet those expectations. Begin installation next to an outside wall. This is usually the straightest and best reference for establishing a straight working line. Establish this line by measuring an equal distance from the wall at both ends and snapping a chalk line. The distance you measure from the wall should be the width of a plank or tile. You may need to scribe cut the first row of planks or tiles to match the wall in order to make a straight working line if the wall is out of straight. You may want to position a few rows before starting installation to confirm your layout decision and working line. When laying flooring, stagger end joints from row to row by at least 8” (20 cm) for planks, and equal to 12” (51 cm or a half piece) for tiles. For plank installations, you can use the cut-off end to begin the next row when cutting the last plank in a row to fit. If cut-off end is less than 8”, discard it and instead cut a new plank at a random length (at least 8” in length) and use it to start the next row. For tile installations, always begin a row with either a full tile or a half tile so that the joints are consistently staggered in a “brick work” type pattern. Always begin each row from the same side of the room. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS I. PRE INSTALLATION GUIDELINES These installation guidelines apply to the COREtec Angle Tap product. All instructions and recommendations should be followed for a successful installation. Required Tools: Tape Measure, Utility Knife, Jigsaw, Tapping Block or Rubber Mallet, Pull Bar, ¼” Spacers, T-Square, Safety Glasses, Broom or Vacuum and, if necessary, tools for subfloor repair.

Visit our website for the current http://www.usfloorsllc.com/technical-info/ For reference purposes onlymost if printed orinstructions: downloaded.

022818


3

Frequently moved furtniture should be equipped with felt pads to avoid scratching the floor. Heavy furniture and appliances should be equipped with non-staining large surface floor protectors. Furniture with casters or wheels must be easy swiveling, large surface nonstaining and suitable for resilient floors. Do NOT use ball type casters as they can damage the floor. •

This product can be installed on, above, or below grade.

COREtec floor covering is an interior product and must be stored/installed in a temperature-controlled interior environment, maintained between 55 and 85 degrees F or 13°-29°C.

Excessive moisture in the subfloor could promote mold, mildew, and other moisture related issues that will contribute to an unhealthy indoor environment. USFloors is not responsible for damages related to these moisture issues. USFloors recommends a 6 mil polyfilm when installing over concrete subfloors.

Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight as this will result in discoloration and expansion. The use of drapes, blind systems or protective window film is required.

Flooring should be installed after all other trades have completed work that could damage the flooring.

All subfloor patching must be completed with a Portland based compound and fully dried/cured prior to installation.

Inspect all planks for damage prior to installation. If you have any concerns about the product fit or finish, call USFloors Tech Services at 800.250.6690 Claims/Returns will not be accepted for any flooring that has been cut to size and/or installed.

Blend and install planks from several cartons.

II. SUBFLOOR PREPARATION All subfloors must be clean, flat, dry and structurally sound. Proper subfloor preparation is a major part of a successful installation. Subfloor must be flat – 3/16” in 10’ or 1/8” in 6’. Moisture emissions should not exceed 5.0 lbs per 1000 sq. ft. for 24 hours and should not exceed a relative humidity of 85%. We also recommend a 6 mil polyfilm moisture barrier to help prevent the growth of mold and mildew. When installing below grade, a 6 mil polyfilm is required.

Over Existing Floors •

Installation is NOT allowed over any type of carpet.

COREtec flooring can be installed over most existing hard–surface floor coverings, provided that the existing floor surface is clean, flat, dry and structurally sound.

Existing sheet vinyl floors should not be heavily cushioned. Soft underlayment and soft substrates will diminish the product's inherent strength.

Never use solvents or citrus adhesive removers to remove old adhesive residue. Solvent residue left in and on the subfloor may affect the new floor covering.

Radiant Heat: Radiant heat systems must have a minimum of 1/2” separation from the product. Maximum operating temperature should never exceed 85°F (30°C). Use of an in-floor temperature sensor is recommended to avoid overheating. III. INSTALLATION COREtec is engineered to be installed utilizing the floating method. Do not install cabinets or fixed objects on top of the COREtec. Proper expansion space is required. Undercut all doorjambs. Do not fasten wall moldings and or transition strips to the floor and planks.

Step 1: Begin installation working from left to right. Insert spacers at ends and edges where planks meet wall.

Step 2: Lock short end of plank by inserting tongue into groove at an angle and drop in place. Continue to end of first row.

Step 3: Use leftover plank from first row as starter for second row. There must be at least 8” between plank end joints on adjacent rows.*

*FOR TILE INSTALLATIONS: The distance between end joints should be equal to 12” for proper appearance. Visit our website for the current http://www.usfloorsllc.com/technical-info/ For reference purposes onlymost if printed orinstructions: downloaded.

022818


4

Step 4: Lock long edge of plank by inserting tongue into groove at an angle and drop in place. Slide plank toward end of previously installed plank until the tongue just touches the groove.

Step 5: IMPORTANT! Use hammer and tapping block to tap long edge of plank to ensure a tight fit. ANY GAPPING CAN COMPROMISE THE LOCKING SYSTEM!

Step 6: Attach a scrap piece of floor to bridge gap between ends of planks.

Step 7: Tap end of plank with hammer and tapping block to lock ends of planks together. Remove bridge and continue towards wall until installing the final plank in the row. BE SURE TO TAP ON EDGE OF VINYL SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE LOCKING PROFILE.

Step 8: Use hammer and pull bar to lock final piece in row. Insert spacer at end of row. Continue installation to final row.

Step 9: Use hammer and pull bar to lock long edges of planks on final row.

INSTALLING UNDER DOOR JAMBS Step 1: Undercut space under door jamb to allow plank to slide freely. Tap long edge with hammer and tapping block to lock long edge.

Step 2: Use hammer and pull bar to lock short end of plank.

Installation video: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RGi0YUcPsMA

Visit our website for the current http://www.usfloorsllc.com/technical-info/ For reference purposes onlymost if printed orinstructions: downloaded.

022818


5

In-floor Radiant Heat: COREtec Plus can be installed over 1/2" embedded radiant heat using the floating or glue down method. When gluing floor, use only USFloors cork underlayment adhesive over manufacturer’s recommended substrate. • Turn the heat off for 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation when installing over radiant heated subfloors • Failure to turn the heat off may result in significantly shortened working time of the adhesive • Floor temperature must not exceed 85°F (30°C). • Once the installation has been completed, the heating system should be turned on and increased gradually (5 degree increments) until returning to normal operating conditions. • Failure to strictly follow adhesive manufacturer’s guidelines may result in failure and void the warranty. Warning: Electric heating mats that are not embedded into the subfloor are not recommended for use underneath COREtec Plus floors. Using electric heating mats that are not embedded and applied directly underneath COREtec Plus floors could void the warranty for your floor in case of failure. It is best to install COREtec Plus flooring over embedded radiant floor heating systems and adhere to the guidelines listed above. AFTER INSTALLATION • Flooring should be one of the last items installed in a project. In order to protect the floors while other trades are finishing their work prior to final cleanup and turnover to the owner, use rosin paper and only use 3M Scotch-Blue™ 2080 Tape to hold the rosin paper to the floor (other blue tapes may damage the finish). Clean the floor thoroughly before laying the rosin paper to ensure that no debris is trapped underneath. DO NOT USE plastic film or other non-breathing coverings as this can cause the floor to become damaged from humidity buildups. • Dust-mop or vacuum your floor to remove any dirt or debris. • It is suggested that you clean the floor using a recommended pH neutral cleaner available at www.1877floorguy.com/usflcoplevp.html. • Install any transition pieces that may be needed (reducers, T-moldings, etc.).

Protection and Maintenance of Your Floor Lasting beauty can be achieved through purchasing a quality floor covering and providing proper on-going maintenance. • Furniture should be moved onto the newly installed floor using an appliance hand truck over hardboard runways. • Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight as this will result in discoloration and expansion. The use of drapes, blind systems or protective window film is required. • Do not expose COREtec Plus floors to temperature exceeding 140° F. • Oil or petroleum-based products can result in surface staining. Do not track asphalt driveway sealer or automobile oil drips onto the vinyl floor covering. • Caster wheeled chairs should have wide, rubber casters. Protective mats are required under office chairs. • Use non-staining mats. Rubber may discolor the floor. • Frequently moved furniture should be equipped with felt pads to avoid scratching the floor. Heavy furniture and appliances should be equipped with non-staining large surface floor protectors. Furniture with casters or wheels must be easy swiveling, large surface non-staining and suitable for resilient floors. Do NOT use ball type casters as they can damage the floor. • Use walk off mats at entrances to prevent dirt and grit from being tracked on to the floor. • Sweep or vacuum the floor regularly to remove loose dirt. Do NOT use vacuums that use a beater bar or turn beater bar off. • Do NOT use electric brooms with hard plastic bottoms with no padding. • Clean up spills immediately. • Damp mop as needed using clean water and a diluted pH Neutral cleaner (Bona Stone Tile and Laminate Cleaner, Hilway Direct HD pH Neutral Cleaner, etc.). Do NOT use harsh cleaners or chemicals on the floor. Do NOT use abrasive scrubbing tools. Do NOT use detergents, abrasive cleaners or “mop and shine” products. • Vinyl flooring, like other types of smooth floors, may become slippery when wet. Allow time for floor to dry after cleaning. Immediately wipe up wet areas from spills, foreign substances or wet feet.

Visit our website for the current http://www.usfloorsllc.com/technical-info/ For reference purposes onlymost if printed orinstructions: downloaded.

022818


COREtec Plus® Engineered Luxury Vinyl Floor Commercial Maintenance Guidelines

Shaw Residential Resilient Maintenance Proper care will help protect and maintain the appearance and performance of your Shaw resilient floor. A care program consists of key areas: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Post Construction Maintenance Preventative Maintenance Routine Maintenance Spot and Spill Removal.

Allow the recommended minimum of 24 hours before moving heavy objects. For new construction or renovation, construction dust and joint compound can be deposited on the flooring. If it is not completely removed and then wet mopped, it will create a haze on the surface of the flooring. Post Construction Maintenance • Dry mop floor using a micro fiber mop pad or appropriate floor vacuum to remove dust particulate from the floor. •

Spray neutral pH cleaner, such as Shaw Hard Surface Cleaner or ZEP Neutral Floor Cleaner, onto the floor in manageable area (spray mist will dry quickly). Use a micro fiber wet mop pad to mop the floor with cleaner. If pad becomes dirty, be sure to replace the pad with a new micro fiber wet mop pad. Work floor in sections.

Always rinse the floor with water only by mopping water to remove any remaining residue from the floor. In the event where dry wall dust/construction dust is mopped with water only, a residue film will appear on the floor after drying. Use the process below to remove the film from the floor. Process to remove construction residue or cloudy film from resilient flooring

1. Dry mop floor to remove any construction dust or exterior soil tracked onto the flooring. Use micro fiber dry mop pad. If micro fiber dry mop pad gets dirty, replace pad with a clean pad. 2. Spray neutral pH cleaner, such as Shaw Hard Surface Cleaner ZEP Neutral Floor Cleaner, onto the floor in manageable area (spray mist will dry quickly). Work floor in sections. For smooth surface, use a low rpm (175 rpm) buffer with a 3M red pad on flooring with neutral pH cleaner applied to the floor to remove the residue film. (Never Dry Buff). For embossed or textured flooring, use a cylindrical brush scrubber, such as the Clark MA10 12E Scrubber and a neutral pH cleaner applied to the floor to remove the residue film.

For reference purposes only if printed or downloaded.


COREtec Plus® Engineered Luxury Vinyl Floor Commercial Maintenance Guidelines

3. Using a wet micro fiber mop pad, rinse with water only to remove any remaining residue from the flooring. When wet mop pad becomes dirty, be sure to replace the pad with a new micro fiber wet mop pad. 4. Repeat steps #2 and #3, if necessary. When the resilient flooring is cleaned properly, the floor will have the same visual as right out of the box! Preventative Maintenance: • Always protect floors when moving heavy objects to prevent permanent scratches and tears. The use of plywood and heavy cardboard are examples of protective barriers. • Use appropriate wide floor protectors under tables, chairs, and any other heavy home furnishing to avoid permanent damage. • Walk-off mats should be used at all entrances to absorb soil and moisture. If mats are placed directly on top of the resilient floors, use mats without latex or rubber backings to avoid possible discoloration. • Use appropriate window coverings to avoid direct sunlight as this can fade the color of the flooring. • Do not use steam mops on your resilient flooring. Steam mops can cause damage to the surface of the resilient plank. Routine Maintenance: • Daily removal of dirt and dust is important to prevent particles from abrading the surface of resilient floors. Sweeping, dust mopping, and vacuuming are recommendations to remove soil particles that can result in scratches and worn appearances. Do not use vacuums with rotating beater bars on hard surfaces. • Periodic wet cleaning will be necessary to help maintain the floor’s appearance. Always pre-vacuum or dust mop before any type of wet cleaning. Appropriate vinyl floor cleaning equipment and cleaning agents (neutral pH cleaners) are recommended. Do not use abrasive cleaners or cleaning agents that leave dull residues on the surface of the floors. Follow the cleaning manufacturer’s instructions for damp mopping and application. If rinsing is necessary, use clean water and expedite drying with air movers or fans. • Shaw R2x Hard Surfaces Flooring Cleaner or ZEP Neutral Floor Cleaner are recommended for general spotting and cleaning. • Avoid using mop and shine products on your resilient flooring.

For reference purposes only if printed or downloaded.


COREtec Plus® Engineered Luxury Vinyl Floor Commercial Maintenance Guidelines

Spot and Spill Removal: Shaw’s flooring products are engineered to resist and minimize common staining. • • • •

Absorb wet spills as quickly as possible by blotting with white paper or cloth towels. Rinse with water if necessary and blot dry. Dried spots should be removed by gentle agitation and rinsed with water. Blot dry. Use Shaw R2x Hard Surface cleaning products or products formulated for vinyl floor cleaning. Do not use detergents or abrasive cleaners since these products can leave a dull residue. Use rubbing alcohol (isopropyl alcohol) with a clean white cloth for spots requiring a solvent type cleaner that water and cleaning agents cannot remove.

Please note that some stain conditions may become permanent. Safety Caution: The surfaces of resilient floors change during wet cleaning and finish applications. Use appropriate safety measures. Technical Service Bulletin No. 523 – 3/2018

For reference purposes only if printed or downloaded.


FLOOR

LINDEN POINT ™

GLAZED PORCELAIN with REVEAL IMAGING ®


Above and cover photos feature Grigio 12 x 24 field tile in a grid pattern on the floor.

Find Modern Appeal in a Soft Stone Look

The contemporary look of Linden Point™ emulates a soft linear stone with varying horizontal veining. Its 12 x 24 size, soft texture finish and versatile color palette add to its modern appeal. Enhance your space with the modern and versatile look of Linden Point.

• CONTEMPORARY VISUAL -- Emulates the modern look of soft stone

PRE-CONSUMER RECYCLED MATERIALS

-- Features flowing linear movement and texture

REVEAL IMAGING ®

• MODERN AND VERSATILE -- Versatile warm color palette -- Contemporary sizing


FLOOR

LINDEN POINT ™ GLAZED PORCELAIN with REVEAL IMAGING ®

FIELD TILE

BIANCO LP19

BEIGE LP20

GRIGIO LP21


FLOOR

LINDEN POINT ™ GLAZED PORCELAIN with REVEAL IMAGING ®

SIZES

TRIM

12 x 24ª Field Tile

(11-13/16" x 23-13/16") (30.00 cm x 60.48 cm)

Thickness

Sq. Ft. per Carton

Pieces Per Carton

3/8"

15.60

8

ª This product is manufactured regionally. Slight variances in size and shading may occur between regions. Please contact your sales representative to verify carton square footage. As with all tile projects, be sure to purchase sufficient quantities with your initial order.

Type

Number

Size

Pieces Per Carton

Bullnose

P-43C9

3 x 12

30

Bullnose is intended to coordinate with floor field tile in the standard 90-degree installation position.

INSTALLATION Grout Joint Recommendation

FLOOR APPLICATIONS Target DCOF wet Dry & Level – Interior

N/A

Wet & Level – Interior

≥ 0.42

Exterior Applications, Pool Decking & Other Wet Areas with Minimal Footwear

≥ 0.60

Ramps & Inclines

≥ 0.65

Suitable

Shade Variation

3/16" (overlap should not exceed 33% when installing rectangular size in a staggered brick-joint pattern)

High (V3)

TEST RESULTS ASTM#

Result

C373

< 0.5%

Breaking Strength

C648

> 275 lbs.

Scratch Hardness

MOHS

7.0

Chemical Resistance

C650

Resistant

Abrasion Resistance

C1027

4

Water Absorption

A DCOF value of ≥ 0.42 is the new standard for tiles specified for commercial application in standard A137.1–2012, Section 9.6. It replaces the SCOF value of ≥ 0.60 referenced in ASTM C1028. For more information on the correlation between the two values and about the DCOF AcuTest™, visit www.daltile.com/dcof.

For additional information, visit daltile.com/information/TestResults.

OTHER APPLICATIONS Suitable Walls/Backsplashes

NOTES

Countertops

Special consideration needs to be given when installing tiles 20" and larger. Please refer to daltile.com/LargeTiles for more information.

Pool Linings

Use of a latex modified thin-set is recommended for installation.

APPLICATION NOTES: Suitable for exterior applications in freezing and non-freezing climates when proper installation methods are followed.

Since there are variations in all fired ceramic products, tile and trim supplied for your particular installation may not match these samples. Final color selection should be made from actual tiles and trim and not from tile samples or color reproductions. Manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.1 standards. Water, oil, grease, etc. create slippery conditions. Floor applications with exposure to these conditions require extra caution in product selection. Not for use on ramps. For additional information refer to “Factors to Consider” at daltile.com/Factors.

DESIGNED TO HELP EARN LEED™ CREDITS. For more detailed information, visit daltilegreenworks.com.

SCAN QR CODE FOR PRODUCT INFORMATION

7834 C. F. Hawn Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75217 | 1.800.933.TILE

Get a QR Code reader at: GET.DALTILE.COM

To view the complete collection of Daltile® products and information, visit our website at daltile.com. Generated by BeQRious.com

©2016 Dal-Tile Corporation (5/16)


FLOOR

SANTINO ™

COLORBODY ™ PORCELAIN


Above and cover photos feature Bianco 12 x 24 field tile in a grid pattern on the floor.

The Elegant Look of Travertine Paired with Ultimate Durability

The elegant style of Santino™ was inspired by the beautiful variances of travertine veining, natural wood grain and fabric weaves. Complete with a natural color palette, this contemporary flooring is perfect for architects, designers and homeowners alike. • UNIQUE AND VISUAL SURFACE -- Inspired by the beautiful variances of travertine veining, natural wood grain and fabric weaves -- Gorgeous reflective shimmer in the veining of the textured surface • ELEGANT, YET DURABLE -- Contemporary colors ranging from a crisp white to a rich dark brown -- Available in large-format and popular linear sizes for broad, open spaces -- Ideal for residential and commercial spaces wanting style and durability

PRE-CONSUMER RECYCLED MATERIALS TRU-EDGE


FLOOR

SANTINO ™ COLORBODY ™ PORCELAIN

FIELD TILE

BIANCO SN06

GRIGIO SN08

CHIARO SN07

BRUNO SN09


FLOOR

SANTINO ™ COLORBODY ™ PORCELAIN

SIZES

TRIM Thickness

Sq. Ft. Pieces per per Carton Carton

18 x 36 Field Tile

(17-1/2" x 35-1/8") (44.50 cm x 89.32 cm)

18 x 18 Field Tile

(17-1/2" x 17-1/2") (44.50 cm x 44.50 cm)

3/8"

12 x 24 Field Tile

(11-5/8" x 23-7/16") (29.56 cm x 59.44 cm)

3/8"

15.28

8

6 x 24 Field Tile

(5-3/4" x 23-7/16") (14.62 cm x 59.44 cm)

3/8"

10.67

11

3/8"

17.39

4

Type

Number

Size

Pieces per Carton

Bullnose

S-44H9

4 x 18

10

S-36C9TB

6 x 12

20

SC-36C9TB

1x6

10

Cove Base 17.39

8 Cove Corner

Bullnose, cove base, and cove base corner trim are intended to coordinate with floor field tile in the standard 90-degree installation position.

INSTALLATION Grout Joint Recommendation

FLOOR APPLICATIONS Target DCOF wet Dry & Level – Interior

N/A

Wet & Level – Interior

≥ 0.42

Suitable

Shade Variation

1/8" (3/16" when installed in a staggered brick-joint pattern; overlap should not exceed 33%)

TEST RESULTS ASTM#

Exterior Applications; Pool Decking & Other Wet Areas with Minimal Footwear

≥ 0.60

Ramps & Inclines

≥ 0.65

High (V3)

A DCOF value of ≥ 0.42 is the standard for tiles specified for level interior spaces expected to be walked upon when wet, as stated in ANSI A137.1-2012, Section 9.6. For more information about DCOF and the DCOF AcuTest™, visit daltile.com/DCOF.

OTHER APPLICATIONS

Result

Water Absorption

C373

< 0.5%

Breaking Strength

C648

> 275 lbs.

Scratch Hardness

MOHS

8.0

Chemical Resistance

C650

Resistant

NOTES Suitable

Walls/Backsplashes

Special consideration needs to be given when installing tiles greater than 15 inches. Please refer to daltile.com/LargeTiles for more information. Special care should be taken when grouting with dark pigmented colors. A grout release is recommended to prevent finely powdered pigments from lodging in the pores of the surface. Use of a latex modified thin-set is recommended for installation.

Countertops Pool Linings APPLICATION NOTES: Suitable for exterior applications in freezing and non-freezing climates when proper installation methods are followed.

Since there are variations in all fired ceramic products, tile and trim supplied for your particular installation may not match these samples. Final color selection should be made from actual tiles and trim and not from tile samples or color reproductions. Manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.1 standards. Water, oil, grease, etc. create slippery conditions. Floor applications with exposure to these conditions require extra caution in product selection. Not for use on ramps. For additional information refer to “Factors to Consider” at daltile.com/Factors.

DESIGNED TO HELP EARN LEED™ CREDITS. For more detailed information, visit daltilegreenworks.com.

SCAN QR CODE FOR PRODUCT INFORMATION

7834 C. F. Hawn Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75217 | 1.800.933.TILE

Get a QR Code reader at: GET.DALTILE.COM

To view the complete collection of Daltile® products and information, visit our website at daltile.com. Generated by BeQRious.com

©2016 Dal-Tile Corporation (7/16)


Coverphoto features Yorkw ood M anorâ&#x201E;˘ Pecan 6 x 36 on the floor. A bove photo features Yorkw ood M anorâ&#x201E;˘ B irchtree 6 x 36 on the floor.

D esign w ith the Style of H istoric N ew England


FLO O R TILE

PECA N YM 02

D EEP W A LN U T YM 03

B IR CH TR EE YM 01


SIZ ES

TR IM Thickness

6 x 36 (5-7/8"x 35-7/16") FloorTile (15.00 cm x 90.00 cm )

Sq.Ft. Pieces Per per Carton Carton

5/16"

13.05

9

Type

N um ber

Size

Pieces Per Carton

B ullnose

S-43H 9

3 x 18

16

B ullnose trim is intended to coordinate w ith floortile in the standard 90-degree installation position.

FLO O R A P P LIC A TIO N S Target D CO F w et D ry & Level– Interior

IN STA LLA TIO N Suitable

N /A

W et & Level– Interior

0.42

ExteriorA pplications, PoolD ecking & O therW et A reas w ith M inim alFootw ear

0.60

R am ps & Inclines

0.65

G rout Joint R ecom m endation

Shade Variation

3/16"(overlap should not exceed 33% w hen installing tile w ith a length of15"orgreaterin a staggered brick-joint pattern)

R andom (V 4)

TEST R E SU LTS

A D CO F value of 0.42 is the standard fortiles specified forlevelinteriorspaces expected to be w alked upon w hen w et,as stated in A N SIA 137.1-2012,Section 9.6. For m ore inform ation about D CO F and the D CO F A cuTest™ ,visit daltile.com /D CO F.

A STM #

Result

W aterA bsorption

C373

< 0.5%

B reaking Strength

C648

> 275 lbs

Scratch H ardness

M O HS

8.0

W alls/B acksplashes

Chem icalResistance

C650

R esistant

Countertops

A brasion R esistance

C10 27

4

PoolLinings

Foradditionalinform ation,visit daltile.com /inform ation/TestR esults.

O TH E R A P P LIC A TIO N S Suitable

A PPLICATIO N N O TES:

N O TE S

Suitable forexteriorapplications in freezing and non-freezing clim ates w hen proper installation m ethods are follow ed.

Specialconsideration m ust be given w hen installing tiles greaterthan 15 inches.Please referto daltile.com /LargeTiles form ore inform ation. U se ofa latex m odified thin-set is recom m ended forinstallation. Strong random shading enhances the naturalbeauty ofthis product. To achieve optim alresults,tile should be selected from m ultiple cartons and shading arrangem ent planned priorto installation. Since there are variations in allfired ceram ic products,tile and trim supplied foryourparticularinstallation m ay not m atch these sam ples.Finalcolorselection should be m ade from actualtiles and trim and not from tile sam ples orcolorreproductions.M anufactured in accordance w ith A N SIA 137.1standards. W ater,oil,grease,etc.create slippery conditions.Floorapplications w ith exposure to these conditions require extra caution in product selection.N ot foruse on ram ps. Foradditionalinform ation referto “Factors to Consider”at daltile.com /Factors.

D ESIG N ED TO H ELP EA R N LEED ™ CR ED ITS.Form ore detailed inform ation, visit daltilegreenw orks.com .

SCA N Q R CO D E FO R PR O D U CT IN FO R M ATIO N

7834 C .F.H aw n Freew ay, D allas,Texas 75217 | 1.800.933.TILE

G et a Q R Code readerat: G ET.D A LTILE.CO M

To view the com plete collection of D altile® products and inform ation, visit ourw ebsite at daltile.com .

© 20 16 D altile (12/16)


Barnwood

Lake House

Smoke House

Actual Material May Differ In Color* Nationwide Custom Homes Copyright © 2018


L A MI NAT E

CLASSIC RECLAIMED 7mm

1017 Snowhill Pine

2266 Cottage Oak

7710 Bistro Oak

8008 Crimson Pine

shawfloors.com direct 04.16.2018 HS-249351-18

7029 Sterling Oak


CLASSIC RECLAIMED Style Number

SL108

Thickness

7mm

Length

503/4"

Width

71/2"

Texture

Low Lustre

Edge Description

Square

SF per carton

26.80

SF per pallet

1500.80

L A M I N ATE

Sundry Recommendations Style Number

Style Name

Coverage

SilentStep Ultra

100 SF per roll

UNDERLAYMENT SLSSU SL100

Selitac

100 SF per roll

SL101

Selitac Tape

1 roll per 600 SF or 1 roll per six boxes

SLSFP

SofSound II

200 SF per roll

100SU

LU-100

100 SF per roll

Hard Surface Cleaner

32 oz. spray bottle

CLEANER SHCLN

Trim Pieces length: 7' 10" (when ordering please include color number)

SVMPR

Multi Purpose Reducer

Benefits RESID

E

Y

W

A

IAL

20 year

NT

LIMITE

D

RRANT

ANGLE TAP

shawfloors.com direct 04.16.2018 HS-249351-18

SVTMD

T-Molding

SVQTR Quarter Round

SVSTR

Stairnose

SVTRK

Molding Track


ENDURA

enhanced vinyl plank pro

THE PROOF IS IN THE PRO.™

COMMERCIAL

150 Cinnamon Walnut

MULTI-FAMILY

RESIDENTIAL

142 Gray 138Barnwood Ivory Oak

556 Smoky Oak

THE EXPECTED DEPENDABILITY OF SHAW LVT ENGINEERED FOR EVEN HIGHER PERFORMANCE

Our hardest working resilient flooring, Floorté PRO is constructed to endure the most demanding environments. This product is designed for exceptional dimensional stability with a performance core that is denser and resists even more impact.

ENHANCED DURABILITY Floorte PRO will perform under heavy foot traffic and stationary loads.

MINIMAL SUBFLOOR PREP Floorté PRO is designed to mitigate issues with subfloors that need alot of prep work.

shawfloors.com 08.25.2017

IMPROVED DIMENSIONAL STABILITY

MINIMIZED TELEGRAPHING

SOFT SILENCE™ PATENT PENDING ATTACHED ACOUSTICAL PAD

PROVEN ATTRIBUTES

For areas with intensified temperature from sunlight, there will be reduced expansion and contraction.

Faster installation & sound reduction — up to 71 IIC.

Floorté PRO minimizes the appearance of subfloor imperfections.

100% Waterproof ArmourBead™ Finish Low Maintenance Click & Glue Down Installation.


ENDURA THE PROOF IS IN THE PRO.™

150 Cinnamon Walnut

203 Tawny Oak

452 Sienna Oak

507 Wheat Oak

634 Sepia Oak

698 Auburn Oak

728 Jade Oak

734 Umber Oak

802 Ginger Oak

820 Amber Oak

765 Tan Oak

117 Alabaster Oak

138 Ivory Oak

142 Gray Barnwood

154 Almond Oak

Cinnamon Walnut

556 Smoky Oak

Hazel Oak

Ivory Oak

562 Neutral Oak

Smoky Oak

591 Oyster Oak

Umber Oak

592 Shadow Oak

762 Hazel Oak

Style Number

ENDURA 512C PLUS 0736V

ENDURA 512G PLUS 0802V

Size

7" x 48"

7" x 48"

Thickness

4.8 mm

4.5 mm

Wear Layer

12 mil

12 mil

Finish

ArmourBead

ArmourBead

Edge Description

Micro Bevel

Micro Bevel

SF Per Carton

18.68 SF

27.99 SF

SF Per Pallet

1,494.36 SF

1,539.45 SF

Installation

Click

Direct Glue

0736V Endura 512C Plus Trim

0802V Endura 512G Plus Trim

Multi-Purpose Reducer*

T-Molding*

Quarter Round

Stair Nose*

Omni Trim

Quarter Round

Stair Nose

VSMPR

VSTMD

VSQTR

VSSTN

VSUN1

VSQT1

VSSN1

72" L

72" L

94" L

94" L

94" L

94" L

94" L

Treadz® Style Number

Center

Right

Left

White Riser

LVCTR

LVCAR

LVCAL

LVWRI

shawfloors.com

direct 08.25.2017

M

M

ER

TY

AR W EAR W

N

312VS 4 gal

AL

7 year

TY

073VS 1 gal

AN

Shaw 4100

R

080VS 4 gal

TI

CIAL WARR ER A M

TY N

081VS 1 gal

N

CO

Kwikflash

026VS 4 gal

30 year

Y NT RA

052VS 1 gal

E

Shaw 200

• ID

Style Number

WEAR W IAL AR NT

RES

Style Name

RES ID E

Adhesives for Endura 512G Plus

CO M

* Packaged with Molding Track

C I A L WA R

RA

OrthoPhthalates free


131SE - Freshen Up 15'3"


131SE - Freshen Up 15'3"

Freshen Up – The magic of fleck styling creates color families that are at first glance very neutral. With a closer look, nuances of color reveal themselves. Each will coordinate across many different schemes tying together other elements in the room. Constructed with a cozy, soft hand, this sophisticated, 38 oz. cut pile style has traditional roots but also works extremely well in contemporary settings. Protected with Shaw’s R2X®.

00100 Winter White

00102 Dunes

00200 Chamois

00500 Cold Water

00501 Sea Salt

00701 Townhouse

SM-45468-15_MB532_FreshenUp_11122015

shawfloors.com


102SE - Macramé 13'7" 103SE - Macramé 15'3"

104SE - Tactile 13'7" 105SE - Tactile 15'3"


102SE - Macramé 13'7" 103SE - Macramé 15'3"

104SE - Tactile 13'7" 105SE - Tactile 15'3"

Macramé – Macramé and Tactile are being offered in 15 common colors and will be sampled together on the same deck board. Macramé is a 25-ounce PET solid in a traditional cut-pile construction. Tactile has a longer pile height, giving it more texture. The common color line features best-selling neutrals, new neutrals and grays. Protected with Shaw’s R2X®.

00100

00101

00702

00700

00501

00701

00102

00706

00300

00500

00600

00704

00705

00703

00502

Macramé Color 00702

COMPARISON

Tactile

Color 00702

shawfloors.com


112SE - That’s Awesome 13'7" 113SE - That’s Awesome 15'3"


112SE - That’s Awesome 13'7" 113SE - That's Awesome 15'3"

That’s Awesome – A popular look in a 25-ounce cut pile features a soft, full hand. This subtle multicolored heather style is created by combining two pre-dyed yarns with an over-dyed yarn. That’s Awesome’s PET yarn system is protected with Shaw’s R2X®, the leading stain and soil resistance treatment in the industry. The palette’s ten multi-color hues make it simple to coordinate with a variety of decors.

00732 Toffee Smoke

00130 Flax Seed

00530 Concrete

00532 Mineral Glaze

00531 Gravel

00733 Sandy Brown

00730 - Pebble Path

00731 Hearth

00300 Beach Glass

00131 Warm Sand

shawfloors.com


(STANDARD)

(UPGRADE)


(UPGRADE)


CAMBRIDGE

ATLANTA 1

ATLANTA 2

BRUNSWICK 1

BRUNSWICK 2

FLORENCE

FLORENCE ARCH

CAMBRIDGE

ATLANTA 1

ATLANTA 2

BRUNSWICK 1

BRUNSWICK 2

FLORENCE

FLORENCE ARCH

CAMBRIDGE

ATLANTA 1

ATLANTA 2

BRUNSWICK 1

BRUNSWICK 2

FLORENCE

FLORENCE ARCH

CAMBRIDGE

ATLANTA 1

ATLANTA 2

BRUNSWICK 1

BRUNSWICK 2

FLORENCE

CHERRY

STANDARD OVERLAY DOOR STYLES www.marshfurniture.com Cabinets: • • • • •

Solid Wood Frame Hardwood Veneer Center Panel ½” Engineered Wood End Panels Traditional ½” Overlay Concealed 6-way Adjustable Hinge

MAPLE

Drawers: • • • • •

4-Sided Drawer Box Side Mounted Self-Aligning Epoxy-Coated Guides Rated for 75 Pounds

OAK

Optional: • Plywood Upgrade Including Plywood Drawer Box • Full Extension, Soft-Close, Dovetailed Drawers FAIRMONT

THERMOFOIL

BIRCH

Doors shown in Tuscany.


MAPLE SAVANNAH 1

SAVANNAH 2

APEX

JAMESTOWN 1

JAMESTOWN 2

WILMINGTON 1

CHARLESTON 1

CHARLESTON 2

ARLINGTON 1

NANTUCKET 1

NANTUCKET 2

SUMMERFIELD I

SUMMERFIELD 2

JEFFERSON 1

JEFFERSON 2

ARDMORE 2

ARDMORE 3

WENTWORTH 1

TRENTON 1

TRENTON 3

NORTH BROOK

ARCADIA

FULL OVERLAY DOOR STYLES All doors come standard with soft close hinges and dovetailed full extension soft-close drawers. Cabinets: • • • • •

Solid Wood Frame Hardwood Veneer Center Panel ½” Engineered Wood End Panels Full Overlay Concealed 6-way Adjustable Hinge

Drawers: • 4-Sided Drawer Box • Full Extension, Soft-Close Dovetailed Drawers • Rated for 75 Pounds

Optional: • Plywood Construction

www.marshfurniture.com

Doors shown in Tuscany.


CHERRY SAVANNAH 1

SAVANNAH 2

APEX

JAMESTOWN 1

JAMESTOWN 2

WILMINGTON 1

CHARLESTON 1

CHARLESTON 2

SPECIFICATIONS

ARLINGTON 1

NANTUCKET 1

NANTUCKET 2

SUMMERFIELD I

SUMMERFIELD 2

JEFFERSON 1

1. Standard 2. Plywood 3. FX

1

Drawer Base cabinet shown. Drawer heights are subject to cabinet chosen.

2

JEFFERSON 2

3

Drawer Options Available Included On Standard Overlay ARDMORE 2

ARDMORE 3

WENTWORTH 1

TRENTON 1

TRENTON 3

NORTH BROOK

ARCADIA

Included on Full Overlay Optional Upgrade on Standard Overlay

Optional on Full Overlay

Drawer Box

5/8” Particleboard

5/8” Thick Birch Veneer Plywood

5/8” Thick Dovetail Birch

Colors Available

Natural Maple or White Laminate

Natural

Natural

Drawer Guides

Side-Mounted Epoxy-Coated Steel 3/4 Extension

Side-Mounted Epoxy-Coated Steel 3/4 Extension

Undermount Full-Extension Soft-Close Dovetailed

No

No

Yes

75 lbs. per drawer

75 lbs. per drawer

75 lbs. per drawer

Soft Close

Weight Capacity Doors shown in Tuscany.

Plywood (order as PC)

www.marshfurniture.com


DECORATIVE

CRYSTAL SHORES â&#x201E;¢

GLASS MOSAICS


Cover photo features Hazel Harbor random linear mosaic. Above photo features Sapphire Lagoon 2 x 1 brick-joint mosaic.

Immerse Yourself in the Mood Enhancing Effect of Crystal Shores ™

Give your walls dimension with the modern visual effect of Crystal Shores. This mosaic blends colored crystallized glass and blocks infused with metallic texture for truly radiant designs. An array of beautiful colors available in two sizes amplify the ambience of relaxing bathrooms and dramatic accents. • MEMORABLE AND ALLURING -- Offers trend-defining finishes and a high-end visual -- Unique blend of crackled glass and pearlized glass mosaics • VERSATILE APPLICATIONS -- Two sizes: 2 x 1 brick-joint and random linear -- Six different color blends with stunning finishes -- Coordinates easily with classic and contemporary floor and wall options


DECORATIVE

CRYSTAL SHORES â&#x201E;¢ GLASS MOSAICS

2 x 1 BRICK-JOINT MOSAIC

DIAMOND DELTA CS93

HAZEL HARBOR CS94

SAPPHIRE LAGOON CS95

EMERALD ISLE CS96

COPPER COAST CS97

AURELIAN SEAS CS98

RANDOM LINEAR MOSAIC

DIAMOND DELTA CS93

HAZEL HARBOR CS94

SAPPHIRE LAGOON CS95

EMERALD ISLE CS96

COPPER COAST CS97

AURELIAN SEAS CS98


DECORATIVE

CRYSTAL SHORES ™ GLASS MOSAICS

SIZES

INSTALLATION Thickness 2 x 1 Brick-Joint (12-3/4" x 11-3/4" Sheet) Mosaic (32.39 cm x 29.80 cm (Mesh-mounted) Sheet)

Sq. Ft. Pieces Per per Carton Carton

Grout Joint Recommendation

Shade Variation

1/8" Approximately 5/16"

9.70

Random (V4)

10

TEST RESULTS Random Linear (13-7/8" x 11-3/4" Sheet) Mosaic (35.24 cm x 29.80 cm (Mesh-mounted) Sheet)

5/16"

9.70

10

APPLICATIONS Suitable

ASTM#

Result

C373

< 0.1%

Breaking Strength

C648

> 100 lbs.

Scratch Hardness

MOHS

4.0

Chemical Resistance

C650

Resistant

Water Absorption

Meets ANSI A137.2 for glass tile.

Floors Walls/Backsplashes

NOTES

Countertops

Crystal Shores is produced using a special manufacturing process that makes each piece unique. Color, shading and irregular edges are characteristics of Crystal Shores and are inherent in standard production. These subtle variations can impact the final grout joint appearance and enhance the natural visual of this series.

Pool Linings APPLICATION NOTES: Suitable for exterior applications in freezing and non-freezing climates when proper installation methods are followed. Using a sealer is recommended prior to grouting. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for this specific product.

Strong random shading enhances the natural beauty of this product. To achieve optimal results, tile should be selected from multiple cartons and shading arrangement planned prior to installation. Since there are variations in all glass products, tile supplied for your particular installation may not match these samples. Final color selection should be made from actual tiles and not from tile samples or color reproductions. Manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.2 standards. For additional information refer to “Factors to Consider” at daltile.com/Factors.

DESIGNED TO HELP EARN LEED™ CREDITS. For more detailed information, visit daltilegreenworks.com.

SCAN QR CODE FOR PRODUCT INFORMATION

7834 C. F. Hawn Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75217 | 1.800.933.TILE

Get a QR Code reader at: GET.DALTILE.COM

To view the complete collection of Daltile® products and information, visit our website at daltile.com. Generated by BeQRious.com

©2016 Dal-Tile Corporation (5/16)


WALL

ELEVARE â&#x201E;¢

GLAZED CERAMIC


Above photo and cover photo features Sand 4 x 16 field tile on the wall.

Take Your Style to the Next Level

Elevare combines simple, monochromatic color schemes to create a fashion-forward look inspired by the latest European trends. This collection’s bold colors and range of sizes add a dramatic flair to your room. From backsplashes and showers to accent walls, Elevare gives you the versatility and style you need to take your designs to new heights. • MINIMALISTIC BEAUTY —— O  ffers a refined look that’s available in a wide array of monochromatic colors —— M  ix and match bold colors to create unique designs • ELEVATED CONVENIENCE —— A  vailable in large, linear formats, including 4 x 16 and 6 x 18 —— P  erfect for walls, backsplashes, showers and other spaces

POST CONSUMER RECYCLED MATERIALS PRE CONSUMER RECYCLED MATERIALS


WALL

ELEVARE â&#x201E;¢ GLAZED CERAMIC

WALL TILE

Lunar EL40

Matte Lunar EL47

Crater EL41

Sand EL42

Element EL43

Carbon EL44

Cacao EL45

Coal EL46


WALL

ELEVARE ™ GLAZED CERAMIC

SIZES

TRIM

6 x 18 Wall Tile

4 x 16 Wall Tile

(6" x 18") (15.25 cm x 45.76 cm)

(4" x 16") (10.17 cm x 40.68 cm)

Thickness

Sq. Ft. per Carton

Pieces Per Carton

5/16"

11.25

15

5/16"

13.20

Type

Number

Size

Pieces Per Carton

12" Jolly

S1/212J

1/2 x 11-15/16

12

Bullnose

S-44D9 (16" Side)

4 x 16

24

Bullnose

S-4D49 (4" Side)

4 x 16

24

30

APPLICATIONS Suitable

INSTALLATION Grout Joint Recommendation

Floors

Shade Variation

(4 x 16) 1/16" (when rectangular size is used in a staggered brick-joint pattern, overlap should not exceed 33%)

Walls/Backsplashes Countertops Pool Linings Suitable for exterior applications in non-freezing climates only, when proper installation methods are followed.

Low (V1)

(6 x 18) 1/16" (1/8" when rectangular size is installed in a staggered brick-joint pattern; overlap should not exceed 33%)

TEST RESULTS ASTM#

Result

C373

< 20%

Breaking Strength

C648

120 – 230 lbs.

Scratch Hardness

MOHS

4.0 – 6.0

Chemical Resistance

C650

Resistant

Water Absorption

NOTES Since there are variations in all fired ceramic products, tile and trim supplied for your particular installation may not match these samples. Final color selection should be made from actual tiles and trim and not from tile samples or color reproductions. Manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.1 standards. For additional information refer to “Factors to Consider” at daltile.com/Factors.

DESIGNED TO HELP EARN LEED™ CREDITS. For more detailed information, visit daltilegreenworks.com.

SCAN QR CODE FOR PRODUCT INFORMATION

7834 C. F. Hawn Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75217 | 1.800.933.TILE

Get a QR Code reader at: GET.DALTILE.COM

To view the complete collection of Daltile® products and information, visit our website at daltile.com. Generated by BeQRious.com

©2015 Dal-Tile Corporation (3/15)


FLOOR

LINDEN POINT ™

GLAZED PORCELAIN with REVEAL IMAGING ®


Above and cover photos feature Grigio 12 x 24 field tile in a grid pattern on the floor.

Find Modern Appeal in a Soft Stone Look

The contemporary look of Linden Point™ emulates a soft linear stone with varying horizontal veining. Its 12 x 24 size, soft texture finish and versatile color palette add to its modern appeal. Enhance your space with the modern and versatile look of Linden Point.

• CONTEMPORARY VISUAL -- Emulates the modern look of soft stone

PRE-CONSUMER RECYCLED MATERIALS

-- Features flowing linear movement and texture

REVEAL IMAGING ®

• MODERN AND VERSATILE -- Versatile warm color palette -- Contemporary sizing


FLOOR

LINDEN POINT ™ GLAZED PORCELAIN with REVEAL IMAGING ®

FIELD TILE

BIANCO LP19

BEIGE LP20

GRIGIO LP21


FLOOR

LINDEN POINT ™ GLAZED PORCELAIN with REVEAL IMAGING ®

SIZES

TRIM

12 x 24ª Field Tile

(11-13/16" x 23-13/16") (30.00 cm x 60.48 cm)

Thickness

Sq. Ft. per Carton

Pieces Per Carton

3/8"

15.60

8

ª This product is manufactured regionally. Slight variances in size and shading may occur between regions. Please contact your sales representative to verify carton square footage. As with all tile projects, be sure to purchase sufficient quantities with your initial order.

Type

Number

Size

Pieces Per Carton

Bullnose

P-43C9

3 x 12

30

Bullnose is intended to coordinate with floor field tile in the standard 90-degree installation position.

INSTALLATION Grout Joint Recommendation

FLOOR APPLICATIONS Target DCOF wet Dry & Level – Interior

N/A

Wet & Level – Interior

≥ 0.42

Exterior Applications, Pool Decking & Other Wet Areas with Minimal Footwear

≥ 0.60

Ramps & Inclines

≥ 0.65

Suitable

Shade Variation

3/16" (overlap should not exceed 33% when installing rectangular size in a staggered brick-joint pattern)

High (V3)

TEST RESULTS ASTM#

Result

C373

< 0.5%

Breaking Strength

C648

> 275 lbs.

Scratch Hardness

MOHS

7.0

Chemical Resistance

C650

Resistant

Abrasion Resistance

C1027

4

Water Absorption

A DCOF value of ≥ 0.42 is the new standard for tiles specified for commercial application in standard A137.1–2012, Section 9.6. It replaces the SCOF value of ≥ 0.60 referenced in ASTM C1028. For more information on the correlation between the two values and about the DCOF AcuTest™, visit www.daltile.com/dcof.

For additional information, visit daltile.com/information/TestResults.

OTHER APPLICATIONS Suitable Walls/Backsplashes

NOTES

Countertops

Special consideration needs to be given when installing tiles 20" and larger. Please refer to daltile.com/LargeTiles for more information.

Pool Linings

Use of a latex modified thin-set is recommended for installation.

APPLICATION NOTES: Suitable for exterior applications in freezing and non-freezing climates when proper installation methods are followed.

Since there are variations in all fired ceramic products, tile and trim supplied for your particular installation may not match these samples. Final color selection should be made from actual tiles and trim and not from tile samples or color reproductions. Manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.1 standards. Water, oil, grease, etc. create slippery conditions. Floor applications with exposure to these conditions require extra caution in product selection. Not for use on ramps. For additional information refer to “Factors to Consider” at daltile.com/Factors.

DESIGNED TO HELP EARN LEED™ CREDITS. For more detailed information, visit daltilegreenworks.com.

SCAN QR CODE FOR PRODUCT INFORMATION

7834 C. F. Hawn Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75217 | 1.800.933.TILE

Get a QR Code reader at: GET.DALTILE.COM

To view the complete collection of Daltile® products and information, visit our website at daltile.com. Generated by BeQRious.com

©2016 Dal-Tile Corporation (5/16)


FLOOR

MARBLE ATTACHÉ ™

COLORBODY ™ PORCELAIN with REVEAL IMAGING ®


Cover photo features Calacatta 24 x 48 matte field tile on the floor and polished field tile on the wall. Above photo features Turkish Skyline 24 x 48 matte field tile on the floor and polished field tile on the wall.

Matte finish suitable for wet and level interior floor applications.

Relax in Elegance with the Look of Natural Marble

Marble Attaché™ tile opens a new frontier of design possibilities. These beautiful interpretations of the finest marble curated from around the world combine the traditional colors of marble with the ease of porcelain tile. With six colors and several large-format sizes, Marble Attaché tile emulates the finest and most unique marble colors found in nature. • LUXURIOUS STYLES -- Unique technology delivers three finishes: matte, satin and polished -

Distinguished marble looks offered in multiple large format sizes including unique 12 x 48 planks and 24 x 48 tiles, as well as a linear hex mosaic

• AUTHENTICITY AND VARIETY -- Inspired by beautiful interpretations of the finest marbles from around the world -- Six appealing marble colors emulate the finest found in nature

PRE-CONSUMER RECYCLED MATERIALS REVEAL IMAGING ® TRU-EDGE


FLOOR

MARBLE ATTACHÉ ™ COLORBODY ™ PORCELAIN with REVEAL IMAGING ®

FIELD TILE (Available in Matte, Satin and Polished finishes. Matte available Fall 2016.)

CALACATTA MA87

TRAVERTINE MA85

TURKISH SKYLINE MA86

CRUX MA84

AMANI MA88

NERO MA83

2 x 2 MOSAIC (Available in Matte finish only)

CALACATTA MA87

TRAVERTINE MA85

TURKISH SKYLINE MA86

CRUX MA84

AMANI MA88

NERO MA83

AMANI MA88

NERO MA83

2 x 5 LINEAR HEX MOSAIC (Available in Matte finish only)

CALACATTA MA87

TRAVERTINE MA85

TURKISH SKYLINE MA86

CRUX MA84


FLOOR

MARBLE ATTACHÉ ™ COLORBODY ™ PORCELAIN with REVEAL IMAGING ®

SIZES

TRIM Thickness

Sq. Ft. Pieces per per Carton Carton

24 x 48 Field Tile n

(23-3/8" x 46-7/8") (59.44 cm x 119.20 cm)

3/8"

15.24

2

24 x 24 Field Tile n

(23-3/8" x 23-3/8") (59.44 cm x 59.44 cm)

3/8"

15.20

4

12 x 48 Field Tile n

(11-5/8" x 46-7/8") (29.56 cm x 119.20 cm)

3/8"

11.37

3

12 x 24 Field Tile n

(11-5/8" x 23-3/8") (29.56 cm x 59.44 cm)

3/8"

15.12

8

3/8"

9.60

10

2 x 2 Mosaic u (11-3/4" x 11-3/4" Sheet) (Mesh-mounted (29.85 cm x 29.85 cm Sheet) on 12" x 12" Sheet) 2 x 5 Linear Hex Mosaic u (12-7/16" x 12-11/16" Sheet) (Mesh-mounted (31.60 cm x 32.23 cm Sheet) on 12" x 12" Sheet)

Type

Number

Size

Pieces per Carton

Bullnose n

S-43F9

3 x 24

10

Bullnose trim intended to coordinate with floor field tile in the standard 90-degree installation position.

INSTALLATION Grout Joint Recommendation

Shade Variation

1/8" (3/16" when multiple sizes are installed in a modular pattern and/or when tile with a length 15" or greater is installed in a staggered brick-joint pattern. Overlap should not exceed 33%)

Random (V4)

TEST RESULTS 3/8"

11.00

ASTM#

10

n Available in Matte, Satin and Polished finishes. Matte available Fall 2016. u Matte finish only

Satin & Polished Result

Matte Result

Water Absorption

C373

< 0.5%

< 0.5%

Breaking Strength

C648

> 275 lbs

> 275 lbs

Scratch Hardness

MOHS

7.0

8.0

Chemical Resistance

C650

Resistant

Resistant

FLOOR APPLICATIONS Target DCOF wet Dry & Level – Interior

N/A

Wet & Level – Interior

≥ 0.42

Exterior Applications; Pool Decking & Other Wet Areas with Minimal Footwear

≥ 0.60

Ramps & Inclines

≥ 0.65

Suitable

*

A DCOF value of ≥ 0.42 is the standard for tiles specified for level interior spaces expected to be walked upon when wet, as stated in ANSI A137.1-2012, Section 9.6. For more information about DCOF and the DCOF AcuTest™, visit daltile.com/DCOF.

OTHER APPLICATIONS Suitable Walls/Backsplashes Countertops Pool Linings

**

NOTES Manufacturer Advisory (Satin and Polished only): These tiles have a dynamic coefficient of friction < 0.42 as measured by the DCOF Acutest method. Tiles with DCOF values < 0.42 are not recommended for use in areas with wet or slippery conditions. For more information, see ANSI standard A137.1 section 6.2.2.1.10, available at www.tileusa.com. Special consideration needs to be given when installing tiles greater than 15 inches. Please refer to daltile.com/LargeTiles for more information. Strong random shading enhances the natural beauty of this product. To achieve optimal results, tile should be selected from multiple cartons and shading arrangement planned prior to installation. Special care should be taken when grouting with dark pigmented colors. A grout release is recommended to prevent finely powdered pigments from lodging in the pores of the surface. Use of a latex modified thin-set is recommended for installation. Since there are variations in all fired ceramic products, tile and trim supplied for your particular installation may not match these samples. Final color selection should be made from actual tiles and trim and not from tile samples or color reproductions. Manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.1 standards. Water, oil, grease, etc. create slippery conditions. Floor applications with exposure to these conditions require extra caution in product selection. Not for use on ramps.

APPLICATION NOTES: * Matte finish only ** Mosaics only Suitable for exterior applications in freezing and non-freezing climates when proper installation methods are followed.

For additional information refer to “Factors to Consider” at daltile.com/Factors.

Satin and polished surfaces are suitable only for dry and level floor applications.

DESIGNED TO HELP EARN LEED™ CREDITS. For more detailed information, visit daltilegreenworks.com.

SCAN QR CODE FOR PRODUCT INFORMATION

7834 C. F. Hawn Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75217 | 1.800.933.TILE

Get a QR Code reader at: GET.DALTILE.COM

To view the complete collection of Daltile® products and information, visit our website at daltile.com. Generated by BeQRious.com

©2016 Dal-Tile Corporation (8/16)


FLOOR

SANTINO ™

COLORBODY ™ PORCELAIN


Above and cover photos feature Bianco 12 x 24 field tile in a grid pattern on the floor.

The Elegant Look of Travertine Paired with Ultimate Durability

The elegant style of Santino™ was inspired by the beautiful variances of travertine veining, natural wood grain and fabric weaves. Complete with a natural color palette, this contemporary flooring is perfect for architects, designers and homeowners alike. • UNIQUE AND VISUAL SURFACE -- Inspired by the beautiful variances of travertine veining, natural wood grain and fabric weaves -- Gorgeous reflective shimmer in the veining of the textured surface • ELEGANT, YET DURABLE -- Contemporary colors ranging from a crisp white to a rich dark brown -- Available in large-format and popular linear sizes for broad, open spaces -- Ideal for residential and commercial spaces wanting style and durability

PRE-CONSUMER RECYCLED MATERIALS TRU-EDGE


FLOOR

SANTINO ™ COLORBODY ™ PORCELAIN

FIELD TILE

BIANCO SN06

GRIGIO SN08

CHIARO SN07

BRUNO SN09


FLOOR

SANTINO ™ COLORBODY ™ PORCELAIN

SIZES

TRIM Thickness

Sq. Ft. Pieces per per Carton Carton

18 x 36 Field Tile

(17-1/2" x 35-1/8") (44.50 cm x 89.32 cm)

18 x 18 Field Tile

(17-1/2" x 17-1/2") (44.50 cm x 44.50 cm)

3/8"

12 x 24 Field Tile

(11-5/8" x 23-7/16") (29.56 cm x 59.44 cm)

3/8"

15.28

8

6 x 24 Field Tile

(5-3/4" x 23-7/16") (14.62 cm x 59.44 cm)

3/8"

10.67

11

3/8"

17.39

4

Type

Number

Size

Pieces per Carton

Bullnose

S-44H9

4 x 18

10

S-36C9TB

6 x 12

20

SC-36C9TB

1x6

10

Cove Base 17.39

8 Cove Corner

Bullnose, cove base, and cove base corner trim are intended to coordinate with floor field tile in the standard 90-degree installation position.

INSTALLATION Grout Joint Recommendation

FLOOR APPLICATIONS Target DCOF wet Dry & Level – Interior

N/A

Wet & Level – Interior

≥ 0.42

Suitable

Shade Variation

1/8" (3/16" when installed in a staggered brick-joint pattern; overlap should not exceed 33%)

TEST RESULTS ASTM#

Exterior Applications; Pool Decking & Other Wet Areas with Minimal Footwear

≥ 0.60

Ramps & Inclines

≥ 0.65

High (V3)

A DCOF value of ≥ 0.42 is the standard for tiles specified for level interior spaces expected to be walked upon when wet, as stated in ANSI A137.1-2012, Section 9.6. For more information about DCOF and the DCOF AcuTest™, visit daltile.com/DCOF.

OTHER APPLICATIONS

Result

Water Absorption

C373

< 0.5%

Breaking Strength

C648

> 275 lbs.

Scratch Hardness

MOHS

8.0

Chemical Resistance

C650

Resistant

NOTES Suitable

Walls/Backsplashes

Special consideration needs to be given when installing tiles greater than 15 inches. Please refer to daltile.com/LargeTiles for more information. Special care should be taken when grouting with dark pigmented colors. A grout release is recommended to prevent finely powdered pigments from lodging in the pores of the surface. Use of a latex modified thin-set is recommended for installation.

Countertops Pool Linings APPLICATION NOTES: Suitable for exterior applications in freezing and non-freezing climates when proper installation methods are followed.

Since there are variations in all fired ceramic products, tile and trim supplied for your particular installation may not match these samples. Final color selection should be made from actual tiles and trim and not from tile samples or color reproductions. Manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.1 standards. Water, oil, grease, etc. create slippery conditions. Floor applications with exposure to these conditions require extra caution in product selection. Not for use on ramps. For additional information refer to “Factors to Consider” at daltile.com/Factors.

DESIGNED TO HELP EARN LEED™ CREDITS. For more detailed information, visit daltilegreenworks.com.

SCAN QR CODE FOR PRODUCT INFORMATION

7834 C. F. Hawn Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75217 | 1.800.933.TILE

Get a QR Code reader at: GET.DALTILE.COM

To view the complete collection of Daltile® products and information, visit our website at daltile.com. Generated by BeQRious.com

©2016 Dal-Tile Corporation (7/16)


Coverphoto features Yorkw ood M anorâ&#x201E;˘ Pecan 6 x 36 on the floor. A bove photo features Yorkw ood M anorâ&#x201E;˘ B irchtree 6 x 36 on the floor.

D esign w ith the Style of H istoric N ew England


FLO O R TILE

PECA N YM 02

D EEP W A LN U T YM 03

B IR CH TR EE YM 01


SIZ ES

TR IM Thickness

6 x 36 (5-7/8"x 35-7/16") FloorTile (15.00 cm x 90.00 cm )

Sq.Ft. Pieces Per per Carton Carton

5/16"

13.05

9

Type

N um ber

Size

Pieces Per Carton

B ullnose

S-43H 9

3 x 18

16

B ullnose trim is intended to coordinate w ith floortile in the standard 90-degree installation position.

FLO O R A P P LIC A TIO N S Target D CO F w et D ry & Level– Interior

IN STA LLA TIO N Suitable

N /A

W et & Level– Interior

0.42

ExteriorA pplications, PoolD ecking & O therW et A reas w ith M inim alFootw ear

0.60

R am ps & Inclines

0.65

G rout Joint R ecom m endation

Shade Variation

3/16"(overlap should not exceed 33% w hen installing tile w ith a length of15"orgreaterin a staggered brick-joint pattern)

R andom (V 4)

TEST R E SU LTS

A D CO F value of 0.42 is the standard fortiles specified forlevelinteriorspaces expected to be w alked upon w hen w et,as stated in A N SIA 137.1-2012,Section 9.6. For m ore inform ation about D CO F and the D CO F A cuTest™ ,visit daltile.com /D CO F.

A STM #

Result

W aterA bsorption

C373

< 0.5%

B reaking Strength

C648

> 275 lbs

Scratch H ardness

M O HS

8.0

W alls/B acksplashes

Chem icalResistance

C650

R esistant

Countertops

A brasion R esistance

C10 27

4

PoolLinings

Foradditionalinform ation,visit daltile.com /inform ation/TestR esults.

O TH E R A P P LIC A TIO N S Suitable

A PPLICATIO N N O TES:

N O TE S

Suitable forexteriorapplications in freezing and non-freezing clim ates w hen proper installation m ethods are follow ed.

Specialconsideration m ust be given w hen installing tiles greaterthan 15 inches.Please referto daltile.com /LargeTiles form ore inform ation. U se ofa latex m odified thin-set is recom m ended forinstallation. Strong random shading enhances the naturalbeauty ofthis product. To achieve optim alresults,tile should be selected from m ultiple cartons and shading arrangem ent planned priorto installation. Since there are variations in allfired ceram ic products,tile and trim supplied foryourparticularinstallation m ay not m atch these sam ples.Finalcolorselection should be m ade from actualtiles and trim and not from tile sam ples orcolorreproductions.M anufactured in accordance w ith A N SIA 137.1standards. W ater,oil,grease,etc.create slippery conditions.Floorapplications w ith exposure to these conditions require extra caution in product selection.N ot foruse on ram ps. Foradditionalinform ation referto “Factors to Consider”at daltile.com /Factors.

D ESIG N ED TO H ELP EA R N LEED ™ CR ED ITS.Form ore detailed inform ation, visit daltilegreenw orks.com .

SCA N Q R CO D E FO R PR O D U CT IN FO R M ATIO N

7834 C .F.H aw n Freew ay, D allas,Texas 75217 | 1.800.933.TILE

G et a Q R Code readerat: G ET.D A LTILE.CO M

To view the com plete collection of D altile® products and inform ation, visit ourw ebsite at daltile.com .

© 20 16 D altile (12/16)


WALL

RITTENHOUSE SQUARE â&#x201E;¢

GLAZED CERAMIC


Photo features Elemental Tan 3 x 6 wall tile on the kitchen backsplash. Cover photo features Arctic White 3 x 6 wall tile on the sink backsplash.

Classic Elegance

Fall in love with the time-honored look of Rittenhouse Square. This trendy, yet enduring collection has a color palette vast enough to fit any style. • DESIGN VERSATILITY -- Subway tile that works with traditional or modern design styles -- Vast color palette works with a multitude of color schemes • COORDINATING OPTIONS -- Coordinating brick-joint mosaic and trim available -- Colors coordinates with Modern Dimensions™ and Semi-Gloss™ and Matte™ lines, offering more design options

PRE CONSUMER RECYCLED MATERIALS


WALL

RITTENHOUSE SQUARE ™ GLAZED CERAMIC

SEMI-GLOSS

Arctic White 0190 (2) ■+

White 0100 (2)

Almond 0135 (2)

Almond K165 (2) ■

MATTE

■+

White K101 (2) ■

Biscuit K175 (2) ■ +

Matte Arctic Matte Biscuit White 0790 (1) + K775 (1) +

Matte Almond X735 (1)

Matte Urban Putty 0761 (3)

Urban Putty 0161 (3)

Architectural Gray 0109 (3)

Matte Architectural Gray 0709 (3)

Matte Elemental Tan 0766 (3)

Matte Black K711 (3)

Matte Desert Gray X714 (2)

BEVEL WALL TILE Desert Gray X114 (2) +

Elemental Tan 0166 (3)

Black K111 (3) ■

MADE-TO-ORDER COLORS

Crisp Linen 0139 (4)

Matte Crisp Linen 0739 (4)

Corn Silk 0160 (4)

Luminary Gold 0142 (4)

Gold Coast 0191 (4)

Arctic White 0190 Matte Arctic White 0790

White 0100

Biscuit K175 Matte Biscuit K775

Desert Gray X114

DECORATIVE ACCENTS (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5) indicate Price Groups, (1) being the least expensive.

Sunflower DH50 (4)

Misty Meadow 0112 (4)

Mint Ice 0152 (4)

Garden Spot 0141 (4)

Cypress 1452 (4)

All colors available in 3 x 6 flat wall tile. Made-to-order colors require 6-8 weeks for delivery from date of order.

Spa 0148 (4)

Aqua Glow 0197 (4)

Waterfall 0169 (4)

Ice Grey K176 (4)

Suede Grey 0182 (4)

 2 x 4 brick-joint size available. Other colors (including matte finish) available via special order (not available in group 4 colors).

■ Shelf Rail available + 3 x 6 Bevel tile available; other colors available through ColorMatch™.

Uptown Taupe 0132 (4)

Matte Uptown Taupe 0732 (4)

Artisan Brown 0144 (3)

Matte Artisan Brown 0744 (3)

Cityline Kohl 0171 (3)

Classic (Available in White K101, Almond K165 and Translucent Almond RT01)

Wave (Available in White K101, Almond K165 and Translucent Almond RT01)

★ Subject to crazing; black grout not recommended.

Shelf Rail

Matte Cityline Kohl 0771 (3)

Oak Moss 0195 (4)

Galaxy 1469 (4)

Cobalt DM14 (4) ★

Navy K189 (4) ★ Vermillion 0DM1 (5) ★

(Available in Arctic White 0190, White 0100, White K101, Biscuit K175, Almond 0135, Almond K165, and Black K111)


WALL

RITTENHOUSE SQUARE ™ GLAZED CERAMIC

SIZES

TRIM

3 x 6 Wall Tile

(3" x 6") (7.60 cm x 15.20 cm)

3x6 Bevel Wall Tile

(3" x 6") (7.60 cm x 15.20 cm)

2 x 4 Brickjoint mosaic (Dotmounted)

(12" x 12" Sheet) (30.48 cm x 30.48 cm Sheet)

3 x 6 Wave Accent

Thickness

Sq. Ft. per Carton

Pieces per Carton

5/16"

12.50

100

3/8"

10.40

Number

Size

Pieces per Carton

Wall Bullnose

S-4369 (on 6" side)

3x6

100

Wall Bullnose

S-4639 (on 3" side)

3x6

100

Wall Bullnose Corner

SCR/L-4369

3x6

100

Cove Base

A-3361

3x6

36

Cove Base Corner

SCR/L-3361

3x6

36

Type

80

1/4"

10.00

12

(3" x 6") (7.60 cm x 15.20 cm)

5/16"

--

18

3x6 Classic Accent

(3" x 6") (7.60 cm x 15.20 cm)

5/16"

--

16

2 x 6 Shelf Rail

(2-3/16" x 6") (5.50 cm x 15.20 cm)

--

--

8

2x2 Shelf Rail Corner

(2-3/16" x 2-3/16") (5.50 cm x 5.50 cm)

--

--

12

INSTALLATION Grout Joint Recommendation Wall Tile : 1/16"

Suitable Floors Walls/Backsplashes

TEST RESULTS ASTM#

Wall Result

Mosaic Result

C373

< 20.0%

< 3.0%

Breaking Strength

C648

120 - 230 lbs.

> 250 lbs.

Scratch Hardness

MOHS

4.0 - 6.0

6.0 - 7.5

Chemical Resistance

C650

Resistant

Resistant

For additional information, visit daltile.com/information/TestResults.

Countertops

*▲

Pool Linings

NOTES

APPLICATION NOTES: Suitable for exterior applications in non-freezing climates only when proper installation methods are followed. * Beveled and semi-gloss tile not suitable for countertops. ▲ Darker

Since there are variations in all fired ceramic products, tile and trim supplied for your particular installation may not match these samples. Final color selection should be made from actual tiles and trim and not from tile samples or color reproductions. Manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.1 standards. For additional information refer to “Factors to Consider” at daltile.com/Factors.

colors may show scratches

DESIGNED TO HELP EARN LEED™ CREDITS. For more detailed information, visit daltilegreenworks.com.

Low (V1)

Mosaics : 1/8"

Water Absorption

APPLICATIONS

Shade Variation

SCAN QR CODE FOR PRODUCT INFORMATION

7834 C. F. Hawn Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75217 | 1.800.933.TILE

Get a QR Code reader at: GET.DALTILE.COM

To view the complete collection of Daltile® products and information, visit our website at daltile.com. Generated by BeQRious.com

©2015 Dal-Tile Corporation (10/15)


Casera VE24 I

Merea VL22 I

Cameroon VN21 I

Lattetude VE21 I

Pavao VC04 I

Shasta VE26 I

Kao VC05 I

solid sinks

HI-MACS® Project by SITU Studio, John Muggenborg Photography

Tambora VE01

GeoDog designed by Adam Murray, Laser Lab Studio, LLC

volcanics

The New Generation of Imspiration There are no limits - The new generation of inspiration is here. Design has no boundaries and imagination leads the way. From functional kitchen Arctic White

Ivory White

Cream

Almond

sur faces and spaces to 3-dimensional installations, the unique properties of HI-MACS solid sur face materail allows you the ability to create what once could only be dreamt.

SINGLE SINK 1318

SINGLE SINK 1517

SINGLE SINK 1612

SINGLE SINK 1914

W.18” x L.13” x D.7”

W.16 3/4” x L.15 3/4” x D.8”

W.18” x L.14” x D.5”

W.21” x L.15 1/2” x D.6 1/4"

Made in USA* Thermoformable Unlimited Colors SINGLE SINK 2318

SINGLE SINK 2818

DOUBLE SINK 3218

DOUBLE SINK 3221

W. 22 7/8” x L.17 7/8” x D.9”

W.28” x L.18” x D.9”

W.31 7/16” x L.18 1/8” x D.8 1/2”

W.32” x L.21” x D.9”

Hygienic Low Maintenance Repairable 15Year Transferable Warranty

HI-MACS Sheet Dimension & Weight 1/2" Thickness: 30x145", 126lbs 1/4" Thickness: 30x98", 44lbs All Colors are available in 1/2" thickness. Please contact the LG Hausys representative for other thickness availability.

HI-MACS® Bar & Stool, NY W Hotel, Photography by Billy Kim

Merapi VB01

Gensler Los Angeles / Cal Poly

Dorado VB24 I

DOUBLE SINK 3118

ADA 1.0 Sink 1419*

ADA 2.0 Sink 1715*

Single sink 1216A*

W.31 7/16” x L.18 1/8” x D.8 1/2”

W.19” x L.14” x D.5”

W.17” x L.15” x D.5”

W.16” x L.12” x D.7 3/4”

Published HPD

Health Product Declaration TM

Collaborative

Search for LG Hausys on NSF.org to see the listing of the certified Viatera

Lavatory Sink 1216B*

Lavatory Sink 1421*

Lavatory Sink 1931*

W.16” x L.12” x D.4 1/4”

W.20 4/5” x L.13 4/5” x D.4 1/4”

W.30 4/5” x L.18 4/5” x D.9”

tm

LOVELLo

sinks

Solid Surface

www.LGHIMACSUSA.com TORINO SS1-2318

GENOVA SS1-2422

VENEZIA SS1-3219

W.23” x L.17 3/4” x D.9”

W.23 1/2” x L.21 1/4” x D.9 1/2”

W.32 1/4” x L.18” x D.10”

NAPLES L SS73-3219

NAPLES R SS37-3219

W.31 1/2” x L.18 1/2” x D.9”

W.31 1/2” x L.18 1/2” x D.9”

VERONA L SS64-3221

VERONA R SS46-3221

FLORENCE SS55-3318

W.31 3/4” x L.20 1/2” x D.9”

W.31 3/4” x L.20 1/2” x D.9”

W.32 1/4” x L.18” x D.8 1/4”

CALL 866.544.4622

*Not all colors are made in USA. USA colors are made of USA and imported parts. Printed representation of colors may vary from actual samples. Please view the actual product prior to purchase *Noted solid sinks are available in two colors: Arctic White, Ivory White

©2017 LG Hausys America, Inc. SKU1701HMB

SKU1701HMB


classic

classic

ne v e r c o m p r omis e c o lle cti o n

classic

eden plus

MARMO

scs certifi ed p r oduct

Br

White Quartz G004

Tapioca Pearl G050

Moondust G160

Merino GT914

Nordic White S214 Lu

ce

Winter White S306

Alpine White S028

Arctic White S006

Geyser L014

Populus GT949

Macchiato G111

Maui Quartz G223R

Lunar Sand (6%) G108

Harmony (6%) R542

Pause (6%) R009

Ripe Cotton G518R (10%)

Moonscape Quartz

G058

Vanilla Sugar GT913

White Granite G005

Opal S302

Almond Pearl G008

Desert Sand G001

Annato Granite G606

Harvest GT908

Venetian Sand G042

Storm Granite G602

Trail Gray GT912

Allspice Quartz G063

Wallowa G157

Mocha Granite G074

Breeze M306 IY

Br

ee

ze

Mist M307 IY Br

ee

ze

Ghost White ST907

Ivory White S029

Cream S009

Soronan Granite G075

Hazelnut Shell GT934

Bellany GT933

Vintage Chic W013

Silence (6%) R640

Pebble Pearl (6%) G107

Loyalty (6%) R532

Portland (6%) GT945

Genova M209 IY

Haze M308 IY

Tusk S230

Almond S002

Gray S005

Mist Gray ST908

Maple Meadow G121

Sugar Maple NR

Gray Granite G017

Umber Granite

G710 D

G605

Oatmeal (6%) GT938

Simplicity (6%) R943

Rest (6%) R118

Relieve (6%) R530

Firenze M103 IY

Terni M201 IY

Mesa Granite G073

Steel Gray S209

Marta Gray S207

Concrete Gray S103

Black Granite G031

Toffee Brown S104

Coffee Brown S100

Bamboo Leaf G122

Natural (6%) R913

Lemongrass G503R (10%)

Stable (6%) R531

Understanding R538 (6%)

Lucca M203 IY

Roma M104 IY

Armadillo GT909

Banana S026

Fiery Red S025

Black S022

Honeysuckle G504R (10%)

Saddlebow (6%) GT946

Mature (6%) R533

Canossa M202 IY

Pisa M207 IY

I

Horse Chestnut NR

G712 D

Aster

Co

Graphite Granite G103

ze

nt

Sea Oat Quartz G038

Midnight Pearl G015

ee

Black Pearl G010

Arctic Granite G034

Tundra Quartz G065

Crystal Beige G101

Coconut G170

Andromeda T017

Milky Way T009

Arcas T050 I

Carina T018

Noted color is translucent and provides a sensuous look when combined with light sources. D Noted HI-MACS colors can be supplied with SCS certified pre-consumer recycled content up to 35%. However, the supply of recycled content may be limited due to the availability of the recycled raw material. Please contact an LG Hausys representative for more information. Minimum order quantity may be required.

Moon Haze G118

Cloud W002 I

Egg White GT910

Luster L016

Birch Bark NR G714 D

Kamet L017

Coswal G125

Venus T001

Hercules T020

Cosmos T002

Volcanic Ice GT918

Saturn T003

r

Co

Basillica M321 IY

Co

Ice Queen W001 I

nc

e et

Pluto T005

Eden Plus colors contain minimum 6% or 10% of SCS certified pre-consumer recycled content.

nc

re

nc

re

te

Pantheon M322 IY

te

Colosseum M323 IY

Parma M205 IY

Monza M206 IY

I Noted colors are manufactured outside of USA. Y Noted colors exhibit increased movement and variation of color and pattern which cannot be fully recognized on some samples.


10/14


Wilsonart® Laminate. When design matters as much as performance. As a world-leading producer of decorative surfacing products, Wilsonart delivers a wide range of innovative laminate solutions and related services. With products designed to expand your inspirational horizons, Wilsonart Laminate meets your special needs and exceeds the expectations of your most demanding clients.

Our Sustainability Journey For more than 50 years, being a responsible member of the global community has been woven into all aspects of our company culture. As our manufacturing and distribution networks have expanded worldwide, our impact on the environment has become an increasingly important concern for everyone at Wilsonart. Several years ago, Wilsonart took the lead to reshape the supply chain for our paper source, which makes up 70% of our High Pressure Laminate (HPL) product lines. Our technical department worked with suppliers to ensure all source materials such as kraft, pulp, and decorative paper met stringent FSC certification requirements. At the onset of the project, no company in the industry had undertaken this endeavor. Wilsonart was the first North American laminate manufacturer to achieve Forest Stewardship Council® Chain of Custody Certification, providing thousands of SKUs of FSC® Mix Credit Certified HPL. Our sustainability efforts incorporate not only our impact on the environment, but also our long-term commitment to providing high quality products, reliable services, secure jobs and strong community support. This “full circle” journey will take many forms. Our goals are as follows: Zero Waste: Eliminate unnecessary materials, processes and waste from the products we make and sell. Zero Impact: Lead the industry in development and use of environmentally responsible materials. Zero Barriers: Create an environment of excellence that fosters individual growth and engagement in community and industry development.

Products At Wilsonart, we continuously strive to improve our products and processes while ensuring minimal impact on the world around us. 34% of fiber used to make Wilsonart Laminate comes from recycled sources. The recycled content in Wilsonart Laminate is certified by SCS Global Services (see third-party certificates online). Our laminates are also UL GREENGUARD Gold Certified for low chemical emissions, which can assist you in earning LEED® certification. All standard Wilsonart Laminates are available on request as FSC Mix Credit, SCS-COC-002415. Wilsonart is proud to be the first adhesive manufacturer to have its low-emitting PVA and woodworking adhesives recognized by UL’s GREENGUARD Certification Program for indoor air quality.

Processes We strive to ensure our manufacturing and distribution processes leave minimal impact on the environment. Our sustainability programs include energy management, waste management, eco-friendly product transportation, and raw materials partnerships with suppliers who are equally committed to sustainable business practices. Visit Wilsonart.com/sustainability to learn more.

To contact our Contract Specialists, visit Wilsonart.com or call our Customer Service Smartline at 1-800-433-3222.


Wilsonart makes a laminate surface for every need. Made to endure everything from chemical spills to fire damage, Wilsonart® Specialty Laminates are uniquely suited to handle the challenges of performance interiors. See below or visit Wilsonart.com/specialty to see all of our hard-working design options.

CHEMSURF® CHEMICAL-RESISTANCE Specifically designed for environments where chemicals and harsh cleaners are used, Wilsonart® Chemsurf® provides exceptional chemical resistance without sacrificing design or style.

FIRE-RATED This long-lasting, beautiful laminate meets or exceeds the fire codes from a variety of laboratories across the country and comes in a wide range of patterns and colors.

HIGH WEAR Low-cost and built to take the extra wear that comes with high traffic commercial projects, Wilsonart® High Wear Laminate boasts more than five times the industry standard for abrasion resistance.

WILSONART X YOU Customize any surface with Wilsonart x You. Bring us your designs, and we’ll create a laminate that is uniquely yours. Visit Wilsonart.com/WilsonartxYou.

VIRTUAL DESIGN LIBRARY Reach beyond the wallboard with Wilsonart’s expanded design library. From photorealistic imagery to abstract and artistic graphics, Wilsonart offers a wide range of patterns to fit your needs. Learn more at Wilsonart.com/VDL.

COMPACT Available in thicknesses from 1/10" to 1", Wilsonart® Compact Laminate is a durable solution for high-impact surfaces such as lockers and cabinets, elevator cabs, and toilet partitions.

CHALKBOARD Wilsonart® Chalkboard is the perfect solution for any space or application that demands a durable and affordable writing surface, and unlike other chalkboard surfaces, it requires no special maintenance.

MARKER BOARD The ideal laminate writing surface for classrooms, business and administrative offices, message centers, athletic facilities, or as a menu board.

COORDINATED SURFACES The best-matched HPL, TFL Panel and Edgeband solution in surface design and texture. Visit Wilsonart.com/CS.

SOLICOR™ Wilsonart® Solicor™ is a specialty laminate created with a solid color core – eliminating the troublesome “brown line” of traditional laminates.

RE-COVER™ RE-COVER™ combines vertical grade laminate and adhesive to create an alternative time – and money – saving option to standard High Pressure Laminate (HPL) installation and fabrication. All Wilsonart Laminates are suitable for use in commercial and residential settings. To learn more about the countless design opportunities available through Wilsonart Laminate, visit Wilsonart.com. For your convenience, most Wilsonart designs featured here are in stock and ready for immediate delivery from our distribution center. Sizes and finishes may vary. Call your Wilsonart Distributor for availability. WILSONART® is a trademark of Wilsonart LLC registered in the United States and other countries. HIGH DEFINITION, HD, and AEON are also trademarks of Wilsonart LLC.


4968-38 7975K-12

URBAN IRON RAW CHESTNUT

Š2014 Wilsonart LLC, 2400 Wilson Place, P.O. Box 6110, Temple, TX 76503-6110 For Samples: Wilsonart.com 800-433-3222 BC0430-14R

Wilsonart literature is printed using environmentally responsible processes and paper.


St andar d

1/ 2â&#x20AC;?Roundover Hal fBul l nose

Opt i on

$15perLi nearFoot OG ( F)


COMPACT LAMINATE

THE WOW IS IN THE DETAILS. Wilsonart® Decorative Edges add the perfect finishing touch to tables, desks, and reception counters. Choose from hundreds of Wilsonart® Laminate colors, patterns, and textures. Customized to your specifications, Decorative Edges create a clean, finished look that easily and affordably transforms surfaces into sculpted architectural details. Because they offer a totally tailored finish to any of our laminate surfaces, Decorative Edges can be a subtle, or not so subtle, completion to any environment.

A NEW TAKE ON EDGY DESIGN. A perfect framing technique for any countertop or tabletop, Wilsonart Decorative Edges are perfect for lunchroom tables, conference rooms, company kitchens, and more. Available in three edge profiles, Wilsonart Decorative Edges offer a cost-effective way to enhance environments while simultaneously eliminating the brown seamline that’s all too visible with cap edge details. A Beveled Edge is strong, crisp and classic, evoking the polished image of cut and chamfered stone. A Cascade Edge pairs a flowing waterfall roll with a straight-edged base for a look that is naturally beautiful and impressive. A Crescent Edge invites the eye and warms up decor with soft curves at top and bottom.


19⁄16"

19⁄16"

1⁄4"

▲ ▲

▲ ▲

19⁄16"

3⁄8"

3⁄8"

Cascade Profile (FE) Cascade Profile Cascade Profile (SE) Cascade Profile (FE) (SE) ▲

Choose any combination of standard Wilsonart Laminate designs on the bevel (A) and face (B), or go for the monolithic look using the same design from top to edge.

1⁄4"

1⁄4" ▲

19⁄16"

19⁄16"

▲ 19⁄16"

Crescent Profile 1⁄4" (SE) 1⁄4" 19⁄16"

19⁄16"

1⁄4"

Crescent Profile (FE)

3⁄8"

▲ ▲

3⁄8"

▲ 1⁄4"

1⁄4"

3⁄8"

1⁄4"

1⁄4"

Beveled Profile (FE)Beveled Profile Beveled Profile (SE) Beveled Profile (FE) (SE)

▲ 19⁄16"

▲ 3⁄8"

1⁄4"

B

Cascade Profile 1⁄4" (SE) 1⁄4"

1⁄4" 19⁄16"

B

1⁄4"

19⁄16"

B

Cascade Profile (FE)

3⁄8"

19⁄16"

B

▲ 1⁄4"

19⁄16"

A Beveled A Profile (SE)

3⁄8"

▲ ▲ ▲

A A Beveled Profile (FE)

1⁄4"

19⁄16"

When ordering, specify profile type and pattern/finish for each face.

B B DECORATIVE EDGE PROFILE

1⁄4"

1⁄4" ▲

19⁄16"

1⁄4"

19⁄16"

19⁄16"

A

1⁄4"

A

WILSONART® DECORATIVE EDGES

19⁄16"

For a complete list of design choices go to wilsonartcontract.com/decorative-edges. ▲

▲ ▲

3⁄8"

3⁄8"

▲ ▲

3⁄8"

▲ 3⁄8"

Crescent Profile (FE)Crescent Profile Crescent Profile (SE) Crescent Profile (FE) (SE)

©2013 Wilsonart LLC. 2400 Wilson Place P.O. Box 6110 Temple, TX 76503-6110 wilsonartcontract.com 800.433.3222 BC1505–13

Wilsonart Contract literature is printed using environmentally responsible processes and paper.


TRAVIS 2PK 13" LED Ceiling Mount SN Specifications Material Construction:

Formed Steel

Lens:

Frosted glass

Lamp Type & Wattage:

Integrated 20W LED light

Lumens:

1,800 lumens at source; 1,198 lumens thru the lens

CCT:

3150K

Rated Life;

50,000 hours

Mounting:

Ceiling mounted

Finish:

Satin Nickel

Voltage:

120V

Weight:

4.6 lbs

Dimensions

Warranty & Compliances Warranty

10 Year Limited Warranty

ETL Listed

ETL Listed for use in Damp Locations

ADA

N/A

EnergyStar

N/A

Product Code Description

Product Code

TRAVIS 2PK 13" LED Ceiling Mount SN

579193 Type: Job: Order Code: Approvals:

Design House reserves the right to make changes in materials, specifications & models at any time. Design House also reserves the right to discontinue product without notice or obligation.

TRAVIS 2PK 13" LED Ceiling Light

www.todaysdesignhouse.com

Design House is a registered brand of DHI Corp. Mequon, WI * 800-558-8700


1


2


Bravo Collection in Nickel Base Package

P3912-09 Brushed Nickel Three-light inverted pendant. Size: 21” w., 23-1/2” ht. Lamp(s): three Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

P4621-09 Brushed Nickel Three-light chandelier. Size: 23” w., 20-1/8” ht. Lamp(s): three Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

P5300-09 Brushed Nickel One-light mini-pendant. Size: 7-1/4” w., 6-1/2” ht. Lamp(s): one Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

P7153-09W Brushed Nickel One-light wall sconce Size: 15 3/8” w., 7” ht. Extends 7-1/2”. Lamp(s): one Medium lamp(s), each 60W.

P3925-09 Brushed Nickel 2-light flush. Size: 13-1/4” w., 5-7/8” ht. Lamp(s): two Medium Base lamp(s), each 75w max.

P2006-09 Brushed Nickel Three light bath. Size: 26-3/4” w., 8-7/8” ht. Extends 8-3/4”. Lamp(s): three Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max. P4622-09 Brushed Nickel Four-light chandelier. Size: 24” w., 21-1/4” ht. Lamp(s): four Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

P2005-09 Brushed Nickel Two light bath. Size: 17” w., 8-5/8” ht. Extends 8-3/4”. Lamp(s): two Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

4


Bravo Collection in Bronze Base Package - Upgrade

P3912-20 Antique Bronze Three-light inverted pendant. Size: 21” w., 23-1/2” ht. Lamp(s): three Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

P4621-20 Antique Bronze Three-light chandelier. Size: 23” w., 20-1/8” ht. Lamp(s): three Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

P5300-20 Antique Bronze One-light mini-pendant. Size: 7-1/4” w., 6-1/2” ht. Lamp(s): one Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

P7153-20T Antique Bronze One-light wall sconce Size: 15 3/8” w., 7” ht. Extends 7-1/2”. Lamp(s): one Medium lamp(s), each 60W.

P3925-20T Antique Bronze 2-light flush. Size: 13-1/4” w., 5-7/8” ht. Lamp(s): two Medium Base lamp(s), each 75w max.

P2006-20 Antique Bronze Three light bath. Size: 26-3/4” w., 8-7/8” ht. Extends 8-3/4”. Lamp(s): three Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

P4622-20 Antique Bronze Four-light chandelier. Size: 24” w., 21-1/4” ht. Lamp(s): four Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

P2005-20 Antique Bronze Two light bath. Size: 17” w., 8-5/8” ht. Extends 8-3/4”. Lamp(s): two Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

5


11


Exterior Standards P5773-19 Roman Bronze One-light wall lantern. Size: 5-3/4” w., 18-1/4” ht. w/tail. 13-1/2 w/o tail. Extends 5-3/4”. Lamp(s): one Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

P5984-19 Roman Bronze One-light wall lantern. Size: 4” w., 8” ht. Extends 5-3/4”. Lamp(s): one Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.

Exterior Upgrades P5492-31STR Black 1-light small wall lantern. Size: 6-1/2” w., 11-3/4” ht. Extends 8-1/2”. Lamp(s): one CFL lamp(s), each 13w.

14

P5907-31 Black One-light wall lantern. Size: 8-1/2” w., 12-1/4” ht. Extends 10-7/8”. Lamp(s): one Medium Base lamp(s), each 100w max.


Exterior Upgrades

P6004-20 Antique Bronze One-light medium wall lantern. Size: 9” w., 11” ht. Extends 9-7/8”. Lamp(s): one Medium lamp(s), each 100W. P5819-20EE Antique Bronze One-light wall lantern. Size: 12” w., 19-3/4” ht. Extends 6”. Lamp(s): one GU24 lamp(s), each 26W.

P5678-50 Golden Baroque One-light wall lantern. Size: 11” w., 16-1/4” ht. Extends 11-7/8”. Lamp(s): one Medium Base lamp(s), each 150w max.

P5721-81 Antique Nickel One-light solid brass wall lantern. Size: 8-1/16” w., 9-3/4” ht. Extends 9-3/4”. Lamp(s): one Medium Base lamp(s), each 60w max.

15


Progress Lighting 701 Millennium Boulavard Greenville, South Carolina 29607 www.progresslighting.com


CONTENTS Urban Farmhouse Farmhouse Vintage - Industrial/Modern/Farmhouse Transitional Farmhouse Urban Reclaimed Transitional

2 3 5 6 8 9


Shown: P4658-84 Chandelier


2

URBAN FARMHOUSE

NATIONWIDE HOMES

PENDANT P500021-143 Graphite 6-1/8” dia., 9-1/2” ht., Overall ht. w/cord 124‑1/2”, wire 10’. One medium base lamp, 60w max.

P500021-143

VANITY 2 LIGHT P300029-143 Graphite 15-5/8” W., 11” ht. Extends 7-1/4”. H/CTR 3”. Two medium base lamps, each 60w max.

P300029-143

VANITY 3 LIGHT P300030-143 Graphite 25-1/8” W., 11” ht. Extends 7-1/4”. H/CTR 3”. Three medium base lamps, each 60w max. EXTERIOR LANTERN P560003-031 Black 9-1/2” W., 19-5/8” ht. Extends 6-1/2”. H/CTR 11‑3/8”. Three candelabra base lamps, each 60w max. P300030-143

EXTERIOR LANTERN P560003-020 Antique Bronze 9-1/2” W., 19-5/8” ht. Extends 6-1/2”. H/CTR 11‑3/8”. Three candelabra base lamps, each 60w max. LINEAR VANITY P2839-0930K9 Brushed Nickel 22-1/2” W., 4-3/4” ht. Extends 3-7/8”. H/CTR 2‑3/8”. One LED lamp, 35w max.

P560003-031

P2839-0930k9

BB-6398 PROGRESS LIGHTING

P560003-020


P500023-143

P4720-71

LINEAR CHANDLIER P4720-71 Gilded Iron 32-1/2” L., 15” W., 20-3/8” ht., Overall ht. w/chain 95”, wire 15’. Four medium base lamps, each 60w max. EXTERIOR LANTERN P560053-020-30 Antique Bronze 11” dia., 11-1/2” ht. Extends 11-1/2”. H/CTR 4‑1/4”. One LED lamp, 17w max. EXTERIOR LANTERN P560053-103-30 Antique Pewter 11” dia., 11-1/2” ht. Extends 11-1/2”. H/CTR 4‑1/4”. One LED lamp, 17w max. VANITY 3 LIGHT P300125-143 Graphite 24” W., 8-1/2” ht. Extends 5”. H/CTR 6‑1/8”. Three medium base lamps, each 60w max.

P560053-020-30

P560053-103-30

P300125-143

PROGRESS LIGHTING BB-6398

NATIONWIDE HOMES

CHANDLIER P500023-143 Graphite 21-5/8” dia., 18-1/4” ht., Overall ht. w/chain 93‑1/2”, wire 10’. Four medium base lamps, each 75w max.

3

FARMHOUSE


4 NATIONWIDE HOMES Shown: P5161-81 Pendants

BB-6398 PROGRESS LIGHTING


P500032-030

P4658-84

CHANDLIER P4658-84 Espresso 22” dia., 23-3/8” ht., Overall ht. w/chain 98”, wire 15’. Five medium base lamps, each 100w max. PENDANT P5009-84 Espresso 6-1/4” dia., 10-3/4” ht., Overall ht. w/stem 77”, wire 10’. One medium base lamp, 100w max. PENDANT P5161-81 Antique Nickel 9” dia., 5-1/8” ht., Overall ht. w/cord 116”, wire 10’. One medium base lamp, 100w max.

P5009-84

P5161-81

CHANDLIER P4768-81 Antique Nickel 28” dia., 15-3/4” ht., Overall ht. w/stem 82”, wire 15’. Three medium base lamps, each 60w max. PENDANT P5237-31 Black 5-1/4” dia., 5-1/4” ht. One PAR-36 lamp, 50w max.

P4768-81

P5237-31

PROGRESS LIGHTING BB-6398

NATIONWIDE HOMES

PENDANT P500032-030 White 6-3/8” dia., 11-3/4” ht., Overall ht. w/cord 78”, wire 10’. One medium base lamp, 60w max.

5

VINTAGE - INDUSTRIAL/MODERN/FARMHOUSE


6

TRANSITIONAL

NATIONWIDE HOMES

PENDANT P5071-71 Gilded Iron 6” dia., 16-1/2” ht., Overall ht. w/stem 82‑1/2”, wire 10’. One medium base lamp, 100w max.

P5071-71

P4659-09

CHANDLIER P4659-09 Brushed Nickel 23-1/4” dia., 18-1/2” ht., Overall ht. w/chain 83”, wire 15’. Five medium base lamps, each 60w max. MULTI-PURPOSE P3827-104 Polished Nickel 16” dia., 18-3/8” ht., Overall ht. w/chain 94”, wire 15’. Four candelabra base lamps, each 60w max.

P3827-104

Shown: P3827-104 Pendant

BB-6398 PROGRESS LIGHTING


7

TRANSITIONAL

NATIONWIDE HOMES

VANITY 2 LIGHT P300062-031 Black 4-1/2” W., 21” ht. Extends 7”. H/CTR 10‑1/2”. Two medium base lamps, each 100w max. VANITY 2 LIGHT P300062-015 Polished Chrome 4-1/2” W., 21” ht. Extends 7”. H/CTR 10‑1/2”. Two medium base lamps, each 100w max. EXTERIOR LANTERN P560004-135 Stainless Steel 6-1/2” W., 15-7/8” ht. Extends 5-1/2”. H/CTR 6‑1/4”. One medium base lamp, 100w max.

P300062-031

P300062-015

VANITY 3 LIGHT P2702-09 Brushed Nickel 24” W., 6-1/4” ht. Extends 7-1/4”. H/CTR 3‑1/8”. Three medium base lamps, each 100w max. VANITY 2 LIGHT P2701-09 Brushed Nickel 14-5/8” W., 6-1/4” ht. Extends 7-1/4”. H/CTR 3‑1/8”. Two medium base lamps, each 100w max. VANITY 3 LIGHT P2144-1530K9 Polished Chrome 24” W., 4-3/4” ht. Extends 4”. H/CTR 2‑3/8”. Three LED lamps, each 9w max.

P560004-135

P2702-09

P2701-09

P2144-1530k9

PROGRESS LIGHTING BB-6398


8

FARMHOUSE URBAN

NATIONWIDE HOMES

VANITY 3 LIGHT P300040-015 Polished Chrome 15-1/8” W., 8-3/8” ht. Extends 7-1/8”. H/CTR 6”. Two medium base lamps, each 100w max. VANITY 2 LIGHT P300040-015 Polished Chrome 15-1/8” W., 8-3/8” ht. Extends 7-1/8”. H/CTR 6”. Two medium base lamps, each 100w max. VANITY 3 LIGHT P300041-009 Brushed Nickel 24-1/4” W., 8-3/8” ht. Extends 7-1/8”. H/CTR 6”. Three medium base lamps, each 100w max.

P300040-015

P300040-015

VANITY 2 LIGHT P300040-009 Brushed Nickel 15-1/8” W., 8-3/8” ht. Extends 7-1/8”. H/CTR 6”. Two medium base lamps, each 100w max.

P300041-009

P300040-009

BB-6398 PROGRESS LIGHTING


NATIONWIDE HOMES

CHANDLIER P400027-009 Brushed Nickel 25” dia., 23” ht., Overall ht. w/chain 95”, wire 15’. Four medium base lamps, each 100w max.

9

RECLAIMED TRANSITIONAL

P400027-009

PROGRESS LIGHTING BB-6398


BB-6398_08/22/2018

701 Millennium Boulevard Greenville, SC 29607 progresslighting.com


4” Bar  Faucet   M4068C  

Description  

• • • •

4”  Bar  Faucet   Washerless  Cartridge   ½”  NPS  Connection   2.0  GPM  @  60  PSI  ASME  Compliant  

Standards

• • • •

ASME A112.18.1  Compliant   Listed  IAPMO/UPC   NSF  –  61-­‐9  Approved   CSA  B125.1  Compliant  

Colors /  Finishes    

• • •

01 -­‐  Chrome   12  -­‐  Brushed  Nickel   20  -­‐  Oiled  Rubbed  Bronze  

Handle  Options        

Blade Handles  

SPECIFICATION SHEET  


4” Lavatory  Faucet   M5420  &  M5425  

Description  

• • • •

4”  Lavatory  Faucet   Washerless  Cartridge   ½”  NPS  Connection   1.5  GPM  @  60  PSI    ASME  Compliant  

Standards

• • • •

ASME A112.18.1  Compliant   Listed  IAPMO/UPC   NSF  –  61-­‐9  Approved   CSA  B125.1  Compliant  

Colors /  Finishes      

• •

01 -­‐  Chrome   12  -­‐  Brushed  Nickel  

Handle  Options          

Blade Handle  

SPECIFICATION SHEET  


Shower Faucet  Pressure  Balanced   M8127C  

Description  

• • • •

 

   

01 -­‐  Chrome   12  -­‐  Brushed  Nickel   20  -­‐  Oiled  Rubbed  Bronze  

Handle  Options   •

ASME A112.18.1  Compliant   Listed  IAPMO/UPC   ASSE  1016-­‐2005  Compliant   NSF  –  61-­‐9  approved   CSA  B125.1  Compliant  

Colors /  Finishes   • • •

Shower  Faucet  Pressure  Balanced   Pressure  Balanced  Cartridge   ½”  NPS  Connection   2.5  GPM  @  60  PSI  ASME  Compliant  

Standards • • • • •

Blade Handle  

SPECIFICATION SHEET  


SPECIFICATION SHEET  

Tub &  Shower  Diverter  Pressure  Balanced   M8128C  

Description  

• • • •

Tub  &  Shower  Diverter   Pressure  Balanced  Cartridge   ½”  NPS  Connection   2.5  GPM  @  60  PSI  ASME  Compliant  

Standards

• • • • •

ASME A112.18.1  Compliant   Listed  IAPMO/UPC   ASSE  1016-­‐2005  Compliant   NSF  –  61-­‐9  tested  and  approved   CSA  B125.1  Compliant  and  listed  

Colors /  Finishes  

• • •

01 -­‐  Chrome   12  -­‐  Brushed  Nickel   20  -­‐  Oiled  Rubbed  Bronze  

Handle  Options      

Blade Handles  


8” Kitchen  Faucet   M8821-­‐12  

Description  

• • • •

8”  Kitchen  Faucet    ¼  Turn  Washerless  Cartridge   ½”  NPS  Connection   2.2  GPM  ASME  Compliant  

Standards

• • • •  

ASME A112.18.1  Compliant   Listed  IAPMO/UPC   NSF  –  61-­‐9  tested  and   approved   CSA  B125.1  Compliant  and   listed  

Colors /  Finishes  

• • •

01 -­‐  Chrome   12  -­‐  Brushed  Nickel   20  -­‐  Oiled  Rubbed  Bronze  

Handle  Options    

• •

Acrylic Handles   Tea-­‐Pot  Handles  

SPECIFICATION SHEET  


8” Kitchen  Faucet   M8821-­‐20  

Description  

• • • •

8”  Kitchen  Faucet    ¼  Turn  Washerless  Cartridge   ½”  NPS  Connection   2.2  GPM  ASME  Compliant  

Standards

• • • •

ASME A112.18.1  Compliant   Listed  IAPMO/UPC   NSF  –  61-­‐9  tested  and  approved   CSA  B125.1  Compliant  and  listed  

Colors /  Finishes  

• • •

01 -­‐  Chrome   12  -­‐  Brushed  Nickel   20  -­‐  Oiled  Rubbed  Bronze  

Handle  Options    

• •

Acrylic Handles   Tea-­‐Pot  Handles  

SPECIFICATION SHEET  


8” Pull-­‐Down  Kitchen  Faucet   M8821  

Description  

• • • •

Standards

• • • •

01 -­‐  Chrome   12  -­‐  Brushed  Nickel   20  -­‐  Oiled  Rubbed  Bronze  

Handle  Options        

ASME  A112.18.1  Compliant   Listed  IAPMO/UPC   NSF  –  61-­‐9  Approved   CSA  B125.1  Compliant  

Colors /  Finishes   • • •

8”  Pull  Down  Kitchen  Faucet   Single  Control  Washerless  Cartridge   ½”  NPS  Connection   2.2  GPM  @  60  PSI  ASME  Compliant  

Contemporary Handle  

SPECIFICATION SHEET  


Roman Tub  Filler   M9913C  

Description  

• • • •

Roman  Tub  Filler   Washerless  Cartridge   ½”  NPS  Connection   Max.  Flow  Rate  5.2  gpm  @  80  psi  

Standards

• • • •

ASME A112.18.1  Compliant   Listed  IAPMO/UPC   NSF  –  61-­‐9  Approved   CSA  B125.1  Compliant  

Colors /  Finishes    

• • •

01 -­‐  Chrome   12  -­‐  Brushed  Nickel   20  -­‐  Oiled  Rubbed  Bronze  

Handle  Options      

Blade Handles  

SPECIFICATION SHEET  


MOEN KITCHEN FAUCETS Moen's broad array of thoughtfully designed kitchen faucets provide the perfect mix of style and functionality. Kitchen - Standard

7082 Torrance Chrome Spout Reach: 9.00” 1.5gpm

Kitchen - Options

7585SRS Method Spot Resistant Stainless Spout Reach: 10.20” 1.5 gpm

7565BL Align Matte Black Spout Reach: 7.53” 1.5 gpm

5923 Align Spring Chrome Spout Reach: 10.00” 1.5 gpm


MOEN BATHROOM FIXTURES Moen offers a broad array of sink faucets, showering trim and valves to meet our customers' needs for both style and function. Bath- Standard

6150 Gibson Chrome Spout Reach: 4.19” 1.2 gpm

T961 Gibson Chrome Spout Reach: 7.63” Roman Tub

Shower - Standard

T2903EP Gibson Chrome Posi-Temp ® Tub/Shower

T2902EP Gibson Chrome Posi-Temp ® Shower

2510 M-Pact Posi-Temp® Valve


Bath- Option #1

6810BN Method Brushed Nickel 1.2 gpm

T986 BN Method Brushed Nickel Roman Tub

Shower – Option #1

T2803EPBN Method Brushed Nickel Posi-Temp ® Tub/Shower

T2802EPBN Method Brushed Nickel Posi-Temp ® Shower

2510 M-Pact Posi-Temp® Valve

Bath- Option #2

6190BN Align Brushed Nickel 1.2 gpm

T393BN Align Brushed Nickel Roman Tub

Shower – Option #2

T3293BN Align Brushed Nickel Moentrol ® Tub/Shower

T3292BN Align Brushed Nickel Moentrol ® Shower

3510 M-Pact Moentrol ® Valve


Replaces the Aquatic Cavalcade corner unit


Replaces the Alydar II Aquatic unit


-6. 0

6 "


-6. 0

6 "

7.1/4 "


-6. 0

6 "


-6.0

6 "

7.1/4 "


NOTIFICATION OF NEW PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE DATE: 12/1/17 TO: Nationwide Staff PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE : Starting with all units on line Jan. 1st and after we will install/offer “Adams” door and window casing ilo the current 3.1/4” wide trim option.

OPTION PRICE: $ 0.35 per sq. ft. ilo std 2.1/4" REASON FOR CHANGE: Improved look ITEM #: SUPPLIER: ( ) NEW ITEM ADDED TO LINE: ( ) REPLACES: WHEN USED: WHERE USED: DATE ORDERED: EXPECTED DATE OF ARRIVAL: AMOUNT OF OLD PRODUCT ON HAND: LOCATION: Plant 4 BEGIN USING: Jan. 1st FACTORY # OF FIRST HOUSE USED IN: Plant 4 APPROVED BY AM JDS KC DA TC 2/25/13 da Approved per staff


E-Z Arch Elliptical Headers

Nationwide Custom Homes Bonita Model International Buildersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; Show Orlando, Florida 2006 CurveMakers, Inc. * 612 W. Hargett St. * Raleigh, NC 27603 * 800/999-5792 * 919/821-5792 * FAX 919/821-5791


NOTIFICATION OF NEW PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE DATE: 12/1/17 TO: Nationwide Staff PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE : New option for interior shiplap siding. This option can be installed on the back of island bars, inside recessed niches or feature walls as desired by our customers. We will offer this ship lap in smooth white and a grey with a wire groove finish. This option will be available for any home on line no earlier than January 1st. Engineering to incorporate details with plan set when this option is purchased and note to hold electrical devices out on the electric plan at shiplap areas.

OPTION PRICE: $ 6.50 per sq.ft. REASON FOR CHANGE: Improve offerings ITEM #: SUPPLIER: ( ) NEW ITEM ADDED TO LINE: ( ) REPLACES: WHEN USED: WHERE USED: DATE ORDERED: EXPECTED DATE OF ARRIVAL: AMOUNT OF OLD PRODUCT ON HAND: LOCATION: Plant 4 BEGIN USING: FACTORY # OF FIRST HOUSE USED IN: Plant 4 APPROVED BY AM JDS KC 2/25/13 da Approved per staff

DA

TC


NOTIFICATION OF NEW PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE DATE: 6-20-18 TO: Nationwide Staff PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE : Stairs: Starting with all new releases released on or after 6/25/18, we will install a small sloped wall just above leading edge of tread with cap, white pickets and prefinished beech handrail(as seen on right below). When oak stairs are purchased we will install pickets to tread with no slope wall / oak material stained on site (as seen on left below).

OPTION PRICE: $ REASON FOR CHANGE: Standardize offering ITEM #: SUPPLIER: ( ) NEW ITEM ADDED TO LINE: ( ) REPLACES: WHEN USED: WHERE USED: DATE ORDERED: EXPECTED DATE OF ARRIVAL: AMOUNT OF OLD PRODUCT ON HAND: LOCATION: Plant 4 BEGIN USING: All new releases released on or after 6/25/18 APPROVED BY AM JDS MV DA TC 2/25/13 da Approved per staff


NOTIFICATION OF NEW PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE DATE: 7/5/2018 TO: Nationwide Staff PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE : See below for the way we will install transoms over countertops going forward. Instead of cutting tile around transom we will install larger trim to fill the gap.

OPTION PRICE: $ REASON FOR CHANGE: ITEM #: SUPPLIER: ( ) NEW ITEM ADDED TO LINE: ( ) REPLACES: WHEN USED: WHERE USED: DATE ORDERED: EXPECTED DATE OF ARRIVAL: AMOUNT OF OLD PRODUCT ON HAND: LOCATION: Plant 4 BEGIN USING: Immediately FACTORY # OF FIRST HOUSE USED IN: Plant 4 APPROVED BY AM JDS KC 2/25/13 da Approved per staff

DA

TC


NOTIFICATION OF NEW PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE DATE: 12/13/17 TO: Nationwide Staff PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE : The following barn door designs are currently available for all homes released on or after 12/13/17. These designs will be available in 3ft and 6ft widths only. Pricing is as follows: 3ft wide, either design ilo standard door= $625.00/ 6ft wide, either design ilo standard double door = $1290.00. Iron Aged Grey White

5 Panel Frosted Glass

OPTION PRICE: $ REASON FOR CHANGE: ITEM #: SUPPLIER: ( ) NEW ITEM ADDED TO LINE: ( ) REPLACES: WHEN USED: WHERE USED: DATE ORDERED: EXPECTED DATE OF ARRIVAL: AMOUNT OF OLD PRODUCT ON HAND: LOCATION: Plant 4 BEGIN USING: FACTORY # OF FIRST HOUSE USED IN: APPROVED BY AM JDS KC 2/25/13 da Approved per staff

DA

TC


Printed on: September 26, 2017

www.renincorp.com

STONE EASY GLIDE SOFT CLOSE BARN DOOR This barn door features our Exclusive preinstalled Easy Glide soft close mechanism for a quiet and smooth open and close. Traditional meets contemporary with our prefinished K design barn door which requires no priming, painting or staining. Barn doors are also an excellent space saving solution versus a tradition swing door while adding character and a unique charm to any room. Our barn doors compliment any home, office or common space and include our hardened steel bent strap hardware kit and matching handle in matte black finish.

DETAILS

 Colour:

Off-White

Width:

36

Height:

84

Depth:

1 3/8"

Pre-finished solid engineered wood door featuring a durable, scratch resistant smooth finish

YOUR ONLINE SELECTIONS:

Use for closets, as a room divider, or passage door applications Ideal for openings 28" - 34" wide Engineered wood blocking mounting board supplied for drywall installation

Your selections are standard. Purchase at our partners below::

Trackless door design keeps floor opening clear and hazard-free

SPECIFICATIONS Barn Door Hardware Color: Matte Black Hardware Type: Bent Strap

Look for our products under the following brands: To ensure this product is in stock, please call ahead before visiting.

Exclusive to Home Depot

Invite Innovation Inside:

Delivering a new level of decor means we’re constantly innovating. Therefore, this information and these specifications are subject to change without notice.

Exclusive to Lowe's

Exclusive to Home Hardware

Renin. 110 Walker Drive Brampton ON, L6T 4H6 1-800-493-5263 • info@renincorp.com • FAX: 1-800-481-4659


Printed on: September 26, 2017

Warranty: 5 Year Limited Warranty

Look for our products under the following brands: To ensure this product is in stock, please call ahead before visiting.

Exclusive to Home Depot

Invite Innovation Inside:

Delivering a new level of decor means we’re constantly innovating. Therefore, this information and these specifications are subject to change without notice.

Exclusive to Lowe's

Exclusive to Home Hardware

Renin. 110 Walker Drive Brampton ON, L6T 4H6 1-800-493-5263 • info@renincorp.com • FAX: 1-800-481-4659


Printed on: September 26, 2017

www.renincorp.com

PREFINISHED ENGINEERED WOOD BYPASS SLIDING DOOR WITH 1 LITE FROSTED INSERT & OFF-WHITE FINISH The Model 2010 features high quality Italian designed and European inspired sliding bypass doors, featuring 4mm tempered frosted glass is up to four times stronger than regular glass. The frosted glass design allows for privacy as well as natural light to enter the room. Constructed using a prefinished high quality engineered wood our Euro doors are durable and scratch resistant. Renin doors feature Tool Free Dial-Adjust Roller, bottom trackless design and finished on both sides.

YOUR ONLINE SELECTIONS:

DETAILS Colour:

Off-White

Width:

60

Height:

80 1/2"

Your selections are standard.

Dial-Adjust roller hardware allow doors to lift and hook onto the top roll track system for fast installation Pre-finished Cherry wood grain doors saves time and money with no painting, staining or mess to clean up High quality engineered wood construction featuring a durable scratch-resistant finish 1-Lite 4mm Tempered frosted glass provides strength, rigidity and contemporary look Includes matching fascia to complete the overall look of your room or space

Look for our products under the following brands: To ensure this product is in stock, please call ahead before visiting.

Exclusive to Home Depot

Invite Innovation Inside:

Delivering a new level of decor means we’re constantly innovating. Therefore, this information and these specifications are subject to change without notice.

Exclusive to Lowe's

Exclusive to Home Hardware

Renin. 110 Walker Drive Brampton ON, L6T 4H6 1-800-493-5263 • info@renincorp.com • FAX: 1-800-481-4659


Printed on: September 26, 2017

SPECIFICATIONS Material: Engineered Wood Glass / Panel / Insert Finish: Frosted Glass Frame Colour / Finish: Pre-finished Frame featuring a 1-Lite frosted glass design

Look for our products under the following brands: To ensure this product is in stock, please call ahead before visiting.

Exclusive to Home Depot

Invite Innovation Inside:

Delivering a new level of decor means we’re constantly innovating. Therefore, this information and these specifications are subject to change without notice.

Exclusive to Lowe's

Exclusive to Home Hardware

Renin. 110 Walker Drive Brampton ON, L6T 4H6 1-800-493-5263 • info@renincorp.com • FAX: 1-800-481-4659


WG0190 Specifications:  Width - 36”  Material – 430 Stainless Steel/Glass  Voltage - 110~120/60Hz  Motor - 120Wx1  Speed - 3  Controls - Mechanical Push Button  Light - 2X3W GU10 LED Lamp  Filter - Aluminum Cassette  Airflow - 400cfm  Noise - 58dB Accessories  27” Chimney Extension  Charcoal Filters

Colors  Stainless Steel  Black ETL Listed and Conforms To: UL STD 507 CSA STD C22.2 NO 113

Distributed By:


http://www.insideadvantage.com

INSIDE ADVANTAGEâ&#x201E;¢ PROMISE

THE

By aligning our portfolio to powerful brands and innovative products with deep consumer insight and target services, Whirlpool Corporation provides a partnership environment to help building professionals grow their business

PREPARED FOR Nationwide Homes PROVIDED BY Scott Vickery +1 800.551.5146 ext.84865 Scott_t_vickery@whirlpool.com


Package 1 http://www.whirlpool.com

WFE515S0EB WMH31017AB 5.3 Cu. Ft. Freestanding 1.7 cu. ft. Over the Range Electric Range with Easy Microwave with Hidden Vent Wipe Ceramic Glass Cooktop

WDF320PADB Dishwasher with AccuSense® Soil Sensor

WRS335FDDB 36-inch Wide Side-by-Side Refrigerator with Water Dispenser - 25 cu. ft.

Product Dimensions

Product Dimensions

Product Dimensions

Width: Depth:

29 7/8 27 3/4

Product Dimensions

Height: Width: Depth:

17 1/4 29 15/16 16 1/8

Height: Width: Depth:

34 1/2 23 7/8 24 1/2

Height: Width: Depth:

68 7/8 35 1/2 34 5/8


WFE515S0EB

WMH31017AB

WDF320PADB

WRS335FDDB

• • • • •

Counter Depth Range FlexHeat™ Element 5.3 Cu. Ft. Capacity SteamClean Option Easy Wipe Ceramic Glass Cooktop • AccuBake® Temperature Management System • EasyView™ Large Oven Window • Hidden Bake Element

• • • •

• AccuSense® Soil Sensor • 1-Hour Wash Cycle • No One Has Fewer Repairs 18 Years in a Row • ENERGY STAR® Qualified • Remembers Your Last Cycle • Normal Cycle • Heavy Cycle • High Temp Wash

Electrical Requirements:

Colors:

• Accu-Chill™ Temperature Management System • Frameless Glass Shelves • Adaptive Defrost • Adjustable Gallon Door Bins • ENERGY STAR® Qualified • Flush Exterior Filtered Water and Ice Dispenser • LED Interior Lighting • PUR® Water and Ice Filtration System

40 Amps. 120/240 V.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors: Black Silver Black-on-Stainless Biscuit White

Hidden Vent 1.7 cu. ft. Capacity 1,000 Watts Cooking Power 2-Speed Fan, 220 CFM Fan

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty Certificate

Black Silver Black-on-Stainless White

Electrical Requirements: 15 Amps.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Energy Guide

Colors:

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Energy Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors: Black

Black

Stainless Steel

Universal Silver

White

Black-on-Stainless Biscuit White

Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. ®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2013 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies.


Package 2 http://www.whirlpool.com

WFE515S0ES WMH31017AS 5.3 Cu. Ft. Freestanding 1.7 cu. ft. Over the Range Electric Range with Easy Microwave with Hidden Vent Wipe Ceramic Glass Cooktop

WDT720PADM WRS335FDDM Whirlpool Gold® Dishwasher 36-inch Wide Side-by-Side with Silverware Spray Refrigerator with Water Dispenser - 25 cu. ft.

Product Dimensions

Product Dimensions

Width: Depth:

29 7/8 27 3/4

Product Dimensions

Height: Width: Depth:

17 1/4 29 15/16 16 1/8

Height: Width: Depth:

34 1/2 23 7/8 24 1/2

Product Dimensions

Height: Width: Depth:

68 7/8 35 1/2 34 5/8


WFE515S0ES

WMH31017AS

WDT720PADM

WRS335FDDM

• • • • •

Counter Depth Range FlexHeat™ Element 5.3 Cu. Ft. Capacity SteamClean Option Easy Wipe Ceramic Glass Cooktop • AccuBake® Temperature Management System • EasyView™ Large Oven Window • Hidden Bake Element

• • • •

• • • • •

Electrical Requirements:

Colors:

• Accu-Chill™ Temperature Management System • Frameless Glass Shelves • Adaptive Defrost • Adjustable Gallon Door Bins • ENERGY STAR® Qualified • Flush Exterior Filtered Water and Ice Dispenser • LED Interior Lighting • PUR® Water and Ice Filtration System

40 Amps. 120/240 V.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors:

Hidden Vent 1.7 cu. ft. Capacity 1,000 Watts Cooking Power 2-Speed Fan, 220 CFM Fan

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty Certificate

Black-on-Stainless Black Silver White

Sensor Cycle Silverware Spray AnyWare™ Plus Silverware Basket 1-Hour Wash Cycle No One Has Fewer Repairs 18 Years in a Row • ENERGY STAR® Qualified • Sani Rinse Option • Cycle Complete Indicator Light

Electrical Requirements: 15 Amps.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Energy Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors:

Black-on-Stainless Black

Monochromatic Stainless Steel

Silver

Black

Biscuit

Black Ice

White

White Ice

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Energy Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors: Stainless Steel Black White

White

Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. ®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2013 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies.


Package 3 http://www.whirlpool.com

WFC150M0EB 4.8 Cu. Ft. Freestanding Counter Depth Electric Range

WMH31017AB 1.7 cu. ft. Over the Range Microwave with Hidden Vent

WRT348FMEB 30-inch Wide Top-Freezer Refrigerator with Icemaker 18 cu.ft.

Product Dimensions

Product Dimensions

Product Dimensions

Width: Depth:

29 7/8 27 3/4

Height: Width: Depth:

17 1/4 29 15/16 16 1/8

Height: Width: Depth:

65 1/2 29 3/4 31 3/8


WFC150M0EB

WMH31017AB

WRT348FMEB

• • • •

• • • •

• Electronic Temperature Control • Freezer Temperature Control • Clear, Smooth Glide Humidity Controlled Double Crispers • Frameless Glass Shelves • Factory-Installed Ice Maker • ENERGY STAR® Qualified

Counter Depth Range 4.8 Cu. Ft. Capacity EasyView™ Large Oven Window #1 Selling Appliance Brand in the U.S.A.

Electrical Requirements: 40 Amps. 120/240 V.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors: Black White

Hidden Vent 1.7 cu. ft. Capacity 1,000 Watts Cooking Power 2-Speed Fan, 220 CFM Fan

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors: Black Silver

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Energy Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors:

Black-on-Stainless

Black

White

Stainless Steel White

Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. ®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2013 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies.


Package 4 http://www.whirlpool.com

WFE515S0ES WDF520PADM 5.3 Cu. Ft. Freestanding Dishwasher with AnyWare™ Electric Range with Easy Plus Silverware Basket Wipe Ceramic Glass Cooktop

WRB329DMBM 30-inches wide Bottom-Freezer Refrigerator with SpillGuard™ Glass Shelves - 18.7 cu. ft.

Product Dimensions

Product Dimensions

Width: Depth:

29 7/8 27 3/4

Product Dimensions

Height: Width: Depth:

34 1/2 23 7/8 24 1/2

Height: Width: Depth:

67 29 5/8 33 3/8


WFE515S0ES

WDF520PADM

WRB329DMBM

• • • • •

• • • •

• Accu-Chill™ Temperature Management System • SpillGuard™ Glass Shelves • Adaptive Defrost • FreshFlow™ Produce Preserver • LED Interior Lighting • ENERGY STAR® Qualified

Counter Depth Range FlexHeat™ Element 5.3 Cu. Ft. Capacity SteamClean Option Easy Wipe Ceramic Glass Cooktop • AccuBake® Temperature Management System • EasyView™ Large Oven Window • Hidden Bake Element

Electrical Requirements: 40 Amps. 120/240 V.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors: Black-on-Stainless

• • • •

AccuSense® Soil Sensor AnyWare™ Plus Silverware Basket 1-Hour Wash Cycle No One Has Fewer Repairs 18 Years in a Row ENERGY STAR® Qualified Sani Rinse Option Remembers Your Last Cycle Normal Cycle

Electrical Requirements: 15 Amps.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Energy Guide

Colors: Monochromatic Stainless Steel

Black

Black

Silver

White

Electrical Requirements: 15 Amps.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Energy Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors: Stainless Steel Black White

Biscuit White

Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. ®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2013 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies.


Options http://www.whirlpool.com

WOC54EC0AS Whirlpool® 5.0 cu. ft. Combination Microwave Wall Oven with SteamClean Option

WFE540H0ES 6.4 Cu. Ft. Freestanding Electric Range with AquaLift® Self-Cleaning Technology

WDF320PADS Dishwasher with AccuSense® Soil Sensor

WRS335FDDM 36-inch Wide Side-by-Side Refrigerator with Water Dispenser - 25 cu. ft.

Product Dimensions

Product Dimensions

Product Dimensions

Product Dimensions

Height: Width: Depth:

42 9/16 30 26 7/16

Height: Width: Depth:

47 7/8 29 7/8 27 3/4

Height: Width: Depth:

34 1/2 23 7/8 24 1/2

Height: Width: Depth:

68 7/8 35 1/2 34 5/8


WOC54EC0AS

WFE540H0ES

WDF320PADS

WRS335FDDM

• AccuBake® Temperature Management System • SteamClean option • Largest capacity wall oven available • New EasyView™ extra-large oven window • Precise Clean® cleaning system • Hidden Bake Element

• • • • • •

• AccuSense® Soil Sensor • 1-Hour Wash Cycle • No One Has Fewer Repairs 18 Years in a Row • ENERGY STAR® Qualified • Remembers Your Last Cycle • Normal Cycle • Heavy Cycle • High Temp Wash

• Accu-Chill™ Temperature Management System • Frameless Glass Shelves • Adaptive Defrost • Adjustable Gallon Door Bins • ENERGY STAR® Qualified • Flush Exterior Filtered Water and Ice Dispenser • LED Interior Lighting • PUR® Water and Ice Filtration System

Electrical Requirements: 40 Amps. 240 V.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors: Monochromatic Stainless Steel

Counter Depth Range FlexHeat™ Element Fan Convection Cooking AquaLift® Self-Clean Technology 6.4 Cu. Ft. Capacity Easy Wipe Ceramic Glass Cooktop • AccuBake® Temperature Management System • EasyView™ Extra-Large Oven Window

Electrical Requirements: 40 Amps. 120/240 V.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors:

Electrical Requirements: 15 Amps.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Energy Guide

Colors:

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Energy Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors: Stainless Steel

Black-on-Stainless

Black White

Black

Black-on-Stainless

Black

White

Black

Universal Silver

Black Ice

Biscuit

White Ice

White

White

Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. ®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2013 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies.


Options (continued) http://www.kitchenaid.com

KECD807XBL 30-Inch 4 Element Downdraft Electric Cooktop, ArchitectÂŽ Series II

Product Dimensions

Height: Width: Depth:

18 7/16 30 1/16 22


KECD807XBL • • • • •

Two Double-Ring Round Elements 400 CFM Exhaust Rating 3-Speed Fan Control Pure Color Ceramic-Glass Surface Stainless Steel Knobs

Electrical Requirements: 40 Amps. 240 V.

Additional Documents: Use and Care Guide Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty Certificate

Colors: Black Stainless Steel

Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. ®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2013 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies.


Prepared By:

®

/™ ©2017 All Rights reserved.


WDT750SAHV Stainless Steel Tub Dishwasher with TotalCoverage Spray Arm

http://www.whirlpool.com

Key Features: • Sensor Cycle • TotalCoverage Spray Arm • 1-Hour Wash Cycle • Tap Touch Controls • No One Has Fewer Repairs 20 Years in a Row • Soil Sensor • In-Door Silverware Basket • Adjustable Upper Rack • Sani Rinse Option • Stainless Steel Tub • Fingerprint-Resistant • Normal Cycle

Product Dimensions: Height: 34 1/2 Width: 23 7/8 Depth: 24 1/2

Additional Information: Use And Care Dimension Guide Installation Guide Energy Guide Warranty

®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2016 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies. Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price (MSRP) and Minimum Advertised Price (MAP) provided for reference purposes only. Dealer alone determines advertised and retail prices.


WFE525S0HV 5.3 cu. ft. Freestanding Electric Range with Frozen Bake™ Technology

http://www.whirlpool.com

Key Features: • Frozen Bake™ Technology • FlexHeat™ Dual Radiant Element • Keep Warm Setting • Temperature Sensor • Closed Door Broiling • Warm Zone Element • Control Lock Mode • Adjustable Self-Cleaning Technology • 5.3 cu. ft. Capacity • Easy-Wipe Ceramic Glass Cooktop • Large Oven Window • Dishwasher-Safe Knobs

Product Dimensions: Height: 47 7/8 Width: 29 7/8 Depth: 27 3/4

Additional Information: Use And Care Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty

®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2016 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies. Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price (MSRP) and Minimum Advertised Price (MAP) provided for reference purposes only. Dealer alone determines advertised and retail prices.


WMH32519HV 1.9 cu. ft. Capacity Steam Microwave with Sensor Cooking

http://www.whirlpool.com

Key Features: • CleanRelease® Non-Stick Interior • Steam Cooking • Sensor Cooking • Turntable On/Off Option • 3-Speed, 300 CFM Motor Class • Dishwasher-Safe Turntable Plate • Microwave Presets • Add 30 Seconds Option • Electronic Touch Controls • Adjustable Cooktop Lighting • Hidden Vent • Cooking Rack

Product Dimensions: Height: 17 1/8 Width: 29 15/16 Depth: 15 9/16

Additional Information: Use And Care Dimension Guide Installation Guide Warranty

®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2016 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies. Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price (MSRP) and Minimum Advertised Price (MAP) provided for reference purposes only. Dealer alone determines advertised and retail prices.


WRF555SDHV 36-inch Wide French Door Refrigerator in Fingerprint-Resistant Stainless Steel - 25 cu. ft.

http://www.whirlpool.com

Key Features: • Exterior Ice and Water Dispenser with EveryDrop™ Filtration • Spillproof Shelves • Humidity-Controlled Double Crisper • Two-Tier Freezer Storage • Fingerprint Resistant • ENERGY STAR® Certified • Adjustable Gallon Door Bins • Tap Touch Controls • 25 Cu. Ft. Capacity • Dispenser Control Lock • #1 Selling Appliance Brand in the U.S.A.

Product Dimensions: Height: 70 1/4 Width: 35 5/8 Depth: 35 1/4

Additional Information: Use And Care Dimension Guide Energy Guide Warranty

®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2016 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies. Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price (MSRP) and Minimum Advertised Price (MAP) provided for reference purposes only. Dealer alone determines advertised and retail prices.


WMC30516HV 1.6 cu. ft. Countertop Microwave with 1,200-Watt Cooking Power

http://www.whirlpool.com

Key Features: • Sensor Cooking • 1,200-Watt Cooking Power • Recessed Glass Turntable • Microwave Presets • Microwave Built-In Trim Kit (Optional) • Electronic Touch Controls • Add 30 Seconds Option • Control Lock Mode • 1.6 cu. ft. Capacity • Dishwasher-Safe Turntable Plate • #1 selling appliance brand in the U.S.A.

Product Dimensions: Height: 13 Width: 21 3/4 Depth: 17 1/4

Additional Information: Use And Care Warranty

®Registered trademark/TM Trademark of Whirlpool, U.S.A. © 2016 Whirlpool Corporation. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks are owned by their respective companies. Because Whirlpool Corporation policy includes a continuous commitment to improve our products, we reserve the right to change materials and specifications without notice. We also reserve the right to discontinue or transition products without notice. Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price (MSRP) and Minimum Advertised Price (MAP) provided for reference purposes only. Dealer alone determines advertised and retail prices.


NEW!

the new Rinnai LS Series tankless Water Heaters Endless Hot Water Never Looked So Good Whole-House and commercial Tankless Water Heating Solutions

Voted #1 Builder Magazine’s “Most Popular Products” Three Years In A Row


why tankless

at a glance

Endless hot water supply maintains consistent, safe temperature. One Rinnai delivers 240 gallons or more per hour with no recovery time.

TEN 40-GALLON ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS** R94LSe

OR SIX 40-GALLON GAS WATER HEATERS*

Based on 77˚ Rise, * Based on a 34,000 BTU input. ** Based on 4,500 Watt elements. WHOLE-HOUSE SIMULTANEOUS BATH USE – SIZING CHART

WHOLE-HOUSE SIMULTANEOUS BATH-USE

Ground Water Temperature

Model

Summer Season – 65° F - 75° F

Winter Season – 45° F - 55° F

R50LSi

Heat Water Only When You Need It!

T

ankless water heating is the wave of the future – available to you today. You’ll enjoy up to 40% energy savings, endless hot water, and significant space savings – plus a typical life span of 20 years or more in residential applications. And this “green” technology produces less CO2 and NOX than conventional gas or electric tank water heaters. You see, Rinnai tankless water heaters use natural gas or propane gas to heat water only when needed. When water flow is detected, the Rinnai begins heating water as it passes through its copper heat exchanger. The design of the unit allows it to capture up to 84% of the heat energy, making it highly efficient and cost effective. When the demand for water ceases, the tankless unit shuts down and uses no energy – a revolutionary advantage over inefficient tank-style heaters. More efficient when it’s on, and off when it’s off, the Rinnai tankless water heater is the ultimate choice in today’s world of high energy costs and environmental preservation. Additionally, your Rinnai is supported by the most extensive group of professionals in the business. Our nationwide network of more than 80,000 registered dealers and factory-trained installers ensures a trouble-free installation and reliable after-the-sale support.

R63LSe R75LSi/e R94LSi/e

Enjoy Endless Hot Water

R98LSi/e

- Customer theprovide option ofadditional using the output followingin appliances ofwater a shower: - The R94haswill areas withinstead ground temperatures greater grade than 75°F. residential clothes wash machines or dishwashers. - Customer has the option of using the following appliances instead of a shower: - Shower heads grade assumedclothes to be 2.5 mixed flow rate or less. If custom shower fixtures i.e. residential washgpm machines or dishwashers. - Shower 2.5over gpm rate or are less.used, If custom body sprays,heads large assumed rain heads,toorbetubs 60mixed gallonsflow in capacity pleaseshower contact Rinnai. fixtures i.e. body sprays, large rain heads, or tubs over 60 gallons in capacity are - Bathroom sink faucets assumed to be 2 gpm mixed flow rate or less. used, please contact Rinnai. - Assumed mixed temperature on shower heads and bathroom sinkrate faucets to be 104º F. - Bathroom sink faucets assumed to be 2 gpm mixed flow or less. Assumed mixed temperature on shower heads and bathroom sink faucets to - Assumed Rinnai set point to be 120°F. be 104º F. - Assumed 50psi - 80psi - Assumed Rinnai setinlet pointwater to bepressure 120°F.for maximum flow. - Assumed 50psi - 80psi inlet water pressure for maximum flow.

estimated annual energy cost comparison*

Costs less to operate on an annual basis. Rinnai R94LSi

$265

40-Gallon Gas Tank**

Save Space Traditional tank water heaters can take up to 16 square feet of valuable floor space. But your Rinnai unit – only about the size of a carry-on suitcase – can be installed on virtually any wall inside or outside of your home or building. The compact design affords you almost limitless installation options, so you can strategically locate the unit for maximum performance and energy efficiency. Rinnai Tankless vs Other Tankless

$326

40-Gallon Electric Tank**

Tankless water heating is one of the few energy-saving technologies that actually improves the quality of your life. You’ll delight in endless hot water – for bathing, cooking, dishes, laundry, and all the other countless ways hot water enriches your life. Plus, our digital controllers give you precise control of the output water temperature for the ultimate in comfort and safety.

$453

*Based on 2006 annual energy costs. * Based Upon DOE Average Energy Costs for 2006 ** Source: GAMA Consumers Directory of Certified Efficiency Ratings

Tankless vs. Tank Comparison

Rinnai

Other Tankless

3.1

Up to 9,990

Limited

Direct-Vent Sealed Combustion Free Air Space Requirement (cu. ft.) Zero-Clearance Venting

Limited

Concentric Vent (One Penetration)

Limited

12-Year Heat Exchanger Warranty*

Limited

24/7/365 Technical Support

Limited

Significant space savings over conventional tank water heaters.

Rinnai Tankless vs Traditional Tank

Dimensions: 14" W x 26" H x 10" D vs approx. 20" Dia. x 47" H

Digital Control for:

No

• Set Temperature

No

• Consistent Temperature

No

Space Savings: Avg. 12-16 sq. ft. Wall mounted vs 40-gallon tank Weight Savings: 50 lbs. vs approx. 320 lbs. or more during use

Hot Water Capacity

Rinnai

40-Gallon Tank

Endless

40 gallons

• Self-Diagnostics

No

Interior/Exterior Install Options Warranty/Avg. Service Life (Years)

Interior Only 12*/20

6/12

*12-year warranty is for heat exchanger of units installed in residential applications; 5 years for commercial applications.


the LS Series Introducing Rinnai’s most innovative offering

Contemporary Design

E

xperience a never-ending supply of fresh hot water – and a sleek, sculpted water heater design that reflects the innovative technology within. Introducing the Rinnai LS Series, a whole new line of tankless water heaters that afford you the very best of both form and function. With their attractive silver finish, Rinnai LS Series units are available in interior and exterior models, giving you virtually unlimited flexibility to install your unit wherever you choose.

R63LSe

R50LSi

Perfect for Any Home The remarkable combination of design and performance makes the LS Series the perfect choice. Whether you’re building a spacious new home – complete with luxurious spa bath and body spray system – or remodeling your older home, Rinnai LS units can be used individually, in pairs, or in banks of three or more to supply all your hot water needs. LS Series interior-mount units can be placed in any room – no need to hide them in closets or utility rooms – and vent directly to the outside. Exterior units require no additional venting and can even be installed in a recessed enclosure, then painted or textured to match the exterior of your home for a clean, inconspicuous appearance. Improved Performance and Longevity Whichever LS unit you choose, you get the benefit of a newly designed, commercial-grade heat exchanger for optimum durability. In fact, the same LS unit can be used for both residential and commercial applications. Homeowners get the reliability of commercialgrade construction and an industry-leading, 12-year limited warranty, and commercial customers get lower cost and wider availability of units.

Key Features of the LS Series • Sleek, modern design • Commercial-grade heat exchanger for residential and commercial applications • Increased hot water output • EZConnect ™ (connects two units together)* • Integrated condensate collector for interior models • Backed by a 12-year heat exchanger limited warranty, 5 years parts, 1 year labor

* EZConnect feature is not available for the R63LSe.


commercial

commercial applications

Commercial Quality at Your Fingertips

B

Commercial Applications • Restaurants • Car Washes, Laundromats • Schools, Colleges and Universities • Public Facilities and Event Venues • Hotels and Motels

oth commercial and residential customers benefit from the innovative new heat exchanger design of the LS Series. To achieve this level of performance, Rinnai engineers used finite element analysis simulation to maximize thermal transfer and minimize thermal stresses. Rigorous high-temperature reliability testing confirmed the design. And now Rinnai delivers to you the most reliable, durable tankless water heater in our history. This dual-use heat exchanger provides commercial customers a benefit unique to Rinnai: the ability to access a commercial-grade water heater at any of our over 2,000 distribution outlets. So, when emergencies occur and replacement units are needed immediately, you’ll no longer need to wait for a commercial unit.

• Nursing Homes • Salons and Spas • Industrial Facilities

Additional Commercial Features and Benefits: • Variety of digital controllers allows precise control and monitoring. • Available wireless controller (MC-502RC-1M/S) provides control from a central location, even on retrofits. • Multi-unit options: the EZConnect™* cable (for 2 units) or MSA control boards (for 3 or more units**) allow units to be used in combination and in rotation, to avoid wearing out the first unit in a manifolded series. • Exterior units can be mounted on outside walls or on rooftops with no additional protection or venting. • Rinnai’s concentric venting system means zero clearance, sealed combustion, and single wall or roof penetration for maximum safety and installation simplicity. * EZConnect feature is not available for the R63LSe. ** For each group of five units one MSA-M and three MSA-S control boards are required.

R98LSi


endless options

flexibility + control

Accessories

MC-91-1-S Standard Digital Controller

Rinnai’s line of digital controllers allows you to set water temperature precisely for multiple locations in your home, analyze and troubleshoot the water heater, and even automatically fill your bath to a pre-set temperature and volume. An available wireless controller is perfect for retrofits where pulling a wire through the wall is impractical. (Note: the MC-91 controller comes standard with all LS units.) Flexible Installation Choosing a mounting location depends on your taste, your home or building, and your location. Install your Rinnai tankless water heater inside, outside, in a garage or laundry room or virtually anywhere else.

MC-502RC Wireless Controller

MC-100V-1-S Deluxe Digital Controller

For interior installation, Rinnai units use a concentric venting system – a single vent assembly featuring an inner, metal vent for exhaust gases and an outer PVC or metal tube for bringing combustion air from outdoors. The result: a direct-vent, sealed-combustion system that offers optimum safety, performance and ease of installation. Exterior units can be installed in a recessed enclosure, flush with the outer wall, then painted or textured to match your home’s panel or brick siding. And if you need more than one unit for your larger home, spa or body spray shower, Rinnai’s EZConnect™ feature allows you to link two units with a simple cord. For even larger applications, your installer can place multiple units in parallel.

Other benefits include: • Integrated Condensate Collector: ensures condensation doesn’t drain back into unit, and reduces cost of venting. • High-Altitude Operation: all LS units can be adjusted for use up to 10,000 ft.

BC-100V-1US-S Bath-Fill Digital Controller EXTERIOR WALLMOUNT installations require no additional venting accessories. INTERIOR ROOF OR WALL VENTING The Rinnai can be vented vertically or horizontally.

CUSTOM INSTALLATIONS to match the outside appearance of the home or to blend in with the interior (shown with optional pipe cover).

More Than 30 Million Installations Worldwide Make Rinnai #1! At Rinnai, we’ve sold more tankless water heaters worldwide than anyone else. Our complete commitment to safety, quality and the environment has also made us #1 in the U.S. market. Tomorrow’s Innovation Today As the leading manufacturer of gas heating products worldwide, Rinnai continues innovating to ensure a greener environment. Rinnai’s superior heating and hot water technologies deliver greater efficiency and reliability, so everyone benefits – with environmental preservation and energy conservation that results in a better planet for us all.


Interior Residential/Commercial Models Models available in Natural Gas or Propane Units Dimensions Weight Maximum/Minimum Gas Rate (Input BTU’s)

R50LSi 14” W x 26” H x 10“ D 50 lbs 150,000 /15,000

R75LSi 14” W x 26” H x 10“ D 50 lbs 180,000 /15,000

Hot Water Capacity Range Energy Factor (NG and LP) Temperature Range (Min - Max) Residential Commercial* Standard Digital Controller

0.6 to 5.0 GPM .82 98° F - 140° F 98° F - 160° F MC-91-1

R98LSi/ R98LSi ASME** 19” W x 25” H x 9“ D 55 lbs 237,000 /19,000

0.6 to 7.5 GPM .82

R94LSi 14” W x 26” H x 10“ D 50 lbs 199,000/15,000 (NG) 190,000/15,000 (LP) 0.6 to 9.4 GPM .82

0.6 to 9.8 GPM NA

98° F - 140° F 98° F - 160° F MC-91-1

98° F - 140° F 98° F - 185° F MC-91-1

98° F - 140° F 98° F - 185° F MC-91-1

0.6 to 9.8 GPM NA 98° F - 140° F 98° F - 185° F MC-91-1

Exterior Residential/Commercial Models Models available in Natural Gas or Propane Units Dimensions Weight Maximum/Minimum Gas Rate (Input BTU’s)

R63LSe† 14” W x 23” H x 8“ D 36 lbs 150,000 /19,000

R75LSe 14” W x 25” H x 10“ D 46 lbs 180,000 /15,000

Hot Water Capacity Range Energy Factor (NG and LP) Temperature Range (Min - Max) Residential Commercial* Standard Digital Controller

0.6 to 6.3 GPM .81

0.6 to 7.5 GPM .82

R94LSe 14” W x 25” H x 10“ D 46 lbs 199,000 /15,000 (NG) 190,000 /15,000 (LP) 0.6 to 9.4 GPM . 82

98° F - 140° F 98° F - 160° F MC-91-1

98° F - 140° F 98° F - 160° F MC-91-1

98° F - 140° F 98° F - 185° F MC-91-1

R98LSe/ R98LSe ASME** 19” W x 25” H x 9“ D 55 lbs 237,000 /19,000

*To achieve temperatures over 140˚F, an MCC-91 commercial controller must be purchased separately. **R98LS models have a BTU input of 200,000 or more and are therefore not subject to the EF test. R98LS models will be available in April 2008. † EZConnect not available with the R63LSe. Tankless Water Heater - Maximum Flow Curves R98LSi/e

10

R94LSi/e

9 8

6 5 4 3

R75LSi/e

Hot Water Flow Rate (gpm)

7

R63LSe R50LSi

2 1 0 0

25

50

75

100

125

150

Temperature Rise (˚F)

Rinnai is continually updating and improving products; therefore, specifications are subject to change without prior notice. Local, state, provincial and federal codes must be adhered to prior to and upon installation.

FOR MORE INFORMATION ON RINNAI PRODUCTS

MODEL NO. Temperature Rise (°F) 140 135 130 125 120 115 110 105 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20

R98-LSi/e Gallons per minute 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 4.2 4.4 4.7 4.9 5.3 5.7 6.1 6.6 7.2 7.9 8.8 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8

HOT WATER FLOW CHART R94-LSi/e R75-LSi/e R63-LSe Gallons per Gallons per Gallons per minute minute minute 2.4 2.1 1.8 2.5 2.2 1.8 2.6 2.3 1.9 2.7 2.4 2.0 2.8 2.5 2.1 2.9 2.6 2.2 3.0 2.7 2.3 3.2 2.9 2.4 3.3 3.0 2.5 3.5 3.2 2.6 3.7 3.3 2.8 3.9 3.5 2.9 4.2 3.8 3.1 4.4 4.0 3.3 4.7 4.3 3.6 5.1 4.6 3.8 5.5 5.0 4.2 6.0 5.5 4.5 6.6 6.0 5.0 7.4 6.7 5.5 8.3 7.5 6.2 9.4 7.5 6.3 9.4 7.5 6.3 9.4 7.5 6.3 9.4 7.5 6.3

R50-LSi Gallons per minute 1.8 1.9 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.7 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.9 4.2 4.6 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

OTHER RINNAI LITERATURE AVAILABLE Rinnai Green Advantages

intelligent fireplaces

direct-vent ductless heaters

Rinnai Corporation 103 International Drive Peachtree City, GA 30269

Toll Free 1-866-RINNAI-1

Phone: 678-829-1700 • Fax: 678-364-8643 Visit our Websites www.rinnai.us • www.foreverhotwater.com E-mail: marketing@rinnai.us R-CNWH-E-12r5 © 2008 Rinnai Corporation 200M-03/2008


Owner’s Manual Installation and Operation

Models: DV3732SBI DV3732SBIL

NOTICE DO NOT DISCARD THIS MANUAL • Important operating and maintenance instructions included.

• Read, understand and follow these instructions for safe installation and operation.

WARNING: If the information in these instructions is not followed exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury, or death. • DO NOT store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. • What to do if you smell gas - DO NOT try to light any appliance. - DO NOT touch any electrical switch. DO NOT use any phone in your building. - Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor’s phone. Follow the gas supplier’s instructions. - If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. • Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency, or the gas supplier. This appliance may be installed as an OEM installation in manufactured home (USA only) or mobile home and must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the manufactured home construction and safety standard, Title 24 CFR, Part 3280 or Standard for Installation in Mobile Homes, CAN/CSA Z240MH, in Canada. This appliance is only for use with the type(s) of gas indicated on the rating plate.

• Leave this manual with party responsible for use and operation.

D DI O N SC OT AR D

WARNING HOT SURFACES! Glass and other surfaces are hot during operation AND cool down. Hot glass will cause burns. • DO NOT touch glass until it is cooled • NEVER allow children to touch glass • Keep children away • CAREFULLY SUPERVISE children in same room as fireplace. • Alert children and adults to hazards of high temperatures. High temperatures may ignite clothing or other flammable materials. • Keep clothing, furniture, draperies and other flammable materials away. This appliance has been supplied with an integral barrier to prevent direct contact with the fixed glass panel. DO NOT operate the appliance with the barrier removed. Contact your dealer or Hearth & Home Technologies if the barrier is not present or help is needed to properly install one.

In the Commonwealth of Massachusetts installation must be performed by a licensed plumber or gas fitter. See Table of Contents for location of additional Commonwealth of Massachusetts requirements.

Installation and service of this appliance should be performed by qualified personnel. Hearth & Home Technologies suggests NFI certified or factory trained professionals, or technicians supervised by an NFI certified professional.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

1


Read this manual before installing or operating this appliance. Please retain this owner’s manual for future reference.

A. Congratulations

This owner’s manual should be retained for future reference. We suggest that you keep it with your other important documents and product manuals.

Congratulations on selecting a Hearth & Home Technologies gas fireplace, an elegant and clean alternative to wood burning fireplaces. The Hearth & Home Technologies gas fireplace you have selected is designed to provide the utmost in safety, reliability, and efficiency.

The information contained in this owner’s manual, unless noted otherwise, applies to all models and gas control systems. Your new Hearth & Home Technologies gas fireplace will give you years of durable use and trouble-free enjoyment. Welcome to the Hearth & Home Technologies family of fireplace products!

As the owner of a new fireplace, you’ll want to read and carefully follow all of the instructions contained in this owner’s manual. Pay special attention to all cautions and warnings.

We recommend that you record the following pertinent information about your fireplace.

Homeowner Reference Information

Model Name: ___________________________________________ Date purchased/installed: __________________ Serial Number:__________________________________________ Location on fireplace: _____________________ Dealership purchased from: _______________________________ Dealer Phone: __________________________ Notes: _______________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________________

Listing Label Information/Location

The model information regarding your specific fireplace can be found on the rating plate usually located in the control area of the fireplace.

Heatilator, a brand of Hearth & Home Technologies 7571 215th Street West, Lakeville, MN 55044

Type of Gas Not for use with solid fuel. (Ne doit pas entre utilise avec un combustible solide). Type of Gas (Sorte De Gaz) Gaz)::

NATURAL GAS

This appliance must be installed in accordance with local codes, if any; if not, follow ANSI Z223.1 in the USA or CAN/CGA B149 installation codes. (Installer l’appareil selon les codes ou reglements locaux ou, en l’absence de tels reglements, selon les codes d’installation CAN/CGA-B149.)

ANSI Z21XX-XXXX · CSA 2.XX-MXX · UL307B

Gas and Electric Information

Minimum Permissible Gas Supply for Purposes of Input Adjustment. Approved Minimum (De Gaz) Acceptable

0.0 in w.c.

(Po. Col. d’eau)

Maximum Pressure (Pression)

0.0 in w.c.

(Po. Col. d’eau)

Maximum Manifold Pressure (Pression)

0.0 in w.c.

(Po. Col. d’eau)

Minimum Manifold Pressure (Pression)

0.0 in w.c.

(Po. Col. d’eau)

Total Electrical Requirements: 000Vac, 00Hz., less than 00 Amperes

ALTITUDE: MAX. INPUT BTUH: MIN. INPUT BTUH: ORIFICE SIZE:

2

0-0000 FT. 00,000 00,000 #XXXXX

IN CANADA 0000-0000FT. 00,000 00,000 #XXXXX

MADE IN USA

Model: (Modele):

XXXXXXXX

Serial (Serie):

XXXXXXXX

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

Model Number

Serial Number


Safety Alert Key: • • • •

DANGER! Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided will result in death or serious injury. WARNING! Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION! Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. NOTICE: Used to address practices not related to personal injury.

Table of Contents A. Congratulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 B. Limited Lifetime Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1 Listing and Code Approvals A. B.  C. D. E. F. G. H.

Appliance Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tempered Glass Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTU Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Altitude Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Combustible Materials Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combustible Materials Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for the Commonwealth of Massachusetts . .

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8

User Guide Gas Fireplace Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Your Fireplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Fan Kit (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Decorative Doors and Fronts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Clear Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Fixed Glass Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Remote Controls, Wall Controls and Wall Switches . . . . . 10 Before Lighting Fireplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Lighting Instructions (IPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 After Fireplace is Lit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3 Maintenance and Service A. Maintenance Tasks-Homeowner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 B. Maintenance Tasks-Qualified Service Technician . . . . . . 14

4 Getting Started

Typical Appliance System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design and Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and Supplies Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspect Appliance and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 16 16 16

22 22 22 22 23 24

8 Vent Clearances and Framing A. B. C. D.

Pipe Clearances to Combustibles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Penetration Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install the Ceiling Firestop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Attic Insulation Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36 36 37 38

Selecting Appliance Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constructing the Appliance Chase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mantel and Wall Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A. Top Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 B. Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 C. Securing and Leveling the Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

10 Installing Vent Pipe (DVP and SLP Pipe) A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L.

Assemble Vent Sections (DVP Pipe Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemble Vent Sections (SLP Pipe Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemble Slip Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Secure the Vent Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disassemble Vent Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Decorative Ceiling Components (SLP only). . . . . . Install Metal Roof Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemble and Install Storm Collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Vertical Termination Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Decorative Wall Components (SLP only) . . . . . . . . Heat Shield Requirements for Horizontal Termination . . . Install Horizontal Termination Cap (DVP and SLP Pipe) .

42 43 43 44  44 45 46 46 47 47 47 48

A. B. C. D.

Fuel Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Altitude Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49 49 49 49

12 Electrical Information

5 Framing and Clearances A. B. C. D.

Approved Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vent Table Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of Flex Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vent Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 Gas Information

Installer Guide A. B. C. D.

A. B. C. D. E. F.

9 Appliance Preparation

2 Operating Instructions A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K.

7 Vent Information and Diagrams

17 18 18 19

6 Termination Locations

A. B. C. D. E. F.

Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intellifire Ignition System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Accessories Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Service and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Junction Box Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Switch Installation for Fan (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . .

50 50 50 50 52 52

A. Vent Termination Minimum Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

3


13 Finishing A. B. C. D. E.

Splatter Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mantel and Wall Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facing Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevated Hearth Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53 55 56 57 58

14 Appliance Setup A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J.

Remove Fixed Glass Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove the Shipping Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clean the Appliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lava Rock, Rockwool/Ember Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install the Log Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed Glass Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Louvers and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Shutter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59 59 59 59 59 60 62 62 62 62

15 Troubleshooting  A. Intellifire Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 16 Reference Materials A. Appliance Dimension Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

 B. Vent Components Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 C. Service Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 D. Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

 = Contains updated information.

4

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


 B.

Limited Lifetime Warranty Hearth & Home Technologies LIMITED LIFETIME WARRANTY

Hearth & Home Technologies, on behalf of its hearth brands (”HHT”), extends the following warranty for HHT gas, wood, pellet, coal and electric hearth appliances that are purchased from an HHT authorized dealer. WARRANTY COVERAGE: HHT warrants to the original owner of the HHT appliance at the site of installation, and to any transferee taking ownership of the appliance at the site of installation within two years following the date of original purchase, that the HHT appliance will be free from defects in materials and workmanship at the time of manufacture. After installation, if covered components manufactured by HHT are found to be defective in materials or workmanship during the applicable warranty period, HHT will, at its option, repair or replace the covered components. HHT, at its own discretion, may fully discharge all of its obligations under such warranties by replacing the product itself or refunding the verified purchase price of the product itself. The maximum amount recoverable under this warranty is limited to the purchase price of the product. This warranty is subject to conditions, exclusions and limitations as described below.

WARRANTY PERIOD: Warranty coverage begins on the date of original purchase. In the case of new home construction, warranty coverage begins on the date of first occupancy of the dwelling or six months after the sale of the product by an independent, authorized HHT dealer/ distributor, whichever occurs earlier. The warranty shall commence no later than 24 months following the date of product shipment from HHT, regardless of the installation or occupancy date. The warranty period for parts and labor for covered components is produced in the following table. The term “Limited Lifetime” in the table below is defined as: 20 years from the beginning date of warranty coverage for gas appliances, and 10 years from the beginning date of warranty coverage for wood, pellet, and coal appliances. These time periods reflect the minimum expected useful lives of the designated components under normal operating conditions.

Warranty Period Parts

Labor

1 Year

2 years

HHT Manufactured Appliances and Venting Gas

X

X

Wood

X

X X

3 years

Pellet

EPA Wood

Coal

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Components Covered

Electric Venting

X

X

All parts and material except as covered by Conditions, Exclusions, and Limitations listed Igniters, electronic components, and glass Factory-installed blowers Molded refractory panels

X

Firepots and burnpots

5 years

1 year

7 years

3 years

10 years

1 year

X

Limited 3 years Lifetime

X

X

X

X

X

90 Days

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Castings and baffles

X

X

Manifold tubes, HHT chimney and termination Burners, logs and refractory Firebox and heat exchanger X

X

All replacement parts beyond warranty period

See conditions, exclusions, and limitations on next page. 4021-645D 01-16-13

Page 1 of 2 Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

5


 B.

Limited Lifetime Warranty (continued)

WARRANTY CONDITIONS: • • •

This warranty only covers HHT appliances that are purchased through an HHT authorized dealer or distributor. A list of HHT authorized dealers is available on the HHT branded websites. This warranty is only valid while the HHT appliance remains at the site of original installation. Contact your installing dealer for warranty service. If the installing dealer is unable to provide necessary parts, contact the nearest HHT authorized dealer or supplier. Additional service fees may apply if you are seeking warranty service from a dealer other than the dealer from whom you originally purchased the product. Check with your dealer in advance for any costs to you when arranging a warranty call. Travel and shipping charges for parts are not covered by this warranty.

WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS: This warranty does not cover the following: • Changes in surface finishes as a result of normal use. As a heating appliance, some changes in color of interior and exterior surface finishes may occur. This is not a flaw and is not covered under warranty. • Damage to printed, plated, or enameled surfaces caused by fingerprints, accidents, misuse, scratches, melted items, or other external sources and residues left on the plated surfaces from the use of abrasive cleaners or polishes. • Repair or replacement of parts that are subject to normal wear and tear during the warranty period. These parts include: paint, wood, pellet and coal gaskets, firebricks, grates, flame guides, batteries and the discoloration of glass. • Minor expansion, contraction, or movement of certain parts causing noise. These conditions are normal and complaints related to this noise are not covered by this warranty. • Damages resulting from: (1) failure to install, operate, or maintain the appliance in accordance with the installation instructions, operating instructions, and listing agent identification label furnished with the appliance; (2) failure to install the appliance in accordance with local building codes; (3) shipping or improper handling; (4) improper operation, abuse, misuse, continued operation with damaged, corroded or failed components, accident, or improperly/ incorrectly performed repairs; (5) environmental conditions, inadequate ventilation, negative pressure, or drafting caused by tightly sealed constructions, insufficient make-up air supply, or handling devices such as exhaust fans or forced air furnaces or other such causes; (6) use of fuels other than those specified in the operating instructions; (7) installation or use of components not supplied with the appliance or any other components not expressly authorized and approved by HHT; (8) modification of the appliance not expressly authorized and approved by HHT in writing; and/or (9) interruptions or fluctuations of electrical power supply to the appliance. • Non-HHT venting components, hearth components or other accessories used in conjunction with the appliance. • Any part of a pre-existing fireplace system in which an insert or a decorative gas appliance is installed. • HHT’s obligation under this warranty does not extend to the appliance’s capability to heat the desired space. Information is provided to assist the consumer and the dealer in selecting the proper appliance for the application. Consideration must be given to appliance location and configuration, environmental conditions, insulation and air tightness of the structure.

This warranty is void if: •

• •

The appliance has been over-fired or operated in atmospheres contaminated by chlorine, fluorine, or other damaging chemicals. Over-firing can be identified by, but not limited to, warped plates or tubes, rust colored cast iron, bubbling, cracking and discoloration of steel or enamel finishes. The appliance is subjected to prolonged periods of dampness or condensation. There is any damage to the appliance or other components due to water or weather damage which is the result of, but not limited to, improper chimney or venting installation.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY: •

The owner’s exclusive remedy and HHT’s sole obligation under this warranty, under any other warranty, express or implied, or in contract, tort or otherwise, shall be limited to replacement, repair, or refund, as specified above. In no event will HHT be liable for any incidental or consequential damages caused by defects in the appliance. Some states do not allow exclusions or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so these limitations may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific rights; you may also have other rights, which vary from state to state. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROVIDED BY LAW, HHT MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THE WARRANTY SPECIFIED HEREIN. THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO DURATION OF THE EXPRESSED WARRANTY SPECIFIED ABOVE.

4021-645D 01-16-13 6

Page 2 of 2 Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


1

Listing and Code Approvals

A. Appliance Certification MODELS: DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL

C. BTU Specifications Models

Maximum Input BTU/h

Minimum Input BTU/h

Orifice Size (DMS)

LABORATORY: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) TYPE: Direct Vent Gas Appliance Heater STANDARD: ANSI Z21.88a-2007 • CSA 2.33a-2007

This product is listed to ANSI standards for “Vented Gas Appliance Heaters” and applicable sections of “Gas Burning Heating Appliances for Manufactured Homes and Recreational Vehicles”, and “Gas Fired Appliances for Use at High Altitudes”. NOTICE: This installation must conform with local codes. In the absence of local codes you must comply with the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1-latest edition in the U.S.A. and the CAN/CGA B149 Installation Codes in Canada. NOT INTENDED FOR USE AS A PRIMARY HEAT SOURCE. This appliance is tested and approved as either supplemental room heat or as a decorative appliance. It should not be factored as primary heat in residential heating calculations.

DV3732SBI (NG)

(0-2000 FT)

19,100

13,500

#45

DV3732SBI (LP)

(0-2000 FT)

19,300

14,500

#55

D. High Altitude Installations NOTICE: If the heating value of the gas has been reduced, these rules do not apply. Check with your local gas utility or authorities having jurisdiction. When installing above 2000 feet elevation: • In the USA: Reduce input rate 4% for each 1000 feet above 2000 feet. • In CANADA: Input ratings are certified without a reduction  of input rate for elevations up to 4500 feet (1370 m) above sea level. Please consult provincial and/or local authorities having jurisdiction for installations at elevations above 4500 feet (1370 m). Check with your local gas utility to determine proper orifice size.

B. Tempered Glass Specifications

E. Non-Combustible Materials Specification

Hearth & Home Technologies appliances manufactured with tempered glass may be installed in hazardous locations such as bathtub enclosures as defined by the Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC). The tempered glass has been tested and certified to the requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1202 (Safety Glazing Certification Council SGCC# 1595 and 1597. Architectural Testing, Inc. Reports 02-31919.01 and 02-31917.01).

Material which will not ignite and burn. Such materials are those consisting entirely of steel, iron, brick, tile, concrete, slate, glass or plasters, or any combination thereof.

This statement is in compliance with CPSC 16 CFR Section 1201.5 “Certification and labeling requirements” which refers to 15 U.S. Code (USC) 2063 stating “…Such certificate shall accompany the product or shall otherwise be furnished to any distributor or retailer to whom the product is delivered.” Some local building codes require the use of tempered glass with permanent marking in such locations. Glass meeting this requirement is available from the factory. Please contact your dealer or distributor to order.

Materials that are reported as passing ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 ºC and UL763 shall be considered non-combustible materials.

F. Combustible Materials Specification Materials made of or surfaced with wood, compressed paper, plant fibers, plastics, or other material that can ignite and burn, whether flame proofed or not, or plastered or unplastered shall be considered combustible materials.

G. Electrical Codes NOTICE: This appliance must be electrically wired and grounded in accordance with local codes or, in the absence of local codes, with National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA 70-latest edition or the Canadian Electric Code CSA C22.1. • A 110-120 VAC circuit for this product must be protected with ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection, in compliance with the applicable electrical codes, when it is installed in locations such as in bathrooms or near sinks.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

7


Note: The following requirements reference various Massachusetts and national codes not contained in this document.

H. Requirements for the Commonwealth of Massachusetts For all side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment installed in every dwelling, building or structure used in whole or in part for residential purposes, including those owned or operated by the Commonwealth and where the side wall exhaust vent termination is less than seven (7) feet above finished grade in the area of the venting, including but not limited to decks and porches, the following requirements shall be satisfied: Installation of Carbon Monoxide Detectors At the time of installation of the side wall horizontal vented gas fueled equipment, the installing plumber or gas fitter shall observe that a hard wired carbon monoxide detector with an alarm and battery back-up is installed on the floor level where the gas equipment is to be installed. In addition, the installing plumber or gas fitter shall observe that a battery operated or hard wired carbon monoxide detector with an alarm is installed on each additional level of the dwelling, building or structure served by the side wall horizontal vented gas fueled equipment. It shall be the responsibility of the property owner to secure the services of qualified licensed professionals for the installation of hard wired carbon monoxide detectors. In the event that the side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment is installed in a crawl space or an attic, the hard wired carbon monoxide detector with alarm and battery back-up may be installed on the next adjacent floor level. In the event that the requirements of this subdivision can not be met at the time of completion of installation, the owner shall have a period of thirty (30) days to comply with the above requirements; provided, however, that during said thirty (30) day period, a battery operated carbon monoxide detector with an alarm shall be installed. Approved Carbon Monoxide Detectors Each carbon monoxide detector as required in accordance with the above provisions shall comply with NFPA 720 and be ANSI/UL 2034 listed and IAS certified. Signage A metal or plastic identification plate shall be permanently mounted to the exterior of the building at a minimum height of eight (8) feet above grade directly in line with the exhaust vent terminal for the horizontally vented gas fueled heating appliance or equipment. The sign shall read, in print size no less than one-half (1/2) in. in size, “GAS VENT DIRECTLY BELOW. KEEP CLEAR OF ALL OBSTRUCTIONS”.

Inspection The state or local gas inspector of the side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment shall not approve the installation unless, upon inspection, the inspector observes carbon monoxide detectors and signage installed in accordance with the provisions of 248 CMR 5.08(2)(a)1 through 4. Exemptions The following equipment is exempt from 248 CMR 5.08(2)(a)1 through 4: • The equipment listed in Chapter 10 entitled “Equipment Not Required To Be Vented” in the most current edition of NFPA 54 as adopted by the Board; and • Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment installed in a room or structure separate from the dwelling, building or structure used in whole or in part for residential purposes. MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS Gas Equipment Venting System Provided When the manufacturer of Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas equipment provides a venting system design or venting system components with the equipment, the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation of the equipment and the venting system shall include: • Detailed instructions for the installation of the venting system design or the venting system components; and • A complete parts list for the venting system design or venting system. Gas Equipment Venting System NOT Provided When the manufacturer of a Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment does not provide the parts for venting the flue gases, but identifies “special venting systems”, the following requirements shall be satisfied by the manufacturer: • The referenced “special venting system” instructions shall be included with the appliance or equipment installation instructions; and • The “special venting systems” shall be Product Approved by the Board, and the instructions for that system shall include a parts list and detailed installation instructions. A copy of all installation instructions for all Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment, all venting instructions, all parts lists for venting instructions, and/or all venting design instructions shall remain with the appliance or equipment at the completion of the installation. See Gas Connection section for additional Commonwealth of Massachusetts requirements.

8

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


2

Operating Instructions

User Guide • Keep remote controls out of reach of children.

A. Gas Fireplace Safety

• Never leave children alone near a hot fireplace, whether operating or cooling down.

WARNING HOT SURFACES! Glass and other surfaces are hot during operation AND cool down. Hot glass will cause burns. • DO NOT touch glass until it is cooled • NEVER allow children to touch glass • Keep children away • CAREFULLY SUPERVISE children in same room as fireplace. • Alert children and adults to hazards of high temperatures. High temperatures may ignite clothing or other flammable materials. • Keep clothing, furniture, draperies and other flammable materials away.

• Teach children to NEVER touch the fireplace. • Consider not using the fireplace when children will be present. Contact your dealer for more information, or visit: www. hpba.org/staysafe. To prevent unintended operation when not using your fireplace for an extended period of time (summer months, vacations, trips, etc): • Remove batteries from remote controls. • Turn off wall controls. • Unplug 3 volt adapter plug and remove batteries on IPI models.

This appliance has been supplied with an integral barrier to prevent direct contact with the fixed glass panel. DO NOT operate the appliance with the barrier removed. Contact your dealer or Hearth & Home Technologies if the barrier is not present or help is needed to properly install one.

If you expect that small children or vulnerable adults may come into contact with this fireplace, the following precautions are recommended: • Install a physical barrier such as: - A decorative firescreen.

B. Your Fireplace WARNING! DO NOT operate fireplace before reading and understanding operating instructions. Failure to operate fireplace according to operating instructions could cause fire or injury.

- Adjustable safety gate. • Install a switch lock or a wall/remote control with child protection lockout feature.

DECORATIVE DOORS (NOT SHOWN) SECTION 2.D.

FIXED GLASS ASSEMBLY (NOT SHOWN) SECTION 14G.

MANTEL FAN KIT SECTION 2.C HEARTH

Figure 2.1 General Operating Parts Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

9


C. Fan Kit (optional)

F. Fixed Glass Assembly

If desired, a fan kit may be added. Contact your dealer to order the correct fan kit.

See Section 14.G.

D. Decorative Doors and Fronts WARNING! Risk of Fire! Install ONLY doors or fronts approved by Hearth & Home Technologies. Unapproved doors or fronts may cause fireplace to overheat. This fireplace has been supplied with an integral barrier to prevent direct contact with the fixed glass panel. DO NOT operate the fireplace with the barrier removed. Contact your dealer or Hearth & Home Technologies if the barrier is not present or help is needed to properly install one. For more information refer to the instructions supplied with your decorative door or front.

G. Remote Controls, Wall Controls and Wall Switches Follow the instructions supplied with the control installed to operate your fireplace: For safety: • Install a switch lock or a wall/remote control with child protection lockout feature. • Keep remote controls out of reach of children. See your dealer if you have questions.

H. Before Lighting Fireplace Before operating this fireplace for the first time, have a qualified service technician: • Verify all shipping materials have been removed from inside and/or underneath the firebox.

E. Clear Space WARNING! DO NOT place combustible objects in front of the fireplace or block louvers. High temperatures may start a fire. See Figure 2.2.

• Review proper placement of logs, ember material and/or other decorative materials.

Avoid placing candles and other heat-sensitive objects on mantel or hearth. Heat may damage these objects.

• Check the air shutter adjustment.

• Check the wiring. • Ensure that there are no gas leaks. • Ensure that the glass is sealed and in the proper position and that the integral barrier is in place. WARNING! Risk of Fire or Asphyxiation! DO NOT operate fireplace with fixed glass assembly removed.

IN CLE FR AR ON S T O PAC FF E3 IR EP FT. LA C

E

Figure 2.2 Clear Space

10

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


I. Lighting Instructions (IPI) The IPI system may be operated with two D-cell batteries. When using batteries, unplug the transformer. To prolong battery life, remove them when using the transformer.

FOR YOUR SAFETY READ BEFORE LIGHTING

LIGHTING INSTRUCTIONS (IPI)

WARNING: If you do not follow these instructions exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury or loss of life.

1. This appliance is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner. DO NOT try to light the burner by hand.

A. This appliance is equipped with an intermittent pilot ignition (IPI) device which automatically lights the burner. DO NOT try to light the burner by hand.

• Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor’s phone. Follow the gas supplier’s instructions.

B. BEFORE LIGHTING, smell all around the appliance area for gas. Be sure to smell next to the floor because some gas is heavier than air and will settle on the floor.

C. DO NOT use this appliance if any part has been under water. Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of the control system and any gas control which has been under water.

WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS • DO NOT try to light any appliance.

• If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department.

Equipped with wall switch: Turn ON/OFF switch to ON.

WARNING:

CAUTION:

DO NOT CONNECT LINE VOLTAGE (110/120 VAC OR 220/240 VAC) TO THE CONTROL VALVE.

Hot while in operation. DO NOT touch. Keep children, clothing, furniture, gasoline and other liquids having flammable vapors away.

This appliance needs fresh air for safe operation and must be installed so there are provisions for adequate combustion and ventilation air. If not installed, operated, and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, this product could expose you to substances in fuel or fuel combustion which are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm. Keep burner and control compartment clean. See installation and operating instructions accompanying appliance.

2. Wait five (5) minutes to clear out any gas. Then smell for gas, including near the floor. If you smell gas, STOP! Follow “B” in the Safety Information located on the left side of this label. If you do not smell gas, go to next step. 3. To light the burner:

• DO NOT touch any electric switch; do not use any phone in your building.

Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service or maintenance can cause injury or property damage. Refer to the owner’s information manual provided with this appliance.

GAS VALVE

DO NOT operate the appliance with fixed glass assembly removed, cracked or broken. Replacement of the fixed glass assembly should be done by a licensed or qualified service person.

NOT FOR USE WITH SOLID FUEL For use with natural gas and propane. A conversion kit, as supplied by the manufacturer, shall be used to convert this appliance to the alternate fuel.

Equipped with remote or wall control: Press ON or FLAME button. Equipped with thermostat: Set temperature to desired setting. 4. If the appliance does not light after three tries, call your service technician or gas supplier.

TO TURN OFF GAS TO APPLIANCE 1. Equipped with wall switch: Turn ON/OFF switch to OFF. Equipped with remote or wall control: Press OFF button. Equipped with thermostat: Set temperature to lowest setting. 2. Service technician should turn off electric power to the control when performing service.

Also Certified for Installation in a Bedroom or a Bedsitting Room.

593-913G

For assistance or additional information, consult a qualified installer, service agency or the gas supplier.

For additional information on operating your Hearth & Home Technologies fireplace, please refer to www.fireplaces.com.

Final inspection by Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

11


J. After Fireplace is Lit Initial Break-in Procedure • The fireplace should be run three to four hours continuously on high. • Turn the fireplace off and allow it to completely cool. • Remove fixed glass assembly. See Section 14.G. • Clean fixed glass assembly. See Section 3. • Replace the fixed glass assembly and run continuously on high an additional 12 hours. This cures the materials used to manufacture the fireplace. NOTICE! Open windows for air circulation during fireplace break-in. • Some people may be sensitive to smoke and odors. • Smoke detectors may activate.

K. Frequently Asked Questions ISSUE

SOLUTIONS

Condensation on the glass

This is a result of gas combustion and temperature variations. As the fireplace warms, this condensation will disappear.

Blue flames

This is a result of normal operation and the flames will begin to yellow as the fireplace is allowed to burn for 20 to 40 minutes.

Odor from fireplace

When first operated, this fireplace may release an odor for the first several hours. This is caused by the curing of the paint and the burning off of any oils remaining from manufacturing. Odor may also be released from finishing materials and adhesives used around the fireplace. This is a normal result of the curing process of the paint and logs. Glass should be cleaned within 3 to 4 hours of initial burning to remove deposits left by oils from the manufacturing process. A non-abrasive cleaner such as gas fireplace glass cleaner may be necessary. See your dealer.

Film on the glass

Metallic noise

Noise is caused by metal expanding and contracting as it heats up and cools down, similar to the sound produced by a furnace or heating duct. This noise does not affect the operation or longevity of the fireplace.

Is it normal to see the pilot flame burn continually?

In an Intellifire ignition system it is normal to see the pilot flame, but it should turn off when ON/ OFF is turned off.

12

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


3

Maintenance and Service

Any safety screen or guard removed for servicing must be replaced prior to operating the fireplace.

Doors, Surrounds, Fronts Frequency: Annually

When properly maintained, your fireplace will give you many years of trouble-free service. We recommend annual service by a qualified service technician.

By: Homeowner

A. Maintenance Tasks-Homeowner

• Inspect for scratches, dents or other damage and repair as necessary.

Installation and repair should be done by a qualified service technician only. The fireplace should be inspected before use and at least annually by a professional service person.

The following tasks may be performed annually by the homeowner. If you are uncomfortable performing any of the listed tasks, please call your dealer for a service appointment. More frequent cleaning may be required due to lint from carpeting or other factors. Control compartment, burner and circulating air passageway of the fireplace must be kept clean. CAUTION! Risk of Burns! The fireplace should be turned off and cooled before servicing.

Glass Cleaning

Tools needed: Protective gloves, stable work surface • Assess condition of screen and replace as necessary.

• Check that louvers are not blocked. • Vacuum and dust surfaces.

Remote Control Frequency: Seasonally By: Homeowner Tools needed: Replacement batteries and remote control instructions. • Locate remote control transmitter and receiver. • Verify operation of remote. Refer to remote control operation instructions for proper calibration and setup procedure.

Frequency: Seasonally

• Place batteries as needed in remote transmitters and battery-powered receivers.

By: Homeowner

• Place remote control out of reach of children.

Tools Needed: Protective gloves, glass cleaner, drop cloth and a stable work surface.

If not using your fireplace for an extended period of time (summer months, vacations/trips, etc), to prevent unintended operation:

CAUTION! Handle fixed glass assembly with care. Glass is breakable. • Avoid striking, scratching or slamming glass • Avoid abrasive cleaners • DO NOT clean glass while it is hot • Prepare a work area large enough to accommodate fixed glass assembly and door frame by placing a drop cloth on a flat, stable surface. Note: Fixed glass assembly and gasketing may have residue that can stain carpeting or floor surfaces. • Remove door or decorative front from fireplace and set aside on work surface. • See Section 14.G for instructions to remove fixed glass assembly. • Clean glass with a non-abrasive commercially available cleaner. - Light deposits: Use a soft cloth with soap and water - Heavy deposits: Use commercial fireplace glass cleaner (consult with your dealer)

• Remove batteries from remote controls. • Unplug 3 volt adapter plug on IPI models.

Venting Frequency: Seasonally By: Homeowner Tools needed: Protective gloves and safety glasses. • Inspect venting and termination cap for blockage or obstruction such plants, bird nests, leaves, snow, debris, etc. • Verify termination cap clearance to subsequent construction (building additions, decks, fences, or sheds). See Section 6. • Inspect for corrosion or separation. • Verify weather stripping, sealing and flashing remains intact. • Inspect draft shield to verify it is not damaged or missing.

• Carefully set fixed glass assembly in place on fireplace. Hold glass in place with one hand and secure glass latches with the other hand. • Reinstall door or decorative front. Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

13


B. Maintenance Tasks-Qualified Service Technician The following tasks must be performed by a qualified service technician.

Gasket Seal and Glass Assembly Inspection Frequency: Annually By: Qualified Service Technician Tools needed: Protective gloves, drop cloth and a stable work surface. • Inspect gasket seal and its condition. • Inspect fixed glass assembly for scratches and nicks that can lead to breakage when exposed to heat. • Confirm there is no damage to glass or glass frame. Replace as necessary. • Verify that fixed glass assembly is properly retained and attachment components are intact and not damaged. Replace as necessary.

Logs Frequency: Annually By: Qualified Service Technician Tools needed: Protective gloves. • Inspect for damaged or missing logs. Replace as necessary. Refer to Section 14 for log placement instructions. • Verify correct log placement and no flame impingement causing sooting. Correct as necessary.

Firebox Frequency: Annually By: Qualified Service Technician Tools needed: Protective gloves, sandpaper, steel wool, cloths, mineral spirits, primer and touch-up paint.

By: Qualified Service Technician Tools needed: Protective gloves, vacuum cleaner, whisk broom, flashlight, voltmeter, indexed drill bit set, and a manometer. • Verify burner is properly secured and aligned with pilot or igniter. • Clean off burner top, inspect for plugged ports, corrosion or deterioration. Replace burner if necessary. • Replace ember materials with new dime-size pieces. DO NOT block ports or obstruct lighting paths. Refer to Section 14 for proper ember placement. • Verify batteries have been removed from battery backup IPI systems to prevent premature battery failure or leaking. • Check for smooth lighting and ignition carryover to all ports. Verify that there is no ignition delay. • Inspect for lifting or other flame problems. • Verify air shutter setting is correct. See Section 14 for required air shutter setting. Verify air shutter is clear of dust and debris. • Inspect orifice for soot, dirt and corrosion. Verify orifice size is correct. See Service Parts List for proper orifice sizing. • Verify manifold and inlet pressures. Adjust regulator as required. • Inspect pilot flame pattern and strength. See Figure 3.1 and 3.2 for proper pilot flame pattern. Clean or replace orifice spud as necessary. • Inspect thermocouple/thermopile or IPI flame sensing rod for soot, corrosion and deterioration. Polish with fine steel wool or replace as required. • Verify that there is not a short in flame sense circuit by checking continuity between pilot hood and flame sensing rod. Replace pilot as necessary. (IPI only)

• Inspect for paint condition, warped surfaces, corrosion or perforation. Sand and repaint as necessary. • Replace fireplace if firebox has been perforated.

Control Compartment and Firebox Top Frequency: Annually By: Qualified Service Technician Tools needed: Protective gloves, vacuum cleaner, dust cloths • Vacuum and wipe out dust, cobwebs, debris or pet hair. Use caution when cleaning these areas. Screw tips that have penetrated the sheet metal are sharp and should be avoided. • Remove all foreign objects. • Verify unobstructed air circulation.

Burner Ignition and Operation Frequency: Annually 14

Figure 3.1 IPI Pilot Flame Patterns Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


4

Getting Started

Installer Guide

A. Typical Appliance System NOTICE: Illustrations and photos reflect typical installations and are for design purposes only. Illustrations/diagrams are not drawn to scale. Actual product may vary from pictures in manual

HORIZONTAL TERMINATION CAP (SECTION 10.L )

Note: Dual venting configurations ARE NOT allowed. Appliance MUST be vented EITHER ver tically OR horizontally. VERTICAL TERMINATION CAP (SECTION 10.I)

NON-COMBUSTIBLE ROOF FLASHING MAINTAINS MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND PIPE (SECTION 10.G) STORM COLLAR (SECTION 10.H)

VENT PIPE PENETRATES ROOF PREFERABLY WITHOUT AFFECTING ROOF RAFTERS (SECTION 8.C)

VENT PIPE (SECTIONS 7 and 8)

ATTIC INSULATION SHIELD (NOT SHOWN) MUST BE USED HERE TO KEEP INSULATION AWAY FROM VENT PIPE IF ATTIC IS INSULATED (SECTION 8.D)

CEILING FIRESTOP ON FLOOR OF ATTIC (SECTION 8.C)

FRAMING/HEADER (SECTION 5.B)

FRAMING HEADED OFF IN CEILING JOISTS (SECTION 8.C)

OPTIONAL WALL SWITCH MANTEL AND MANTEL LEG (SECTION 5.E, 13.A) SURROUND

HEARTH EXTENSION

GAS LINE (SECTION 11)

Figure 4.1 Typical System Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

15


B. Design and Installation Considerations

D. Inspect Appliance and Components

Hearth & Home Technologies direct vent gas appliances are designed to operate with all combustion air siphoned from outside of the building and all exhaust gases expelled to the outside. No additional outside air source is required.

• Carefully remove the appliance and components from the packaging.

Installation MUST comply with local, regional, state and national codes and regulations. Consult insurance carrier, local building inspector, fire officials or authorities having jurisdiction over restrictions, installation inspection and permits. Before installing, determine the following: • Where the appliance is to be installed. • The vent system configuration to be used. • Gas supply piping.

• The vent system components and decorative doors and fronts may be shipped in separate packages. • If packaged separately, the log set and appliance grate must be installed. • Report to your dealer any parts damaged in shipment, particularly the condition of the glass. • Read all of the instructions before starting the installation. Follow these instructions carefully during the installation to ensure maximum safety and benefit. WARNING! Risk of Fire or Explosion! Damaged parts could impair safe operation. DO NOT install damaged, incomplete or substitute components. Keep appliance dry.

• Electrical wiring requirements. • Framing and finishing details. • Whether optional accessories—devices such as a fan, wall switch, or remote control—are desired. Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service or maintenance can cause injury or property damage. For assistance or additional information, consult a qualified service technician, service agency or your dealer.

C. Tools and Supplies Needed Before beginning the installation be sure that the following tools and building supplies are available. Tape measure Framing material Pliers Non-corrosive leak check solution Hammer Phillips screwdriver Gloves Framing square Voltmeter Electric drill and bits (1/4 in.) Plumb line Safety glasses Level Reciprocating saw Manometer Flat blade screwdriver 1/2 - 3/4 in. length, #6 or #8 Self-drilling screws Caulking material (300ºF minimum continuous exposure rating) One 1/4 in. female connection (for optional fan).

16

Hearth & Home Technologies disclaims any responsibility for, and the warranty will be voided by, the following actions: • Installation and use of any damaged appliance or vent system component. • Modification of the appliance or vent system. • Installation other than as instructed by Hearth & Home Technologies. • Improper positioning of the gas logs or the glass door. • Installation and/or use of any component part not approved by Hearth & Home Technologies. Any such action may cause a fire hazard.

WARNING! Risk of Fire, Explosion or Electric Shock! DO NOT use this appliance if any part has been under water. Call a qualified service technician to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of the control system and/or gas control which has been under water.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


5

Framing and Clearances NOTICE: Illustrations reflect typical installations and are FOR DESIGN PURPOSES ONLY. Illustrations/diagrams are not drawn to scale. Actual installation may vary due to individual design preference.

A. Selecting Appliance Location When selecting a location for the appliance it is important to consider the required clearances to walls (see Figure 5.1). WARNING! Risk of Fire or Burns! Provide adequate clearance around air openings and for service access. Due to high temperatures, the appliance should be located out of traffic and away from furniture and draperies.

A

N E

L F

D

F

A

A

C

C

K

H

B

J

G

I

G

J M

Models DV3732SBI DV3732SBIL

A

B

C

D

E Min.

See Section 5.D for Alcove Installation

1 25

in.

42

37

59-1/2

mm

1067

940

1511

F Min.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

1/2

44

62-1/4

16-1/4

48-1/2

68-3/4

15-1/16

7-1/2

7-1/8

13

1117

1581

413

1232

1746

383

191

181

Figure 5.1 Appliance Locations

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

17


of 300ºF continuous exposure rating to seal gaps. Gas line holes and other openings should be caulked with caulk with a minimum of 300ºF continuous exposure rating or stuffed with unfaced insulation. If the appliance is being installed on a cement surface, a layer of plywood may be placed underneath to prevent conducting cold up into the room.

B. Constructing the Appliance Chase A chase is a vertical box-like structure built to enclose the gas appliance and/or its vent system. In cooler climates the vent should enclosed inside the chase. NOTICE: Treatment of ceiling firestops and wall shield firestops and construction of the chase may vary with the type of building. These instructions are not substitutes for the requirements of local building codes. Therefore, you MUST check local building codes to determine the requirements to these steps.

C. Clearances NOTICE: Install appliance on hard metal or wood surfaces extending full width and depth. DO NOT install directly on carpeting, vinyl, tile or any combustible material other than wood.

Chases should be constructed in the manner of all outside walls of the home to prevent cold air drafting problems. The chase should not break the outside building envelope in any manner.

WARNING! Risk of Fire! Maintain specified air space clearances to appliance and vent pipe:

Walls, ceiling, base plate and cantilever floor of the chase should be insulated. Vapor and air infiltration barriers should be installed in the chase as per regional codes for the rest of the home. Additionally, in regions where cold air infiltration may be an issue, the inside surfaces may be sheetrocked and taped for maximum air tightness.

• Insulation and other materials must be secured to prevent accidental contact. • The chase must be properly blocked to prevent blown insulation or other combustibles from entering and making contact with fireplace or chimney. • Failure to maintain airspace may cause overheating and a fire.

To further prevent drafts, the wall shield and ceiling firestops should be caulked with caulk with a minimum

FROM TOP OF HOOD TO CEILING

A

E

F

B

J G H C D

I

MINIMUM FRAMING DIMENSIONS* A

C

D

E

F

G

I

J

SLP Pipe

**DVP SLP Pipe Pipe Rough Rough Clearance Combustible Combustible Behind Sides of Front of Rough Rough Opening Rough Rough Opening to Ceiling Floor Flooring Appliance Appliance Appliance (Height) (Width) Opening Opening Opening Opening (Width) (Width) (Depth) (Depth)

in.

10

8-5/8

34-3/4

16-1/4

16-1/4

37

32

0

0

1/2

1/2

36

mm

254

219

876

413

413

940

813

0

0

13

13

915

* Adjust framing dimensions for interior sheathing (such as sheetrock) C** Add 12 inches for rear venting with one 90º elbow. Figure 5.2 Clearances to Combustibles

18

H

DVP Pipe

Models

DV3732SBI DV3732SBIL

B

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


D. Mantel and Wall Projections WARNING! Risk of Fire! Comply with all minimum clearances to combustibles as specified. Framing or finishing material closer than the minimums listed must be constructed entirely of noncombustible materials (i.e., steel studs, concrete board, etc).

1/2 IN. MINIMUM

TOP VIEW All measurements are in inches.

CEILING

2-7/8 IN. MINIMUM

3 FT. MAXIMUM

12 11

Note: Clearance from opening to perpendicular wall.

10 9 8 32

7 6 5 4 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Figure 5.5 Clearances to Mantel Legs or Wall Projections (Acceptable on both sides of opening)

13

TOP OF HOOD OR FIREPLACE OPENING

3 IN. MINIMUM

Figure 5.3 Clearances to mantels or other combustibles above appliance

5-3/8 IN. MINIMUM 1/2 in. SHEETROCK OR COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL

3-1/2 in.

UNLIMITED

Note: Clearance from opening to perpendicular wall. Figure 5.6 Wall Projection (Acceptable on one side of opening)

1/2 in.

NON-COMBUSTIBLE ZONE

Figure 5.4 Non-Combustible Zone

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

19


6

Termination Locations

A. Vent Termination Minimum Clearances

WARNING Fire Risk. Maintain vent clearance to combustibles as specified. • DO NOT pack air space with insulation or other materials. Failure to keep insulation or other materials away from vent pipe may cause overheating and fire.

A

B

6 in. (minimum) up to 20 in. 152 mm/508 mm

18 in. minimum 457 mm

20 in. and over

0 in. minimum

Gas, Wood or Fuel Oil Termination Cap

B A*

HORIZONTAL OVERHANG

2 FT. MIN.

20 INCHES MIN.

Gas Termination Cap **

VERTICAL WALL

LOWEST DISCHARGE OPENING GAS DIRECT VENT TERMINATION CAP X 12 ROOF PITCH IS X/ 12 H (MIN.) - MINIMUM HEIGHT FROM ROOF TO LOWEST DISCHARGE OPENING

*

**

If using decorative cap cover(s), this distance may need to be increased. Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the decorative cap cover. In a staggered installation with both gas and wood or fuel oil terminations, the wood or fuel oil termination cap must be higher than the gas termination cap.

Figure 6.2 Staggered Termination Caps

Roof Pitch H (Min.) Ft. Flat to 6/12...........................................................1.0* Over 6/12 to 7/12 .................................................1.25* Over 7/12 to 8/12 .................................................1.5* Over 8/12 to 9/12 .................................................2.0* Over 9/12 to 10/12 ...............................................2.5 Over 10/12 to 11/12 .............................................3.25 Over 11/12 to 12/12 .............................................4.0 Over 12/12 to 14/12 .............................................5.0 Over 14/12 to 16/12 .............................................6.0 Over 16/12 to 18/12 .............................................7.0 Over 18/12 to 20/12 .............................................7.5 Over 20/12 to 21/12 .............................................8.0 * 3 foot minimum in snow regions Figure 6.1 Minimum Height From Roof To Lowest Discharge Opening

20

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


O N P R

F

C V

Q

B

J

H or i

B

V

D

B

V V

V H V

X G M

V A

V

E

H

V V

V

L A

V

V = VENT TERMINAL X = AIR SUPPLY INLET

K

B

C

= 6 inches...................clearance to outside corner

E

= 6 inches...................clearance to inside corner

Covered Alcove Applications (Spaces open only on one side and with an overhang)

L

= 12 inches................clearance above electrical service

Location of the vent termination must not interfere with access to the electrical service.

M

= 18 inches ....................clearance under veranda, porch, deck, balcony or overhang 42 inches ................vinyl or composite overhang Permitted when veranda, porch, deck or balcony is fully open on a minimum of 2 sides beneath the floor. Figure 6.3 Minimum Clearances for Termination

= 6 inches ........... non-vinyl sidewalls

O

= 18 inches ......... non-vinyl soffit and overhang

P

= 8 ft.

42 inches ......... vinyl soffit and overhang

= 3 ft. (Canada) ..........not to be installed above a gas meter/regulator assembly within 3 feet horizontally from the center-line of the regulator G = 3 ft ...........................clearance to gas service regulator vent outlet H = 12 inches.................clearance to non-mechanical (unpowered) air supply inlet, combustion air inlet or direct-vent termination i = 3 ft. (U.S.A.) 6 ft. (Canada) ...........clearance to a mechanical (powered) air supply inlet All mechanical air intakes within 10 feet of a termination cap must be a minimum of 3 feet below termination. J = 7 ft. ......................... On public property: clearance above paved sidewalk or a paved driveway. A vent shall not terminate directly above a sidewalk or paved driveway which is located between two single family dwellings and serves both dwellings.

= 6 inches.................clearance from sides of electrical service

N

12 inches ......... vinyl sidewalls

F

K

V

V

= 12 inches.................clearances above grade, veranda, porch, deck or balcony = 12 inches.................clearance to window or door that may be opened, or to permanently closed window = 18 inches.................clearance below unventilated soffit 18 inches.................clearance below ventilated soffit 30 inches .................clearance below vinyl soffits and electrical service

D

K

C

= AREA WHERE TERMINAL IS NOT PERMITTED A

Electrical Service

QMIN

RMAX

1 cap

3 feet

2 x Q ACTUAL

2 caps

6 feet

1 x Q ACTUAL

3 caps

9 feet

2/3 x Q ACTUAL

4 caps

12 feet

1/2 x Q ACTUAL

QMIN = # termination caps x 3

RMAX = (2 / # termination caps) x QACTUAL

Measure vertical clearances from this surface.

Measure horizontal clearances from this surface.

CAUTION! Risk of Burns! Termination caps are HOT, consider proximity to doors, traffic areas or where people may pass or gather (sidewalk, deck, patio, etc.). Listed cap shields available. Contact your dealer. •

Local codes or regulations may require different clearances.

Vent system termination is NOT permitted in screened porches.

Vent system termination is permitted in porch areas with two or more sides open.

Hearth & Home Technologies assumes no responsibility for the improper performance of the appliance when the venting system does not meet these requirements. Vinyl protection kits are suggested for use with vinyl siding.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

21


7

Vent Information and Diagrams

A. Approved Pipe This appliance is approved for use with Hearth & Home Technologies DVP and/or SLP venting systems. Refer to Section 16B for vent component information.

8-1/2 in.

Vertical in .

The pipe is tested to be run inside an enclosed wall. There is no requirement for inspection openings at each joint within the wall.

12

DO NOT mix pipe, fittings or joining methods from different manufacturers.

WARNING! Risk of Fire or Asphyxiation. This appliance requires a separate vent. DO NOT vent to a pipe serving a separate solid fuel burning appliance.

8-1/2 in.

B. Vent Table Key The abbreviations listed in this vent table key are used in the vent diagrams. Symbol

Horizontal

Description Figure 7.1

V1

First section (closest to appliance) of vertical length

V2

Second section of vertical length

D. Measuring Standards

H1

First section (closest to appliance) of horizontal length

H2

Subsequent sections of horizontal length

Vertical and horizontal measurements listed in the vent diagrams were made using the following standards. • Pipe measurements are shown using the effective length of pipe (see Figure 7.2).

C. Use of Elbows Diagonal runs have both vertical and horizontal vent aspects when calculating the effects. Use the rise for the vertical aspect and the run for the horizontal aspect (see Figure 7.1). Two 45º elbows may be used in place of one 90º elbow. On 45º runs, one foot of diagonal is equal to 8-1/2 in. (216 mm) horizontal run and 8-1/2 in. (216 mm) vertical run. A length of straight pipe is allowed between two 45º elbows (see Figure 7.1).

• Horizontal terminations are measured to the outside mounting surface (flange of termination cap) (see Figure 6.3). • Vertical terminations are measured to bottom of termination cap. • Horizontal pipe installed level with no rise.

Pipe

Effective Height/Length

Inches

Millimeters

DVP4

4

102

DVP6

6

152

DVP12

12

305

DVP24

24

610

DVP36

36

914

DVP48

48

1219

DVP6A

3 to 6

76 to 152

DVP12A

3 to 12

76 to 305

Figure 7.2 DVP Pipe Effective Length

22

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

Effective Length


E. Use of Flex Vent The flex vent must be supported with the spacing between support intervals not exceeding 4 feet, with no more than ½ inch sag between supports. A support is required at each change in venting direction, and in any location where it is necessary to maintain the necessary clearance to combustibles. A simple “up and out” installation (Figure 7.3) requires only enough support to maintain the necessary clearance to combustibles. However, the vent attachment point and the firestop location are considered to be supports.

3 in. CLEARANCE

TERMINATION CAP

FLEX-VENT 1 in. CLEARANCE

Figure 7.3

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

23


F. Vent Diagrams 1. Top Vent - Horizontal Termination One Elbow V1 Minimum** Note: Use SLP Series components only.

WARNING** Fire Risk. • When using SLP-HRC-SS and SLP-HRC-ZC-SS termination caps on top vented fireplaces, a one foot minimum vertical vent section is required before installing first elbow. • When using DVP-TB1 termination cap on top vented fireplaces, a three foot minimum vertical vent section is required before installing first elbow.

H1 Maximum

90 Elbow Only**

2 ft.

610 mm

1/2 ft.**

152 mm

2 ft.

610 mm

1-1/2 ft.** 457 mm

3 ft.

914 mm

2-1/2 ft.** 762 mm

5 ft.

1.5 m

3-1/2 ft.

1.1 m

7 ft.

2.1 m

4-1/2 ft.

1.4 m

15 ft.

4.6 m

H1 MAX. =15 ft. (4.6 m) V1 + H1 MAX. = 40 ft. (12.2 m) ** See Warning.

V1 H1

Note: There MUST be a 25% reduction in total H when using flex vent except when using the simple up and out installation (see Figure 7.3).

Figure 7.4 24

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


1. Top Vent - Horizontal Termination - (continued) V1 Minimum**

Two Elbows

90 Elbow Only** Note: Use SLP Series components only.

Note: There MUST be a 25% reduction in total H when using flex vent except when using the simple up and out installation (see Figure 7.3).

H1 + H2 Maximum 1/2 ft.

152 mm

1/2 ft.**

152 mm

1 ft.

305 mm

1-1/2 ft.**

457 mm

2 ft.

610 mm

2-1/2 ft.**

762 mm

4 ft.

1.2 m

3-1/2 ft.

1.1 m

6 ft.

1.8 m

4-1/2 ft.

1.4 m

14 ft.

4.3 m

H1 + H2 MAX. =14 ft. (4.3 m) V1 + H1 + H2 MAX. = 40 ft. (12.2 m) **See Warning Below.

V1

H2

H1

INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY

WARNING** Fire Risk. • When using SLP-HRC-SS and SLP-HRC-ZC-SS termination caps on top vented fireplaces, a one foot minimum vertical vent section is required before installing first elbow. • When using DVP-TB1 termination cap on top vented fireplaces, a three foot minimum vertical vent section is required before installing first elbow.

Figure 7.5 Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

25


1. Top Vent - Horizontal Termination - (continued) Three Elbows

Note: There MUST be a 25% reduction in total H when using flex vent except when using the simple up and out installation (see Figure 7.3).

V1 Minimum**

H1 Maximum

H1 + H2 Maximum

90 Elbow Only**

1-1/2 ft. 457 mm

2 ft.

610 mm

1/2 ft.** 152 mm 1-1/2 ft. 457 mm

4 ft.

1.2 m

1-1/2 ft. 457 mm

3 ft.

914 mm

6 ft.

1.8 m

2-1/2 ft. 762 mm

5 ft.

1.5 m

10 ft.

3.0 m

3-1/2 ft.

1.1 m

7 ft.

2.1 m

14 ft.

4.3 m

4-1/2 ft.

1.4 m

14 ft.

4.3 m

14 ft.

4.3 m

H1 + H2 MAX. =14 ft. (4.3 m) V1 + V2 + H1 + H2 MAX. = 40 ft. (12.2 m) ** See Warning Below.

H2 V2

H1

Note: Use SLP Series components only.

WARNING** Fire Risk. • When using SLP-HRC-SS and SLP-HRC-ZCSS termination caps on top vented fireplaces, a one foot minimum vertical vent section is required before installing first elbow.

Figure 7.6 26

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

V1


2. Top Vent - Vertical Termination Top Vent - Vertical Termination

Exhaust restrictor Instructions

No Elbows

1. Install the exhaust restrictor over the center of the exhaust outlet in the firebox (see Figure 7.8).

V1 = 60 ft. Max. (18.3 m) Note: If installing a vertical vent/termination off the top of the appliance, the optional vertical termination baffle may be needed.

2. Center the exhaust restrictor in the open end of the exhaust outlet and secure through the slots on the exhaust restrictor with the 2-1/4 in. self tapping screws provided in the appliance manual bag.

EXHAUST BAFFLE

To access the exhaust openings, remove the exhaust baffle. To remove exhaust baffle, remove the two wing nuts.

Note: Use SLP Series components only. CAP

Top Vent Application

V1

Exhaust restrictor

Rear Vent Application

Exhaust restrictor

Note: Be sure to reinstall the exhaust baffle after exhaust restrictor installation.

Figure 7.7

Exhaust restrictors are recommended for these vertically terminated products which have excessive draft. Exhaust restrictors will compensate for high draft, and restore visual flame height. If the vent configuration has a total vertical of 15-60 feet, an exhaust restrictor may be needed. The exhaust restrictor can be located in the appliance manual bag.

Figure 7.8

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

27


2. Top Vent - Vertical Termination - (continued) V1 Minimum

Two Elbows

90 Elbow Only

V2

H1 Maximum 1-1/2 ft.

457 mm

1/2 ft.

152 mm

2 ft.

610 mm

1-1/2 ft.

457 mm

3 ft.

914 mm

2-1/2 ft.

762 mm

5 ft.

1.5 m

3-1/2 ft.

1.1 m

7 ft.

2.1 m

4-1/2 ft.

1.4 m

15 ft.

4.6 m

H1 MAX. =15 ft. (4.6 m) V1 + V2 + H1 MAX. = 40 ft. (12.2 m)

V1

H1

Note: There MUST be a 25% reduction in total H when using flex vent except when using the simple up and out installation (see Figure 7.3).

Note: Use SLP Series components only.

Figure 7.9

V1 Minimum 90 Elbow Only

Three Elbows

V2

H1 + H2 Maximum 1/2 ft.

152 mm

1/2 ft.

152 mm

1 ft.

305 mm

1-1/2 ft.

457 mm

2 ft.

610 mm

2-1/2 ft.

762 mm

4 ft.

1.2 m

3-1/2 ft.

1.1 m

6 ft.

1.8 m

4-1/2 ft.

1.4 m

14 ft.

4.3 m

H1 + H2 MAX. =14 ft. (4.3 m) V1 + V2 + H1 + H2 MAX. = 40 ft. (12.2 m)

Note: Use SLP Series components only. H1

H2

Note: There MUST be a 25% reduction in total H when using flex vent except when using the simple up and out installation (see Figure 7.3).

V1

INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY

Figure 7.10 28

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


2. Top Vent - Vertical Termination - (continued) Four 90º Elbows

V1 MIN. 1-1/2 ft.

457 mm

Note: Use SLP Series components only.

H1 MAX. 4 ft.

V2 MIN.

1.2 m

4 ft.

1.2 m

H2 MAX. 4 ft.

1.2 m

V3 MIN. 3-1/2 ft.

1.0 m

V1 + V2 + V3 + H1 + H2 Maximum= 40 ft. (12.2 m)

Note: There MUST be a 25% reduction in total H when using flex vent except when using the simple up and out installation (see Figure 7.3).

V3

V2 H2

H1

V1

Figure 7.11 Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

29


3. Rear Vent - Horizontal Termination No Elbows Note: Use DVP Series components only.

H1 = 24 in. Max. (610 mm)

H1

Figure 7.12

Rear Vent - Horizontal Termination One 45º Elbow

H1 = 9 in. (229 mm) Maximum

Note: Use DVP Series components only.

H1

Figure 7.13

30

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


3. Rear Vent - Horizontal Termination - (continued) H1 MAX.

Two Elbows

Note: Use DVP Series components only.

V1 MIN.

1-1/2 ft.

457 mm

Back to back elbows

3 ft.

914 mm

1 ft.

5 ft.

1.5 m

3 ft.

7 ft.

2.1 m

5 ft.

H2 MAX.

H1 + H2 MAX.

1 ft.

305 mm 2-1/2 ft. 762 mm

305 mm

3 ft.

914 mm

6 ft.

1.8 m

914 mm

5 ft.

1.5 m

10 ft.

3.0 m

1.5 m

7 ft.

2.1 m

14 ft.

4.3 m

H1 MAX. = 7 ft. (2.1 m) H1 + H2 MAX. = 14 ft. (4.3 m) V1 + H1 + H2 MAX. = 40 ft. (12.2 m)

V1

H2

H1

Figure 7.14

Note: Use DVP Series components only.

Three Elbows

INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY

H1 MAX.

V1 MIN.

1-1/2 ft. 457 mm

Back to back elbows

H2 + H3 MAX.

H1 + H2+ H3 MAX.

1 ft.

305 mm

2-1/2 ft.

762 mm

3-1/2 ft.

1.1 m

1 ft.

305 mm

2 ft.

610 mm

5-1/2 ft.

1.7 m

5-1/2 ft.

1.7 m

2 ft.

610 mm

4 ft.

1.2 m

9-1/2 ft.

2.9 m

7-1/2 ft.

2.3 m

3 ft.

914 mm

6 ft.

1.8 m

13-1/2 ft.

4.1 m

H1 MAX. = 7-1/2 ft. (2.3 m) H1 + H2+ H3 MAX. = 13-1/2 ft. (4.1 m) V1 + H1 + H2+ H3 MAX. = 40 ft. (12.2 m)

H3

H2

V1

H1 Figure 7.15

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

31


4. Rear Vent - Vertical Termination One Elbow V1 MIN.

H1 MAX.

1 ft.

305 mm

3-1/2 ft.

1.1 m

2 ft.

610 mm

5-1/2 ft.

1.7 m

3 ft.

914 mm

7-1/2 ft.

2.3 m

H MAX. = 7-1/2 ft. (2.3 m) V1 + H1 MAX. = 40 ft. (12.2 m)

Note: Use DVP Series components only.

V1

H1

Figure 7.16

Note: Use DVP Series components only.

Two Elbows

H1 + H2 MAX Back to back elbows

152 mm

2-1/2 ft.

762 mm

1 ft.

305 mm

4-1/2 ft.

1.4 m

2 ft.

610 mm

6-1/2 ft.

2.0 m

3 ft.

914 mm

H MAX. = 6-1/2 ft. (2 m) V + H+ H1 MAX. = 40 ft. (12.2 m)

V1

INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY

H1

H2 Figure 7.17

32

V1 MIN. 1/2 ft.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


4. Rear Vent - Vertical Termination - (continued) Three elbows V1 MIN. Back to back elbows

H1 MAX.

H2 MAX.

H1 + H2 MAX.

1-1/2 ft.

457 mm

1 ft.

305 mm

2-1/2 ft.

762 mm

1 ft.

305 mm

3-1/2 ft.

1.1 m

3 ft.

914 mm

6-1/2 ft.

2.0 m

2 ft.

610 mm

5-1/2 ft.

1.7 m

5 ft.

1.5 m

10-1/2 ft.

3.2 m

3 ft.

914 mm

7-1/2 ft.

2.3 m

7 ft.

2.1 m

14-1/2 ft.

4.4 m

H1 MAX. = 7-1/2 ft. (2.3 m) H1 + H2 MAX. = 14-1/2 ft. (4.4 m) V1 + V2 + H1 + H2 MAX. = 40 ft. (12.2 m)

Note: Use DVP Series components only.

V2

H2

V1

H1 Figure 7.18

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

33


Coaxial to Colinear Venting The coaxial to colinear adapter (DV-46DVA-GCL) is approved for installations into solid fuel masonry or factory built fireplaces that have been installed in accordance with the National, Provincial, State and local building codes. The DV-46DVA-GCL must be recessed into existing masonry fireplace. See Table 1 and Figure 7.20.

OUTSIDE FACE OF FIREPLACE

EXHAUST VENT PIPE

TOP OF FIREPLACE OPENING 5 IN. MIN.

INLET AIR VENT PIPE

EXHAUST VENT PIPE

3 IN. MIN. SHADED AREA DEFINED AS “INSIDE EXISTING MASONRY FIREPLACE”

Figure 7.19 Coaxial/Colinear Appliance Adapter (DV-46DVA-GCL)

WARNING! Risk of Fire! Coaxial to colinear venting configuration may only be used in existing non-combustible chimney. Installation in any other venting application could cause fire.

Figure 7.20 Existing Fireplace DV-46DVA-GCL Clearance Requirements

Clearances to Combustibles: Refer to Section 5 for clearances to the appliance, mantel, mantel legs and wall projection. Refer to Section 8 for pipe clearances to combustibles.

Prior to installing the gas appliance: • Have the chimney and adjacent structure inspected and cleaned by qualified professionals. Hearth & Home Technologies recommends that NFI or CSIA certified professionals, or technicians under the direction of certified professionals, conduct a minimum of a NFPA 211 Level 2 inspection of the chimney. • Replace component parts of the chimney and fireplace as specified by the professionals. • Ensure all joints are properly engaged and the chimney is properly secured. Table 1 CLEARANCE TO COMBUSTIBLES REQUIREMENTS DV-46DVA-GCL

3 IN.

Exhaust Vent Pipe

5 IN.

Termination Cap For installation of termination cap see minimum vent heights for various pitched roofs. See Section 6 of appliance owner’s manual. Flue Damper Fully lock the solid fuel fireplace’s flue damper in the open position, OR completely remove it. Venting Components The LINK-DV30B is approved for use with the coaxial/colinear venting application. The LINK-DV30B kit includes: • Two 30 feet sections of flexible vent pipe (3 inches Ø). One section is used to draw combustion air and the other section is used to expel exhaust gases. • One vertical termination cap. CAUTION! DO NOT use any flue restrictor when venting with the DV-46DVA-GCL adapter and LINK-DV30B kit. This may result in poor flame appearance, sooting, pilot malfunction, or overheating.

34

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


Connecting the DV-46DVA-GCL Adapter to Appliance Top Vent • Remove top seal cap and insulation if equipped. See Section 14, “Appliance Setup.” SLP Collar: Install the DV-46DVA-GCL adapter to the appliance starting collar with 3-1/2 in. self-tapping screws. See Figure 7.21. Rear Vent • Remove the rear seal cap and insulation if equipped. Connect the DVP-2SL adapter to the vertically positioned elbow. Follow installation instructions included with DVP2SL kit. Secure DV-46DVA-GCL adapter to DVP-2SL with 3-1/2 in. self-tapping screws. See Figure 7.21. Connecting the LINK-DV30B to the DV-46DVA-GCL adapter • Insert the two sections of flexible vent pipe down the existing chimney. • Attach one section of flexible vent pipe to the exhaust

collar on top of the DV-46DVA-GCL adapter with three self-tapping screws. • Attach one section of flexible vent pipe to the inlet collar on top of the DV-46DVA-GCL adapter with three selftapping screws. • To minimize cold air drafts, seal around the flex vents at the damper inside the chimney with non-combustible unfaced fiberglass or rock wool insulation. The DV-46DVA-GCL adapter must be recessed into existing masonry fireplace. This measurement is taken from the top of the fireplace opening. See Table 1 and Figure 7.20. WARNING! Risk of Fire, Explosion or Asphyxiation! Do NOT connect this gas appliance to a chimney flue serving a separate solid fuel or gas burning appliance. • May impair safe operation of this appliance or other appliances connected to the flue. • Vent this appliance directly outside. • Use separate vent system for this appliance.

CAUTION! DO NOT use any flue restrictor when venting with the DV-46DVA-GCL adapter and LINK-DV30B kit. This may result in poor flame appearance, sooting, pilot malfunction, or overheating.

REAR VENT TERMINATION CAP

TOP VENT TERMINATION CAP

NOTICE: To achieve optimum performance of appliance, minimize or avoid bends in exhaust vent pipe.

V

V

EXISTING CHIMNEY

EXISTING CHIMNEY

EXHAUST AIR VENT PIPE

INLET AIR VENT PIPE

EXISTING CHIMNEY

EXHAUST AIR VENT PIPE

INLET AIR VENT PIPE

EXISTING CHIMNEY To minimize cold air drafts, seal with non-combustible insulation.

DIRECT VENT FIREPLACE

To minimize cold air drafts, seal with non-combustible insulation. DIRECT VENT FIREPLACE

HEARTH FLOOR

FLOOR

HEARTH

H

V

H

V

Minimum

10 ft.

3.05 m

0 ft.

0 mm

Minimum

10 ft.

3.05 m

Maximum

40 ft.

12.2 m

2 ft.

610 mm

Maximum

40 ft.

12.2 m

Figure 7.21 Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

35


8

Vent Clearances and Framing

A. Pipe Clearances to Combustibles

B. Wall Penetration Framing

WARNING! Risk of Fire! Maintain air space clearance to vent. DO NOT pack insulation or other combustibles:

Combustible Wall Penetration

• Between ceiling firestops • Between wall shield firestops • Around vent system Failure to keep insulation or other material away from vent pipe may cause overheating and fire.

Note: Heat shields MUST overlap by a minimum of 1-1/2 in. (38 mm). ‡ DVP heat shield - designed to be used on a wall 4 in. to 7-1/4 in. (102 mm to 184 mm) thick. ‡ ,f wall thickness is less than 4 in. the e[isting heat shields must be field trimmed. ,f wall thickness is greater than 7-1/4 in. a DVP-HSM-B will be required. ‡ SLP heat shield - designed to be used on a wall 4-3/8 in. to 7-5/8 in. (111 mm to 194 mm thick). ‡ ,f wall thickness is less than 4-3/8 the e[isting heat shields must be field trimmed. ,f wall thickness is greater than 7-5/8 in. a DVP-HSM-B will be required.

(DVP-SLP Pipe Shown)

3 in. (76 mm) top clearance

Heat Shield

3 in. (76 mm) top clearance * Heat Shield

1 in. (25 mm) clearance around vertical sections 1 in. (25 mm) clearance bottom & sides

Wall Shield Firestop

Whenever a combustible wall is penetrated, you must frame a hole for the wall shield firestop(s). The wall shield firestop maintains minimum clearances and prevents cold air infiltration. • The opening must be framed on all four sides using the same size framing materials as those used in the wall construction. • SLP pipe - A wall shield firestop must be placed on each side of an interior wall. A minimum 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) overlap of attached heat shields must be maintained. • DVP pipe - A wall shield firestop is required on one side only on interior walls. If your local inspector requires a wall shield firestop on both sides, then both wall shield firestops must have a heat shield (refer to Section 16.B.) attached to them. • See Section 10.M. for information for regarding the installation of a horizontal termination cap. Non-Combustible Wall Penetration If the hole being penetrated is surrounded by noncombustible materials such as concrete, a hole with diameter one in. greater than the pipe is acceptable. Whenever a non-combustible wall is penetrated, the wall shield firestop is only required on one side and no heat shield is necessary.

WALL

3 in. (76 mm) top clearance * Heat Shield

Heat Shield

Wall Shield Firestop

1 in. (25 mm) clearance bottom & sides

10 in.

10 in.

C

D

WALL

10 in. * When using SLP pipe, minimum clearances from the vent pipe to combustible materials at wall shield firestops are: Top: 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) Bottom: 1/2 in. (13 mm) Sides: 1 in. (25 mm)

A*

12 in.

B*

Figure 8.1 Horizontal Venting Clearances To Combustible Materials

DV3732SBI DV3732SBIL

A*

B*

C

D

in.

37

mm

940

24-3/8

36

23-3/8

619

914

593

* Shows center of vent framing hole for top or rear venting. The center of the hole is one (1) in. (25.4 mm) above the center of the horizontal vent pipe.

Figure 8.2 Wall Penetration 36

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


C. Install the Ceiling Firestop A ceiling firestop MUST be used between floors and attics. • DVP pipe only - Frame an opening 10 in. by 10 in. (254 mm by 254 mm) whenever the vent penetrates a ceiling/fl oor (see Figure 8.3). ATTIC ABOVE

• SLP pipe only - Frame opening 9 in. x 9 in. (229 mm x 229 mm) whenever the vent penetrates a ceiling/floor (see Figure 8.3). • Frame the area with the same sized lumber as used in ceiling/floor joist.

A

• The ceiling firestop may be installed above or below the ceiling joists when installed with a attic insulation shield. It must be under joists between floors that are not insulated. Refer to Figure 8.4. • Secure with three fasteners on each side. WARNING! Risk of Fire! DO NOT pack insulation around the vent. Insulation must be kept back from the pipe to prevent overheating.

A

PIPE

A

DVP

10 in. (254 mm)

SLP

9 in. (229 mm)

Figure 6.3

INSTALL ATTIC INSULATION SHIELDS BEFORE OR AFTER INSTALLATION OF VENT SYSTEM

3 FASTENERS PER SIDE

CEILING FIRESTOP INSTALLED BELOW CEILING

CEILING FIRESTOP INSTALLED ABOVE CEILING

Figure 6.4 Installing the Attic Shield

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

37


D. Install Attic Insulation Shield WARNING! Fire Risk. DO NOT allow loose materials or insulation to touch vent. Hearth & Home Technologies requires the use of an attic shield.

BEND ALL TABS INWARD 90° TO MAINTAIN CLEARANCE AND PREVENT INSULATION FROM FALLING INSIDE

The National Fuel Gas Code ANSI Z223.1 and NFPA 54 requires an attic shield constructed of 26 gauge minimum metal that extends at least 2 in. (51 mm) above insulation. Attic shields must meet specified clearance and be secured in place. Flat Ceiling Installation • Remove one shield from box. NOTICE: Cut previously installed batt insulation to make room for the attic insulation shield.

INSERT 3 SCREWS

• Wrap shield around pipe if pipe is already installed in area to be insulated. • Match the three holes in each side and fasten with three screws to form a tube. • Bend three tabs on the bottom of the shield outward to allow attachment to the ceiling firestop.

Figure 8.5 Attic Insulation Shield

• Bend the remaining bottom tabs inward 90º to maintain the air space between the pipe and the shield. Set the shield on the ceiling firestop and attach to the firestop. • Bend all tabs inward 90º around the top of the shield. These tabs must be used to prevent blown insulation from getting between the shield and vent pipe, and to maintain air space clearance.

Vaulted Ceiling Installation • Remove one shield from box. NOTICE: Cut previously installed batt insulation to make room for the attic insulation shield. • Cut the attic insulation shield (if application is for vaulted ceiling) to fit your ceiling pitch. Snip cut edge to recreate 1 in. bend tabs all the way around the bottom. • Wrap shield around pipe if pipe is already installed in area to be insulated. • Match the three holes in each side and fasten with three screws to form a tube. • Bend three tabs on the bottom of the shield outward to allow attachment to the ceiling firestop. • Bend the remaining bottom tabs inward 90º to maintain the air space between the pipe and the shield. Set the shield on the ceiling firestop and attach to the firestop. • Bend all tabs inward 90º around the top of the shield. These tabs must be used to prevent blown insulation from getting between the shield and vent pipe, and to maintain air space clearance.

38

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

BEND 3 TABS OUTWARD TO FASTEN TO CEILING FIRESTOP-BEND REMAINING TABS INWARD 90 DEGREES TO MAINTAIN CLEARANCE


9

Appliance Preparation

A. Top Vent CAUTION! Risk of Cuts, Abrasions or Flying Debris. Wear protective gloves and safety glasses during installation. Sheet metal edges are sharp.

Note: Actual unit may look different than the fireplace shown in this section.

NOTICE: Once appliance is set up for top or rear venting, it CANNOT be changed at a later time.

2 SCREWS

Figure 9.4 Remove the seal cap. Figure 9.1 For top vent, remove the two screws holding the top heat shield in place. For rear vent, see Section 9.B. WARNING! Risk of Fire! Do not remove heat shield. Elevated header temperatures may cause a fire.

Figure 9.2 Rotate the top heat shield to the vertical position as shown above. The heat shield must remain in the vertical position.

Figure 9.5 Remove the insulation basket and white insulation from the center vent pipe.

2 SCREWS

Figure 9.3 Replace the two screws as shown.

Figure 9.6 Remove the insulation from the outer vent pipe.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

39


NOTICE: Once the seal cap has been removed it CANNOT be reattached.

2 SCREWS

Figure 9.7 To attach the first section of vent pipe, make sure to use the fiberglass gasket to seal between the first vent component and the outer fireplace wrap. Use 2 self tapping screws to secure the gasket to the outer wrap.

Figure 9.10 Fold the center parts of the retaining band out and use to remove the seal cap.

Note: Once the seal cap has been removed, it cannot be reattached.

B. Rear Vent NOTICE: Once appliance is set up for top or rear venting, it CANNOT be changed at a later time.

Figure 9.11 Discard the seal cap, remove and discard the insulation basket. Note: Once the seal cap has been removed it CANNOT be reattached.

Figure 9.8 Fold the tabs toward the center of the fire plug (90º) and remove the insulation gasket.

Figure 9.9 Cut the metal retaining band and fold the sides out. 40

Figure 9.12 Attach the first vent section (it will snap into place). Slide the insulation gasket onto the vent section, up against the appliance and over the tabs. Use two selftapping screws to secure gasket to outer wrap.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


C. Securing and Leveling the Appliance WARNING! Risk of Fire! Prevent contact with: • Sagging or loose insulation • Insulation backing or plastic • Framing and other combustible materials Block openings into the chase to prevent entry of blownin insulation. Make sure insulation and other materials are secured. DO NOT notch the framing around the appliance standoffs. Failure to maintain air space clearance may cause overheating and fire. The diagram shows how to properly position, level, and secure the appliance (see Figure 9.13). Nailing tabs are provided to secure the appliance to the framing members. • Bend out nailing tabs on each side.

NAILING TABS (BOTH SIDES)

• Place the appliance into position. • Keep nailing tabs flush with the framing. • Level the appliance from side to side and front to back. • Shim the appliance as necessary. It is acceptable to use wood shims underneath the appliance.

Figure 9.13 Proper Positioning, Leveling And Securing Of An Appliance

• Secure the appliance to the framing by using nails or screws through the nailing tabs. • Secure the appliance to the floor by inserting two screws through the pilot holes at the bottom of the appliance.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

41


10

Installing Vent Pipe (DVP and SLP Pipe)

A. Assemble Vent Sections (DVP Pipe Only) Attach Vent to the Firebox Assembly Note: The end of the pipe sections with the lanced tabs will face toward the appliance.

Attach the first pipe section to the starting collar: • Lanced pipe end of the starting collar • Inner pipe over inner collar • Push the pipe section until all lanced tabs snap in place • Lightly tug on pipe to confirm it has locked. Commercial, Multi-family (Multi-level exceeding two stories), or High-Rise Applications All outer pipe joints must be sealed with silicone with a minimum of 300ºF continuous exposure rating, including the slip section that connects directly to the horizontal termination cap.

Figure 10.1 High Temperature Silicone Sealant

• Apply a bead of silicone sealant inside the female outer pipe joint prior to joining sections. See Figure 10.1

A

Lances

• Only outer pipes need to be sealed. All unit collar, pipe, slip section, elbow and cap outer flues shall be sealed in this manner, unless otherwise stated. WARNING! Risk of Fire or Explosion! DO NOT break silicone seals on slip sections. Use care when removing termination cap from slip pipe. If slip section seals are broken during removal of the termination cap, vent may leak.

B

Figure 10.3

Figure 10.2

Assemble Pipe Sections Note: Make sure that the seams are not aligned to prevent

Per Figure 10.2:

unintentional disconnection.

• Start the inner pipe on the lanced end of section A into the flared end of section B. • Start the outer pipe of section A over the outer pipe of section B. • Once both vents sections are started, push firmly until all lanced tabs lock into place. • Lightly tug on the pipe to confirm the tabs have locked. It is acceptable to use screws no longer than 1/2 in. (13 mm) to hold outer pipe sections together. If predrilling holes, DO NOT penetrate inner pipe.

CORRECT

For 90º and 45º elbows that are changing the vent direction from horizontal to vertical, one screw minimum should be put in the outer flue at the horizontal elbow joint to prevent the elbow from rotating. Use screws no longer than 1/2 in. (13 mm). If predrilling screw holes, DO NOT penetrate inner pipe. Figure 10.4 Seams

42

INCORRECT

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


B. Assemble Vent Sections (SLP Pipe Only)

C. Assemble Slip Sections

To attach the first vent component to the starting collars of the appliance:

• Slide the inner flue of the slip section into the inner flue of the pipe section and the outer flue of the slip section over the outer flue of the pipe section. See Figure 10.6.

• Lock the vent components into place by sliding the pipe section onto the collar.

• Slide together to the desired length.

• Align the seam of the pipe and seam of collar to allow engagement. Rotate the vent component to lock into place. Use this procedure for all vent components. See Figure 10.5. • Slide the gasket over the first vent section and place it flush to the appliance. This will prevent cold air infiltration. Caulk with a minimum of 300ºF continuous exposure rating may be used to hold the part in place. • Continue adding vent components, locking each succeeding component into place.

Pilot hole

• Ensure that each succeeding vent component is securely fitted and locked into the preceding component.

Figure 10.6 Slip Section Pilot Holes

Commercial, Multi-family (Multi-level exceeding two stories), or High-Rise Applications

• Maintain a 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) overlap between the slip section and the pipe section.

For Installation into a commercial, multi-family (multi-level exceeding two stories) or high-rise applications: All outer pipe joints must be sealed with silicone with a minimum of 300ºF continuous exposure rating, including the slip section that connects directly to the horizontal termination cap.

• Secure the pipe and slip section with two screws no longer than 1/2 in. (13 mm), using the pilot holes in the slip section. See Figure 10.7.

• Apply a bead of silicone sealant inside the female outer pipe joint prior to joining sections. See Figure 10.1 • Only outer pipes need to be sealed. All unit collar, pipe, slip section, elbow and cap outer flues shall be sealed in this manner, unless otherwise stated. WARNING! Risk of Fire or Explosion! DO NOT break silicone seals on slip sections. Use care when removing termination cap from slip pipe. If slip section seals are broken during removal of the termination cap, vent may leak.

Figure 10.7 Screws into Slip Section

• Continue adding pipe as necessary following instructions in “Assembling Pipe Sections.” NOTICE: If slip section is too long, the inner and outer flues of the slip section can be cut to the desired length.

Note: Align seams to engage pipe, then rotate counterclockwise to lock Figure 10.5 Adding Venting Components

NOTICE: When installing a vent system with an HRC termination cap, all pipe system joints shall be sealed using a silicone sealant with a minimum of 300ºF continuous exposure rating. • Apply a bead of silicone sealant inside the female outer pipe joint prior to joining sections. • Only outer pipes are sealed, sealing the inner flue is not required. • All unit collar, pipe, slip section, elbow and cap outer flues shall be sealed.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

43


D. Secure the Vent Sections

E. Disassemble Vent Sections

• Vertical runs originating off the top of the appliance, with no offsets, must be supported every 8 ft. (2.44 m) after the maximum allowed 25 ft. (7.62 m) of unsupported rise.

• Rotate either section (see Figure 10.10) so the seams on both pipe sections are aligned as shown in Figure 10.11.

• Vertical runs originating off the rear of the appliance, or after any elbow, must be supported every 8 ft. (2.44 m).

• Pull carefully to separate the pieces of pipe.

• Horizontal runs must be supported every 5 feet (1.52 m). • Vent supports or plumbers strap (spaced 120º apart) may be used to support vent sections. See Figures 10.8 and 10.9. • Wall shield firestops may be used to provide horizontal support to vent sections. • SLP ceiling firestops have tabs that may be used to provide vertical support. WARNING! Risk of Fire, Explosion or Asphyxiation! Improper support may allow vent to sag and separate. Use vent run supports and connect vent sections per installation instructions. DO NOT allow vent to sag below connection point to appliance.

Figure 10.10 Rotate Seams for Disassembly

Figure 10.11 Align and Disassemble Vent Sections Figure 10.8 Securing Vertical Pipe Sections

Figure 10.9 Securing Horizontal Pipe Sections

44

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


F. Install Decorative Ceiling Components (SLP only)

LEVEL

A decorative ceiling thimble can be installed on a flat ceiling through which the vent passes. The decorative ceiling thimble is used to cover the firestop.

CATHEDRAL CEILING SUPPORT BOX

• Seal the gap between the vent pipe and firestop using silicone with a minimum of 300ºF continuous exposure rating to prevent cold air infiltration. • Install the decorative ceiling thimble by sliding it up to the ceiling and attaching it using the provided screws. A decorative cathedral ceiling support box can be installed on a cathedral ceiling through which the vent passes. • Use a plumb-bob to mark the center line of the venting system on the ceiling and drill a small hole through the ceiling and roof at this point. Locate the hole and mark the outline of the cathedral ceiling support box on the outside roof.

2 in. (51 mm) MIN. BELOW FINISHED CEILING

CUT HOLE 1/8 in. (3 mm) GREATER IN SIZE THAN PATTERN OF SUPPORT BOX AS IT IS PROJECTED ONTO ROOF LINE

Figure 10.12

• Remove shingles or other roof covering as necessary to cut the rectangular hole for the support box. Cut the hole 1/8 in. (3 mm) larger than the support box outline. • Lower the support box through the hole in the roof until its bottom is at least 2 in. (51 mm) below the ceiling (Figure 10.12). • Level the support box both vertically and horizontally and temporarily tack it in place through the inside walls into the roof sheathing. • Use tin snips to cut the support box from the top corners down to the roof line and fold the resulting flaps to the roof. See Figure 10.13. • Nail the flaps to the roof AFTER running a bead of non hardening sealant between the flaps and the roof. WARNING! Risk of Fire! Clean out ALL materials from inside the support box and complete the vertical vent run and termination.

Figure 10.13

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

45


G. Install Metal Roof Flashing • See minimum vent heights for various pitched roofs (Figure 10.14) to determine the length of pipe to extend through the roof.

CAULK

• Slide the roof flashing over the pipe sections extending through the roof as shown in Figure 10.15.

HORIZONTAL OVERHANG

2 FT. MIN.

20 INCHES MIN.

VERTICAL WALL

LOWEST DISCHARGE OPENING GAS DIRECT VENT TERMINATION CAP

Figure 10.15 X 12 ROOF PITCH IS X/ 12 H (MIN.) - MINIMUM HEIGHT FROM ROOF TO LOWEST DISCHARGE OPENING

Roof Pitch H (Min.) Ft. Flat to 6/12........................................ 1.0* Over 6/12 to 7/12 ............................ 1.25* Over 7/12 to 8/12 .............................. 1.5* Over 8/12 to 9/12 .............................. 2.0* Over 9/12 to 10/12 ............................. 2.5 Over 10/12 to 11/12 ......................... 3.25 Over 11/12 to 12/12 ........................... 4.0 Over 12/12 to 14/12 ........................... 5.0 Over 14/12 to 16/12 ........................... 6.0 Over 16/12 to 18/12 ........................... 7.0 Over 18/12 to 20/12 ........................... 7.5 Over 20/12 to 21/12 ........................... 8.0

H. Assemble and Install Storm Collar CAUTION! Risk of Cuts, Abrasions or Flying Debris. Wear protective gloves and safety glasses during installation. Sheet metal edges are sharp. • Connect both halves of the storm collar with two screws (see Figure 10.16). • Wrap the storm collar around the exposed pipe section closest to the roof and align brackets. Insert a bolt (provided) through the brackets and tighten the nut to complete the storm collar assembly. Make sure the collar is tight against the pipe section. • Slide the assembled storm collar down the pipe section until it rests on the roof flashing (see Figure 10.17). • Caulk around the top of the storm collar (see Figure 10.18).

* 3 foot minimum in snow regions Figure 10.14 Minimum Height From Roof To Lowest Discharge Opening

Figure 10.16 Assembling the Storm Collar

NOTICE: Failure to properly caulk the roof flashing and pipe seams may permit entry of water. • Caulk the gap between the roof flashing and the outside diameter of the pipe. • Caulk the perimeter of the flashing where it contacts the roof surface. See Figure 10.15. • Caulk the overlap seam of any exposed pipe sections that are located above the roof line.

Figure 10.17 Assembling the Storm Collar Around the Pipe 46

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


I. Install Vertical Termination Cap • Attach the vertical termination cap by sliding the inner collar of the cap into the inner flue of the pipe section while placing the outer collar of the cap over the outer flue of the pipe section. • Secure the cap by driving three self-tapping screws (supplied) through the pilot holes in the outer collar of the cap into the outer flue of the pipe (see Figure 10.18). TERMINATION CAP

K. Heat Shield Requirements for Horizontal Termination WARNING! Risk of Fire! To prevent overheating and fire, heat shields must extend through the entire wall thickness. • DO NOT remove the heat shields attached to the wall shield firestop and the horizontal termination cap (shown in Figure 10.20). • Heat shields must overlap 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) minimum. There are two sections of the heat shield. One section is factory-attached to the wall shield firestop. The other section is factory-attached to the cap. See Figure 10.20. If the wall thickness does not allow the required 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) heat shield overlap when installed, an extended heat shield must be used. • If the wall thickness is less than 4 in./102 mm (DVP) or 4-3/8 in./ 111 mm (SLP), the heat shields on the cap and wall shield firestop must be trimmed. A minimum 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) overlap MUST be maintained.

(1 of 3)

STORM COLLAR SCREWS CAULK

• Use an extended heat shield if the finished wall thickness is greater than 7-1/4 in. (184 mm). • The extended heat shield may need to be cut to length maintaining sufficient length for a 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) overlap between heat shields. • Attach the extended heat shield to either of the existing heat shields using the screws supplied with the extended heat shield. Refer to vent components diagrams in the back of this manual.

Figure 10.18

J. Install Decorative Wall Components (SLP only) A decorative wall thimble can be installed on wall through which the vent passes. The decorative wall thimble is used to cover the wall shield firestop.

• Rest the small leg on the extended heat shield on top of the pipe section to properly space it from the pipe section. Important Notice: Heat shields may not be field constructed.

• Slide the decorative wall thimble over the last section of horizontal pipe before connecting the termination cap to the pipe. • Once the pipe section and the termination cap have been connected, slide the wall thimble up to the interior wall surface and attach with screws provided. See Figure 10.19.

Figure 10.19 Wall Thimble Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

47


L. Install Horizontal Termination Cap (DVP and SLP Pipe) WARNING! Risk of Fire! The telescoping flue section of the termination cap MUST be used when connecting vent. • 1-1/2 (38 mm) minimum overlap of flue telescoping section is required. Failure to maintain overlap may cause overheating and fire.

Note: When using termination caps with factory-supplied heat shield attached, no additional wall shield firestop is required on the exterior side of a combustible wall.

HEAT SHIELD OR EXTENDED HEAT SHIELD

HEAT SHIELD 1-1/2 IN. (38 MM) MIN. OVERLAP

WALL SHIELD FIRESTOP

• Vent termination must not be recessed in the wall. Siding may be brought to the edge of the cap base. SLIP SECTION CAN BE EXTENDED

• Flash and seal as appropriate for siding material at outside edges of cap. • When installing a horizontal termination cap, follow the cap location guidelines as prescribed by current ANSI Z223.1 and CAN/CGA-B149 installation codes and refer to Section 6 of this manual.

INNER VENT

INTERIOR

CAUTION! Risk of Burns! Local codes may require installation of a cap shield to prevent anything or anyone from touching the hot cap. NOTICE: For certain exposures which require superior resistance to wind-driven rain penetration, a flashing kit and HRC caps are available. When penetrating a brick wall, a brick extension kit is available for framing the brick.

SHEATHING

OUTER VENT EXTERIOR

VENT DEPTH FROM BACK OF APPLIANCE TO OUTSIDE SURFACE OF EXTERIOR WALL (SEE CHART BELOW)

Figure 10.20 Venting through the wall

Termination Cap Specification Chart (depth without using additional pipe sections) DVP-TRAPK1 DVP-TRAP1 DVP-TRAPK2 DVP-TRAP2 Top Vent Rear Vent Top Vent Rear Vent Depth Depth Depth Depth 3-1/8 in. to 5-1/2 in. to N/A N/A 5 in. 9-1/2 in. SL Series DVP-HPC1 Top Vent Depth N/A

DVP-HPC1 Rear Vent Depth 3-1/8 in. to 5-1/4 in.

DVP-HPC2 Top Vent Depth N/A

DVP-TRAP1 can adjust 1-1/2 in. (3-1/8 to 4-5/8) DVP-TRAP2 can adjust 4 in. (5-3/8 to 9-3/8) DVP-HPC1 can adjust 2-1/8 in. (4-1/4 to 6-3/8) DVP-HPC2 can adjust 4-1/8 in. (6-3/8 to 10-1/2)

48

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

DVP-HPC2 Rear Vent Depth 5-1/4 in. to 9-3/8 in.


11

Gas Information

A. Fuel Conversion

C. Gas Connection

• Make sure the appliance is compatible with available gas types.

• Refer to Reference Section 16 for location of gas line access in appliance.

• Conversions must be made by a qualified service technician using Hearth & Home Technologies specified and approved parts.

• Gas line may be run through knockout(s) provided.

B. Gas Pressure • Optimum appliance performance requires proper input pressures. • Gas line sizing requirements will be determined in ANSI Z223.1 National Fuel Gas Code in the USA and CAN/ CGA B149 in Canada. • Pressure requirements are: Gas Pressure

• The gap between supply piping and gas access hole may be caulked with caulk with a minimum of 300ºF continuous exposure rating or stuffed with non-combustible, unfaced insulation to prevent cold air infiltration. • Ensure that gas line does not come in contact with outer wrap of the appliance. Follow local codes. • Pipe incoming gas line into valve compartment. • Connect incoming gas line to the 1/2 in. (13 mm) connection on manual shutoff valve. WARNING! Risk of Fire or Explosion! Support control when attaching pipe to prevent bending gas line.

Natural Gas

Propane

Minimum inlet pressure

5.0 in. w.c.

11.0 in. w.c.

• A small amount of air will be in the gas supply lines.

Maximum inlet pressure

10.0 in. w.c.

13.0 in. w.c.

Manifold pressure

3.5 in. w.c.

10.0 in. w.c.

WARNING! Risk of Fire or Explosion! Gas build-up during line purge could ignite.

WARNING! Risk of Fire or Explosion! High pressure will damage valve. Low pressure may cause explosion. • Verify inlet pressures. Verify minimum pressures when other household gas appliances are operating. • Install regulator upstream of valve if line pressure is greater than 1/2 psig.

WARNING Fire Risk. Explosion Hazard. High pressure will damage valve. • Disconnect gas supply piping BEFORE pressure testing gas line at test pressures above 1/2 psig. • Close the manual shutoff valve BEFORE pressure testing gas line at test pressures equal to or less than 1/2 psig.

Note: Have the gas supply line installed in accordance with local codes, if any. If not, follow ANSI 223.1. Installation should be done by a qualified installer approved and/or licensed as required by the locality. (In the Commonwealth of Massachusetts installation must be performed by a licensed plumber or gas fitter). Note: A listed (and Commonwealth of Massachusetts approved) 1/2 in. (13 mm) T-handle manual shut-off valve and flexible gas connector are connected to the 1/2 in. (13 mm) control valve inlet. • If substituting for these components, please consult local codes for compliance.

• Purge should be performed by qualified service technician. • Ensure adequate ventilation. • Ensure there are no ignition sources such as sparks or open flames. Light the appliance. It will take a short time for air to purge from lines. When purging is complete the appliance will light and operate normally. WARNING! Risk of Fire, Explosion or Asphyxiation! Check all fittings and connections with a non-corrosive commercially available leak-check solution. DO NOT use open flame. Fittings and connections could have loosened during shipping and handling. WARNING! Risk of Fire! DO NOT change valve settings. This valve has been preset at the factory.

D. High Altitude Installations NOTICE: If the heating value of the gas has been reduced, these rules do not apply. Check with your local gas utility or authorities having jurisdiction. When installing above 2000 feet elevation: • In the USA: Reduce burner orifice 4% for each 1000 feet above 2000 feet. • In CANADA: Reduce burner orifice 10% for elevations between 2000 feet and 4500 feet. Above 4500 feet, consult local gas utility.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

49


12

Electrical Information

A. Wiring Requirements

C. Optional Accessories Requirements

NOTICE: This appliance must be electrically wired and grounded in accordance with local codes or, in the absence of local codes, with National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA 70-latest edition or the Canadian Electric Code CSA C22.1. • Wire the appliance junction box to 110-120 VAC. This is required for proper operation of the appliance.

• This appliance may be used with a wall switch, wall mounted thermostat and/or a remote control.

• A 110-120 VAC circuit for this product must be protected with ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection, in compliance with the applicable electrical codes, when it is installed in locations such as in bathrooms or near sinks. • Low voltage and 110-120 VAC voltage cannot be shared within the same wall box. WARNING! Risk of Shock or Explosion! DO NOT wire 110V to the valve or to the appliance wall switch. Incorrect wiring will damage controls.

Wiring for optional Hearth & Home Technologies approved accessories should be done now to avoid reconstruction. Follow instructions that come with those accessories.

D. Electrical Service and Repair WARNING! Risk of Shock! Label all wires prior to disconnection when servicing controls. Wiring errors can cause improper and dangerous operation. Verify proper operation after servicing. WARNING! Risk of Shock! Replace damaged wire with type 105º C rated wire. Wire must have high temperature insulation.

B. Intellifire Ignition System Wiring • Wire the appliance junction box to 110-120 VAC for proper operation of the appliance. WARNING! Risk of Shock or Explosion! DO NOT wire IPI controlled appliance junction box to a switched circuit. Incorrect wiring will override IPI safety lockout. • Refer to Figure 12.1, Intellifire Pilot Ignition (IPI) Wiring Diagram. • This appliance is equipped with an Intellifire control valve which operates on a 3 volt system. • Plug the 3-volt AC transformer into the appliance junction box to supply power to the unit OR install two D cell batteries (not included) into the battery pack before use. NOTICE: Batteries should not be placed in the battery pack while using the transformer. Remove batteries before using the transformer, and unplug the transformer before installing the batteries. Battery polarity must be correct or module damage will occur.

50

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


INTERMITTENT PILOT IGNITOR

IGNITION MODULE 3 VAC I

S

TRANSFORMER 3 VAC

ORANGE

NEUTRAL

HOT

WHITE

PLUG IN

GROUND TO FIREPLACE CHASSIS

K AC BL

GREEN

ORANGE

TO BROWN

BATTERY PACK

TO BROWN

D RE

WALL SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT

Figure 12.1 Intellifire Pilot Ignition (IPI) Wiring Diagram

VALVE

IGNITION MODULE 3 VAC

INTERMITTENT PILOT IGNITOR

I

S

TRANSFORMER 3 VAC

ORANGE

NEUTRAL

HOT

WHITE

PLUG IN

GROUND TO FIREPLACE CHASSIS

K AC BL D RE

ORANGE

GREEN

WIRES (TO BROWN)

BATTERY PACK

REMOTE PLUG IN

VALVE

Figure 12.2 Intellifire Ignition Wiring Diagram with Remote Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

51


E. Junction Box Installation Romex Connector

If the box is being wired from the INSIDE of the appliance: • Remove the screw attaching the junction box/receptacle to the outer shell, rotate the junction box inward to disengage it from the outer shell (see Figure 12.3).

14/2WG

Cover Plate outside firebox

• Pull the electrical wires from outside the appliance through the opening into the valve compartment and secure wires with a Romex connector. See Figure 12.3.

HT

WHT B LK BLK

W

• Make all necessary wire connections to the junction box/receptacle and reattach the junction box/receptacle to the outer shell.

GRN wire inside box

Copper ground attached to GRN screw with GRN wire

NOTICE: DO NOT wire 110-120 VAC to wall switch. Figure 12.3 Junction Box Detail

F. Wall Switch Installation for Fan (Optional)

• The power supply for the appliance must be brought into a switch box. • The power can then be supplied from the switch box to the appliance using a minimum of 14-3 with ground wire.

Switch Minimum 14-3 AWG with Ground Red Black White Green

Junction Box

• At the switch box connect the black (hot) wire and red (switch leg) wire to the wall switch as shown.

Switch Box

• At the appliance connect the black (hot), white (neutral) and green (ground) wires to the junction box as shown. • Add a 1/4 in. insulated female connector to the red (switch leg) wire, route it through the knockout in the face of the junction box, and connect to the top fan switch connector (1/4 in. male) as shown.

52

Black White Green

Red Black White Green

If the box is being wired to a wall mounted switch for use with a fan (See Figure 12.4):

Knockout

Red

Figure 12.4 Junction Box Wired to Wall Switch or BC10

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

Power Supply Wires


13

Finishing

A. Splatter Guard The splatter guard is a piece of corrugated material used to protect the appliance during the installation process before finishing work on the whole hearth is complete. Splatter guards may be factory installed or accompany the door of the unit, depending on the fireplace model. Splatter guards must be removed before appliance is fired. WARNING! Risk of Fire! Close the ball valve before installing the splatter guard to prevent accidental lighting. Remove the splatter guard before lighting the appliance. Step 1. Turn off gas to valve. Red gas shutoff knob is located on ball valve. Disconnect the 3 volt transformer from the junction box. See Figure 13.1.

Figure 13.3

Step 4. Center the splatter guard in front of the unit as shown in Figure 13.4. Place the splatter guard in the unit by guiding the top flap into proper position and then continuing to guide the tabs on the side flaps into the top slot on the left and right sides of the appliance. The top slot is indicated in Figure 13.5 Take care not to bend or break off the tabs.

Figure 13.1

To install the Splatter Guard: Step 2. Crease flap on top side of splatter guard using the scored line as the guide. See Figure 13.2. Figure 13.4

TOP SLOT

Figure 13.2

Step 3. Crease flaps on left and right sides of splatter guard using the scored line as the guide. See Figure 13.3.

Figure 13.5

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

53


Step 5. Fold bottom flap along score line as indicated in Figure 13.6 and tuck into valve access area of appliance. Splatter guard should fit securely on front of unit.

Figure 13.9

Once plumbing and wiring are complete on the fireplace, the lower access panel may be closed until the time that the splatter guard must be removed for firing the appliance.

Figure 13.6

Figure 13.10

To Close the Lower Access Panel:

Figure 13.7

Step 6. To open lower access panel of splatter guard, place one hand above score line and place two fingers from other hand in the round holes on the front of the splatter guard. See Figure 13.7. Pull out and fold up the panel as shown in Figure 13.8. Disengage the tabs on left and right bottom of splatter guard and fit them into the square holes. The tabs are now inside the front of the splatter guard; carefully bend them down. See Figure 13.9.

Carefully disengage the tabs from the square holes and bend the access panel to its original position. Bend the center bottom flap and insert it into the bottom of the appliance.

Figure 13.11

To Remove the Splatter Guard:

Figure 13.8 54

Carefully grab splatter guard on or near the vertical center on the left and right sides. Pull outward gently, but firmly, taking care not to tear or remove the inserted tabs. Hearth & Home Technologies â&#x20AC;˘ DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL â&#x20AC;˘ 2215-900 Rev. G â&#x20AC;˘ 2/13


B. Mantel and Wall Projections WARNING! Risk of Fire! Comply with all minimum clearances to combustibles as specified. Framing closer than the minimums listed must be constructed entirely of noncombustible materials (i.e., steel studs, concrete board, etc.) Failure to comply could cause fire. 3 IN. MINIMUM

CEILING

Note: All measurements in inches.

12 11 10 9

5-3/8 IN. MINIMUM

8 32

7

UNLIMITE

6 5 4 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Note: Clearance from opening to perpendicular wall. Figure 13.14 Combustible Mantel Leg or Wall Projections (Acceptable on both sides of opening)

TOP OF HOOD OR FIREPLACE OPENING

Figure 13.12 Clearances To Combustibles Mantels Or Other Combustibles Above Appliance

3-1/2 in.

1/2 in. SHEETROCK OR COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL

1/2 in.

1/2 IN. MINIMUM

TOP VIEW

2-7/8 IN. MINIMUM

3 FT. MAXIMUM

Note: Clearance from opening to perpendicular wall. Figure 13.13 Combustible Mantel Leg or Wall Projections (Acceptable on both sides of opening) NON-COMBUSTIBLE ZONE

Figure 13.15 Non-Combustible Zone

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

55


C. Facing Material • Metal front faces may be covered with non-combustible materials only. • Facing and/or finishing materials must not interfere with air flow through louvers, operation of louvers or doors, or access for service. • Facing and/or finishing materials must never overhang into the glass opening. • Observe all clearances when applying combustible materials. • Seal joints between the finished wall and appliance top and sides using a 300ºF minimum sealant. Refer to Figure 13.16. WARNING! Risk of Fire! DO NOT apply combustible materials beyond the minimum clearances. Comply with all minimum clearances to combustibles as specified in this manual. Overlapping materials could ignite and will interfere with proper operation of doors and louvers.

FINISH WALL MATERIAL MAY BE COMBUSTIBLE - TOP AND SIDES

0 IN.

0 IN.

0 IN.

HIGH TEMPERATURE SEALANT (300° F/149° C MIN.) TOP AND SIDE SEAL JOINT

Figure 13.16 Noncombustible Facing Diagram

56

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


D. Doors Only doors certified for use with this appliance model may be used. Contact your dealer for a list of doors that may be used. Once you have determined what kind of door and finishing material is going to be used on the fireplace, you may use the table below which shows the door models and the finishing material thickness allowed. For an inside fit there is an available template to assist with sizing the finishing material. UNITS AND TEMPLATE PART #

FINISHING MATERIAL 4 IN. MAXIMUM THICKNESS

FINISHING MATERIAL 4 IN. MAXIMUM THICKNESS

DOOR

DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL (550-Template)

DOOR

FIT

FINISH MATERIAL THICKNESS

SEE FIGURE

X

Y

Aero-32

Inside

4 inches Max.

13.17

N/A

N/A

Chad-32E

Overlap

1 inch Max.

13.18

N/A

N/A

Chad-32E

Inside

1-4 inches

13.19

32-3/8 in.

30-3/8 in.

Halston-32E Overlap

1 inch Max.

13.18

N/A

N/A

Halston-32E

1-4 inches

13.20

32-3/8 in.

30-3/8 in.

Inside

Y

X (Includes 1/8 in. opening each side of door)

Finishing material between 1 and 4 inches thick. Refer to Table 1 for X and Y dimensions. Figure 13.19 Inside Fit Door (Chad)

FINISHING MATERIAL 4 IN. MAXIMUM THICKNESS

DOOR

FINISHING MATERIAL 4 IN. MAXIMUM THICKNESS

Stop finishing material flush with fireplace surround opening.

FINISHING MATERIAL

FINISHING MATERIAL

Figure 13.17 Aero Door

*IF FINISHING MATERIAL IS THICKER THAN 2 IN., DOORS WILL ONLY OPEN AS FAR AS PICTURED

DOORS

FRONT FACE OF FIREPLACE

DOOR

1 in. MAX FINISHING MATERIAL (TOP EDGE)

Finishing materials 1 inch maximum thick. Stop finishing material flush with opening.

Y

Figure 13.18 Overlap Fit Door (Chad and Halston)

X (Includes 1/8 in. opening each side of door)

Finishing material between 1 and 4 inches thick. Refer to Table 1 for X and Y dimensions. Figure 13.20 Operable Hinge Door (Halston) Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

57


E. Elevated Hearth Systems Use the table below to identify the hearth system that will be used. The table will also help identify effects on the various dimensions. Some hearth systems will elevate the appliance off the floor at a given dimension. For example, if appliance will be used with a Kenwood Cabinet with Base, the appliance will be elevated 9-1/4 in. The 9-1/4 in. elevation will also have to be added to the following: Wall penetration referenced in Figure 8.2 (Wall penetration) and Rough Opening Height (header height) referenced in Figure 5.2. Note: Finished floor thickness should also be considered when determining installation dimensions.

MODEL

DESCRIPTION

PART #

DV3732SBI DV3732SBIL

KENWOOD CABINET KENWOOD CABINET W/ BASE KENWOOD CORNER CABINET KENWOOD CORNER CABINET W/ BASE KENWOOD MANTEL KENWOOD MANTEL W/ BASE LUNA SURROUND

KDC44SBP KDC44SBP W/ HTKDC44SBP KDA44SBP KDA44SBP W/ HTKDA44SBP AFKDMPA AFKDMPA W/ HTKDMPA LUNA-32-GY

ELEVATED APPLIANCE DIMENSION See Note 1 0 9-1/4 in. 0 9-1/4 in. 0 (See Note 3) 9 1/4 in. 1-1/16 in.

Note 1. Add dimensions to Wall Penetration (Figure 8.2) and Rough Opening Height (Figure 5.2). Note 2. Verify Marble Cut Lengths on site prior to cutting. Note 3. Dimensions assume use of a 3/4 in. Hearth Pad.

58

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

MARBLE LEG CUT LENGTH See Note 2 29-3/8 in. 29-3/8 in. 29-3/8 in. 29-3/8 in. 27-3/8 in. 29-3/8 in. N/A


14

Appliance Setup

A. Remove Fixed Glass Assembly

E. Lava Rock, Rockwool/Ember Placement

See Section 14.G.

WARNING! Risk of Explosion! Follow ember placement instructions in manual. DO NOT place embers directly over burner ports. Replace ember material annually. Improperly placed embers interfere with proper burner operation.

B. Remove the Shipping Materials Remove shipping materials from inside or underneath the firebox.

Placing the Lava Rock

C. Clean the Appliance

See Section 14F for Lava Rock placement instructions.

Clean/vacuum any sawdust that may have accumulated inside the firebox or underneath in the control cavity.

• Place lava rock on base pan. Do NOT place on burner top.

D. Accessories

Placing the Ember Material

Install approved accessories per instructions included with accessories. Contact your dealer for a list of approved accessories.

Ember material is shipped with this gas appliance. To place the ember material:

WARNING! Risk of Fire and Electric Shock! Use ONLY Hearth & Home Technologies-approved optional accessories with this appliance. Using non-listed accessories could result in a safety hazard and will void the warranty.

• Embers CANNOT be placed directly over ports. See Figure 14.4 for the only exception to this guideline. Care should be taken not to cover the lighting trail of ports (from back to front). • When placing Glowing Embers® onto the burner care should be taken so that the ports are not covered. Place the dime-size ember pieces near the port holes in the burner top (see Figure 14.3). Failure to follow this procedure will likely cause lighting and sooting problems. • Some of the small port holes should be covered with ember material. See Figure 14.4 for detail. • Save the remaining ember materials for use during appliance servicing. The embers provided should be enough for 3 to 5 applications.

RHEOSTAT SWITCH

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Figure 14.1 Fan Wiring with Rheostat

VARIABLE SPEED SWITCH

JUNCTION BOX

Figure 14.3 Placement of Embers

TEMPERATURE SENSOR SWITCH

BLUE

Figure 14.2 Detail of Fan Wiring with Rheostat PORT HOLES IN CIRCLED AREA SHOULD BE COVERED WITH EMBER MATERIAL. NO OTHER PORT HOLES MAY COME INTO CONTACT WITH EMBER MATERIAL.

Figure 14.4 Placement of Embers Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

59


F. Install the Log Assembly

LOG PLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS

Log Set Assembly: LOGS-550BE-B Models: SL-550BE-B, SL-550BE-IPI-B, DV3732SBI CAUTION: Logs are fragile. TAB B

TAB A

SLOT A

TAB C

TAB D Locating Screw Figure 2 Log #1 (SRV2158-700)

Figure 1 Log Locating Features

Use the log locating features in Figure 1 to properly position the logs. Position log behind tab B (See Figure 4 and 5 )

Mate slot A with tab A

Log Rest

Tab B

1

Figure 3 Locating References for Log #1

Figure 4 Locating References for Log #1

Tab B

Figure 5 Position Log #1

Log #1 (SRV2158-700) Mate slot A (shown in Figure 2) with Tab A (shown in Figure 1). Position Log #1 behind Tab B as shown in Figure 5. When properly positioned, Log #1 will touch Tab B and sit on Log Rest. See Figure 4 to reference the position of Tab B and the log rest . 2158-935B 60

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


Mate slot C with tab C Slot C

Mate slot with locating screw

Locating Screw Slot

1 2 Figure 7

Figure 6 Log #2 (SRV2158-701)

Log #2 (SRV2158-701) Mate Slot C with Tab C, using Figure 1 and Figure 6 for reference. Mate slot with locating screw.

Logs 1 and 3 touch here

Slot D

Log Groove

1 3 2 Figure 8 Log #3 (SRV2158-702)

Figure 9

Place Lava Rock

Mate Log Grooves from Log #2 and Log #3 Mate Logs Slot D with Tab D

Embers

1 3 2 Figure 10

Log #3 (SRV2158-702) Mate Slot D and Tab D using Figure 1 and Figure 8 for reference. Mate the log groove on Log #2 with the log groove on Log #3. See Figure 9. Apply the supplied lava rock on firebox bottom as shown in Figure 10. Consult Owner’s Manual for Ember Placement instructions.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

61


G. Fixed Glass Assembly

I. Install Hood

Removing Fixed Glass Assembly

See Figure 14.6.

WARNING! Risk of Asphyxiation! Handle fixed glass assembly with care. Inspect the gasket to ensure it is undamaged and inspect the glass for cracks, chips or scratches.

DETAIL A

• DO NOT strike, slam or scratch glass. • DO NOT operate fireplace with glass removed, cracked, broken or scratched. • Replace as a complete assembly.

Removing Fixed Glass Assembly • Pull the four glass assembly latches out of the groove on the glass frame. Remove glass door from the appliance. See Figure 14.5.

Replacing Fixed Glass Assembly • Replace the glass door on the appliance. Pull out and latch the four glass assembly latches into the groove on the glass frame.

LATCHES (BOTH BOTTOM AND TOP)

HOOD CLIPS LOCATED ABOVE GLASS FRAME. SEE DETAIL A. GLASS ASSEMBLY

Figure 14.6 Install Hood

J. Air Shutter Setting

Figure 14.5 Fixed Glass Assembly

Air shutter settings should be adjusted by a qualified installer at the time of installation. The air shutter is set at the factory for minimum vertical vent run. Adjust air shutter for longer vertical runs.

H. Install Louvers and Trim

NOTICE: If sooting occurs, provide more air by opening the air shutter.

• Install optional trim kits and/or surrounds using the instructions included with the accessory.

Air Shutter Settings

• Use non-combustible materials to cover the gap between the sheet rock and the appliance (when applicable to model).

62

Models

NG

LP

DV3732SBI DV3732SBIL

1/8 in.

1/2 in.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


15

Troubleshooting

With proper installation, operation, and maintenance your gas appliance will provide years of trouble-free service. If you do experience a problem, this troubleshooting guide will assist a qualified service technician in the diagnosis of a problem and the corrective action to be taken. This troubleshooting guide can only be used by a qualified service technician. Contact your dealer to arrange a service call by a qualified service technician.

A. Intellifire Ignition System Symptom

Possible Cause

1. Pilot won’t light. A. Incorrect wiring. The ignitor/module makes noise, but no B. Loose connections or electrical spark. shorts in the wiring.

2. Pilot won’t light, there is no noise or spark.

3. Pilot sparks, but Pilot will not light.

Corrective Action Verify “S” wire (white) for sensor and “I” wire (orange) for ignitor are connected to correct terminals on module and pilot assembly. Verify no loose connections or electrical shorts in wiring from module to pilot assembly. Verify connections underneath pilot assembly are tight; also verify connections are not grounding out to metal chassis, pilot burner, pilot enclosure, mesh screen if present, or any other metal object.

C. Ignitor gap is too large.

Verify gap of igniter to right side of pilot hood. The gap should be approximately .17 in. or 1/8 in. (3 mm).

D. Module.

Turn ON/OFF rocker switch or wall switch to OFF position. Remove ignitor wire “I” from module. Place a grounded wire about 3/16 in. (5 mm) away from “I” terminal on module. Place ON/OFF rocker switch or wall switch in ON position. If there is no spark at “I” terminal module must be replaced. If there is a spark at “I” terminal, module is fine. Inspect pilot assembly for shorted sparker wire or cracked insulator around electrode. Replace pilot if necessary.

A. No power or transformer installed incorrectly.

Verify that transformer is installed and plugged into module. Check voltage of transformer under load at spade connection on module with ON/OFF switch in ON position. Acceptable readings of a good transformer are between 3.2 and 2.8 volts AC.

B. A shorted or loose connection in wiring configuration or wiring harness.

Remove and reinstall the wiring harness that plugs into module. Verify there is a tight fit. Verify pilot assembly wiring to module. Remove and verify continuity of each wire in wiring harness. Replace any damaged components.

C. Improper wall switch wiring.

Verify that 110-120 VAC power is “ON” to junction box.

D. Module not grounded.

Verify black ground wire from module wire harness is grounded to metal chassis of appliance.

E. Module.

Turn ON/OFF rocker switch or wall switch to OFF position. Remove ignitor wire “I” from module. Place ON/OFF rocker switch or wall switch in ON position. If there is no spark at “I” terminal module must be replaced. If there is a spark at “I” terminal, module is fine. Inspect pilot assembly for shorted sparker wire or cracked insulator around electrode.

A. Gas supply.

Verify that incoming gas line ball valve is “open”. Verify that inlet pressure reading is within acceptable limits.

B. Ignitor gap is too large.

Verify gap of igniter to right side of pilot hood. The gap should be approximately .17 in. or 1/8 in. (3 mm).

C. Module is not grounded.

Verify module is securely grounded to metal chassis of appliance.

D. Module voltage output / Valve/Pilot solenoid ohms readings.

Verify battery voltage is at least 2.7 volts. Replace batteries if voltage is below 2.7.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

63


Intellifire Ignition System - (continued) Symptom 4. Pilot lights but continues to spark, and main burner will not ignite. (If the pilot continues to spark after the pilot flame has been lit, flame rectification has not occurred.)

64

Possible Cause A. A shorted or loose connection in flame sensing rod.

Corrective Action Verify all connections to wiring diagram in manual. Verify connections underneath pilot assembly are tight. Verify connections are not grounding out to metal chassis, pilot burner, pilot enclosure or screen if present, or any other metal object.

B. Poor flame rectification or contaminated With fixed glass assembly in place, verify that flame is enflame sensing rod. gulfing flame sensing rod on left side of pilot hood. Flame sensing rod should glow shortly after ignition. Verify correct pilot orifice is installed and gas inlet is set to pressure specifications. Polish flame sensing rod with fine steel wool to remove any contaminants that may have accumulated on flame sensing rod. C. Module is not grounded.

Verify module is securely grounded to metal chassis of appliance. Verify that wire harness is firmly connected to the module.

D. Damaged pilot assembly or contaminated flame sensing rod.

Verify that ceramic insulator around the flame sensing rod is not cracked, damaged, or loose. Verify connection from flame sensing rod to white sensor wire. Polish flame sensing rod with fine steel wool to remove any contaminants that may have accumulated on flame sensing rod. Verify continuity with a multimeter with ohms set at lowest range. Replace pilot if any damage is detected.

E. Module.

Turn ON/OFF rocker switch or wall switch to OFF position. Remove ignitor wire “I” from module. Place ON/OFF rocker switch or wall switch in ON position. If there is no spark at “I” terminal module must be replaced. If there is a spark at “I” terminal, module is fine.

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


16

Reference Materials

A. Appliance Dimension Diagram Dimensions are actual appliance dimensions. Use for reference only. For framing dimensions and clearances refer to Section 5.

N

M

O

L

P K

ØQ

ØJ

C

GAS LINE ACCESS

I H E

D

R

F

S

B T

U

A

ELECTRICAL ACCESS

G

Location

Inches

Millimeters

Location

Inches

Millimeters

A

36

913

L

16-3/8

416

B

31

790

M

1/2

13

C

27-3/16

691

N

25-3/4

654

D

18

458

O

12-7/8

327

E

31

787

P

15-7/8

403

F

3-1/2

89

Q

6-5/8

168

G

6-7/8

174

R

30

762

H

34-3/8

874

S

2-3/16

56

I

36-1/2

927

T

6

152

J

8

203

U

1

25

K

8-3/4

222

Figure 16.1 Appliance Dimensions Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

65


B. Vent Components Diagrams

Effective Length

Pipe

Effective Height/Length

DVP4

DVP Pipe (see chart)

Inches

Millimeters

4

102

DVP6

6

152

DVP12

12

305

DVP24

24

610

DVP36

36

914

DVP48

48

1219

DVP6A

3 to 6

76 to 152

DVP12A

3 to 12

76 to 305

10-1/2 in. (267 mm)

45 °

4-7/8 in. ( 124 mm)

10-7/8 in. (276 mm) ° DVP45 (45 Elbow)

11-3/8 in. (289 mm)

10 in. (254 mm)

1 in. (25 mm) 7-3/8 in. (187 mm) 1-1/4 in. (32 mm)

10 in. (254 mm)

9-1/4 in. (235 mm)

Assembled Height: 24 in./610 mm Diameter: 10 in./254 mm

1/2 in. TYP (13 mm)

13-1/4 in. (337 mm)

DVP-AS2

DVP-FS (Ceiling Firestop)

DVP90ST (90° Elbow)

12 in. (305 mm)

1- 1/2 in. (38 mm)

10 in. (254 mm)

1 in. (25 mm)

8 in. (203 mm) 14 in. (356 mm)

UP

5 in. (127 mm)

12 in. (305 mm)

6 in. (152 mm)

DVP-HVS (Vent Support)

DVP-WS (Wall Shield Firestop)

Figure 16.2 DVP vent components 66

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) Note: Heat shields MUST overlap by a minimum of 1-1/2 in. (38 mm). The heat shield is designed to be used on a wall 4 in. to 7-1/4 in. (102 mm to 184 mm) thick. If wall thickness is less than 4 in. (102 mm) the existing heat shields must be field trimmed. If wall thickness is greater than 7-1/4 in. (184 mm) a DVP-HSM-B will be required. 8 in. (203 mm)

Heat Shield

15-1/8 in. (384 mm)

Term Cap

12 in. (305 mm) DVP-TRAP Horizontal Termination Cap

Max Effective Length

Minimum Effective Length

Maximum Effective Length

3-1/8 in.

4-5/8 in.

Trap1 79 mm

117 mm

5-3/8 in.

9-3/8 in.

137 mm

238 mm

Trap2

DVP-TRAP1

DVP-TRAP2

DVP-TRAPK1

DVP-TRAPK2

DVP-HPC1

DVP-HPC2

Figure 16.3 DVP vent components

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

67


B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) 31 in. (787 mm)

13-1/4 in. (337 mm)

24-5/8 in. (625 mm)

27-1/2 in. (699 mm)

24-5/8 in. (625 mm)

13-1/4 in. (337 mm) RF6M Roof Flashing Multi-pak

RF12M Roof Flashing Multi-pak

5 in. (127 mm)

13-3/4 in. (349 mm)

11-7/8 in. (302 mm)

5 in. (127 mm)

13-7/8 in. (352 mm)

13-3/4 in. (349 mm)

DVP-BEK2 DVP-HPC Cap Brick Extension

BEK Trap Cap Brick Extension

11-5/8 in. (295 mm) 12-1/8 in. (308 mm)

7-1/8 in. (181 mm) 5-3/4 in. (146 mm)

DVP-TRAPFL Flashing

13-7/8 in. (352 mm)

26 in. 660 mm

DVP-HSM-B Extended Heat Shield

Figure 16.4 DVP vent components

68

COOL-ADDM Cap Shield

9-1/2 in. (241 mm)

14 in. (356 mm)

DRC-RADIUS Cap Shield

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) 7-3/8 in. (187 mm) 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) 3-7/8 in. (98 mm) 17-3/4 in. (451 mm)

14 in. (356 mm)

10-1/2 in. (267 mm) DVP-TV VerticalTermination Cap

12 in. (305 mm)

12 in. 305 mm

DVP-TB1 BasementVent Cap

2-3/4 in. (70 mm)

7-1/4 in. (184 mm)

9 in. (229 mm)

12-1/2 in. (318 mm)

12-1/2 in. (318 mm)

5-1/4 in. (133 mm)

11-1/2 in. (292 mm)

DVP-TVHW VerticalTermination Cap (Highwind)

12-1/4 in. (311 mm) 16 in. (406 mm) PVK-80 (For use with IPI and DSI appliances only.)

14 in. (356 mm)

16-7/8 in. (429 mm)

12 in. (305 mm) 7-1/8 in. (181 mm)

12-1/8 in. (314 mm)

8-3/4 in. (222 mm)

1 in. (25 mm)

7-1/4 in. (184 mm)

14 in. (356 mm)

3/8 in. (10 mm) 1 in. (25 mm) 7-3/4 to 10-3/8 in. (197 to 264 mm)

1-5/8 in. (41 mm) DVP-HPC High Performance Cap

DVP-FBHT FireBrickTermination Cap

Figure 16.5 DVP vent components

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

69


B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) 8-1/8 in. (206 mm)

13 in. (330 mm)

Effective Length 5-3/4 to 8-3/8 in. 146 to 213 mm

8-3/8 in. 213 mm

5-1/2 in. 140 mm 87°

15 in. (381 mm)

10-1/2 in. 267 mm 10-7/8 in. 276 mm

DVP-HRC-SS DVP-HRC-ZC-SS HORIZONTAL TERMINATION CAP Figure 16.6 DVP vent components

WARNING Fire Risk. • When using SLP-HRC-SS and SLP-HRC-ZCSS termination caps on top vented fireplaces, a one foot minimum vertical vent section is required before installing first elbow. • When using DVP-TB1 termination cap on top vented fireplaces, a three foot minimum vertical vent section is required before installing first elbow.

8-1/8 in. (206 mm)

13 in. (330 mm)

Effective Length 5-3/4 to 8-3/8 in. 146 to 213 mm

5-1/2 in. 140 mm 87°

8-3/8 in. 213 mm 3°

15 in. (381 mm)

10-1/2 in. 267 mm 10-7/8 in. 276 mm

SLP-HRC-SS SLP-HRC-ZC-SS HORIZONTAL TERMINATION CAP

DVP-TB1 SLP90

DVP-TB1

SL-2DVP

ASSEMBLY

Figure 16.7 SLP Series Vent Components 70

DVP-TB1 HORIZONTAL TERMINATION CAP

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) 6-1/2 in. 165 mm 6-1/2 in. 165 mm 8-3/4 in. 222 mm

6-1/2 in. 165 mm 9-1/4 in. 235 mm

6 in. 152 mm 6-5/8 in. 168 mm SLP45 45° Elbow

6-5/8 in. 168 mm 9-7/8 in. 251 mm SLP90 90° Elbow

Effective Height/ Length

Effective Height/Length

SLP PIPE

10-7/8 in. 276 mm

Pipe

inches

mm

SLP4

4

102

SLP6

6

152

SLP12

12

305

SLP24

24

610

SLP36

36

914

SLP48

48

1219

EFFECTIVE HEIGHT/ LENGTH

SLP6A

2-6

51-152

SLP-FLEX-PIPE

SLP12A

2 - 12

51-305

SLP-FLEX-2

24

610

SLP-FLEX-3

36

914

SLP-FLEX-5

60

1524

SLP-FLEX-10

120

3048

1-1/2 in. 38 mm

8-7/8 in. 225 mm SLP-HVS Horizontal Pipe Support

8-11/16 in. 220 mm

8-11/16 in. 220 mm

12 in. 305 mm

1-1/2 in. 38 mm

SLP-FS Ceiling Firestop

12 in. 305 mm

5-1/2 in. 146 mm

SLP-WS Wall Shield Firestop

Figure 16.8 SLP Series Vent Components

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

71


B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued)

Note: Heat shields MUST overlap by a minimum of 1-1/2 in. (38 mm). The heat shield is designed to be used on a wall 4 in. to 7-1/4 in. (102 mm to 184 mm) thick. If wall thickness is less than 4 in. (102 mm) the existing heat shields must be field trimmed. If wall thickness is greater than 7-1/4 in. (184 mm) a DVP-HSM-B will be required. 8 in. (203 mm) Heat Shield

15-1/8 in. (384 mm)

Term Cap

Max Effective Length

12 in. (305 mm)

3-13/16 in. (97 mm)

4-3/4 in.

79 mm

121 mm

5-1/4 in.

9-1/4 in.

133 mm

235 mm

4-3/16 in. 106 mm

6-3/8 in. 163 mm 4-5/8 in. 117 mm

4 in. 102 mm 5-1/16 in. (128 mm)

8 in. (203 mm)

3-1/8 in.

Trap2

3-15/16 in. (101 mm)

3-15/16 in. (101 mm)

Maximum Effective Length

Trap1

SLP-TRAP Horizontal Termination Cap

6-11/16 in. (169 mm)

Minimum Effective Length

5-1/16 in. 128 mm

8-1/8 in. 206 mm DVP-2SL Adapter

SL-2DVP Adapter

14-7/16 in. 367 mm 26 in. 660 mm

2-5/16 in. 59 mm

14-7/16 in. 367 mm DVP-HSM-B Extended Heat Shield

SLP-WT-BK Wall Thimble-Black

Figure 16.9 SLP Series Vent Components

72

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued)

13 in. 330 mm

14 in. 356 mm

1-5/16 in. 34 mm

13 in. 330 mm

10-9/16 in. 269 mm

SLP-DCF-BK Ceiling Firestop Black

SLP-CCS-BK Cathedral Ceiling Support Box-Black

12 in. 305 mm

14-1/16 in. 357 mm

12-1/2 in. 318 mm 14 in. 356 mm

7-1/2 in. 192 mm

10-3/4 in. 273 mm

SLP-TVHW Vertical Termination Cap

SLP-FLEX-TRAP Horizontal Termination Kit

10-11/16 in. 271mm

28-1/2 in. 724 mm

1 in. (25 mm)

7-1/4 in. (184 mm)

14 in. (356 mm)

3/8 in. (10 mm) 1 in. (25 mm) 13-1/2 in. 343 mm

SLK-SNKD Snorkel Termination Cap

7-3/4 to 10-3/8 in. (197 to 264 mm)

DVP-FBHT Horizontal Termination Cap

Figure 16.10 SLP Series Vent Components

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

73


B. Vent Components Diagrams (continued) Optional Wire Harness 13-5/8 IN. 346 mm

DESCRIPTION

12-1/2 IN. 318 mm

PART NUMBER

10 ft. PV Wire Harness

PVI-WH10

20 ft. PV Wire Harness

PVI-WH20

40 ft. PV Wire Harness

PVI-WH40

60 ft. PV Wire Harness

PVI-WH60

80 ft. PV Wire Harness

PVI-WH80

100 ft. PV Wire Harness

PVI-WH100

Note: Wire harnesses required to power the PVI-SLP connect to the appliance and are ordered separately from PVI-SLP. Contact your dealer to order.

20-3/4 IN. 527 mm

PVI-SLP Power Vent Inline 16 IN. 406 mm

4-1/2 IN. 114 mm

15 IN. (381 mm)

9-3/16 IN. (233 mm)

13-5/8 IN. (346 mm)

12-1/2 IN. (318 mm)

16-11/16 IN. 424 mm

16-11/16 IN. (424 mm)

SLP-LPC SLP Low Profile Cap

COAXIAL to COLINEAR VENTING

LINK-DV30B Flex Liner Kit

DVP-2SL Adapter

DV-46DVA-GCL Coaxial/Colinear Appliance Connector

Figure 16.11 Coaxial to Colinear Vent Components 74

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


DV3732SBi

Service Parts C. Service Parts List

Beginning Manufacturing Date: Oct 2009 Ending Manufacturing Date: Active

32” Gas Fireplace - DV

Log Set Assembly

1 2

3 8

7

6

9

4 5

10 11

IMPORTANT: THIS IS DATED INFORMATION. When requesting service or replacement parts for your appliance please provide model number and serial number. All parts listed in this manual may be ordered from an authorized dealer. ITEM

DESCRIPTION

COMMENTS

Stocked at Depot PART NUMBER

Log Assembly

LOGS-550BE-B

1

Log 1

SRV2158-700

2

Log 2

SRV2158-701

3

Log 3

SRV2158-702

4

Burner Assembly

2158-007

5

Log Support

2158-155

6

Glass Door Assembly

GLA-550TR

Y

7

Mesh Assembly

2114-245

Y

8

Louver, Top

2114-161

9

Hood

2115-230

10

Louver, Bottom

2114-156

11

Junction box

4021-013

Exhaust Restrictor

530-299

Y

Y

Y

Gasket Assembly 2115-080

Contains Burner neck, shutter bracket, vent, seal cap, valve plate, and air passage gaskets

Glass Latch Assembly

Pkg of 2

33858/2

Lava Rock

4021-297

Mineral Wool

050-721

Touch Up Paint

TUP-GBK-12

Additional service part numbers appear on following page. Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

Y

2/13 75


DV3732SBi

Service Parts

Beginning Manufacturing Date: Oct 2009 Ending Manufacturing Date: Active

#12 Valve Assembly

12.1 12.2

12.4 12.3 12.13 12.5 12.12

12.6

12.11

12.7

12.8 12.9

12.10

IMPORTANT: THIS IS DATED INFORMATION. When requesting service or replacement parts for your appliance please provide model number and serial number. All parts listed in this manual may be ordered from an authorized dealer. ITEM 12.1

DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Pilot Assembly NG

2090-012

Y

Pilot Assembly LP

2090-013

Y

SRV485-301

Y

Pilot Tube 12.2

3-Hole Grommet

2118-420

12.3

Valve Bracket

2118-104

12.4

Flexible Gas Connector

302-320A

Y

Valve NG

750-500

Y

Valve LP

750-501

Y

12.6

Thermostat Wire

2118-170

Y

12.7

Module

593-592

Y

12.8

Wire Assembly

593-590A

Y

12.9

Flex Tube Assembly

7000-156

Y

12.10

3 Volt Transformer

593-593A

Y

12.11

Battery Pack

593-594A

Y

Orifice NG (#45C)

582-845

Y

Orifice LP (#55C)

582-855

Y

2 in Jumper Wires

2012-206

Y

Conversion Kit NG

NGK-DV3732SB

Y

Conversion Kit LP

12.5

12.12 12.13

76

COMMENTS

Stocked at Depot

LPK-DV3732SB

Y

Regulator NG

NGK-DXV

Y

Regulator LP

LPK-DXV

Y

Pilot Orifice NG

593-528

Y

Pilot Orifice LP

593-527

Y

Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13


D. Contact Information

Hearth & Home Technologies 7571 215th Street West, Lakeville, MN 55044 www.fireside.com

Please contact your Hearth & Home Technologies dealer with any questions or concerns. For the location of your nearest Hearth & Home Technologies dealer, please visit www.fireside.com.

- NOTES ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________

NOTICE DO NOT DISCARD THIS MANUAL • Important operating and maintenance instructions included.

• Read, understand and follow these instructions for safe installation and operation.

• Leave this manual with party responsible for use and operation.

 This product may be covered by one or more of the following patents: (United States) 5601073, 5613487, 5647340, 5890485, 5941237, 6006743, 6019099, 6053165, 6145502, 6374822, 6484712, 6601579, 6769426, 6863064, 7077122, 7098269, 7258116, 7470729, 8147240 or other U.S. and foreign patents pending. 2000-945B Printed in U.S.A. - Copyright 2013 Hearth & Home Technologies • DV3732SBI, DV3732SBIL • 2215-900 Rev. G • 2/13

77


NOTIFICATION OF NEW PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE Revised 2/16

DATE: 2/16/2018 TO: Nationwide Staff

Note: this option will replace the current colonial white mantle

PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE : New arch top fireplace mantle option: We will now offer a new fireplace mantle for our tile surround fireplaces. The mantle will be painted white (staingrade not available). For pricing use our current fireplace option(s) and add $500.00 until this particular option is added to Deacom. See below: Ceramic tile options: Marble Attache in polished travertine or Nero (black galaxy is no longer available)

OPTION PRICE: $ REASON FOR CHANGE: Improve option selection ( ) NEW ITEM ADDED TO LINE: ( ) REPLACES: WHEN USED: WHERE USED:


DATE ORDERED: EXPECTED DATE OF ARRIVAL: AMOUNT OF OLD PRODUCT ON HAND: LOCATION: Plant 4 BEGIN USING: Homes released on or after 2/26/2018 FACTORY # OF FIRST HOUSE USED IN: Plant 4 APPROVED BY AM JDS KC DA 2/25/13 da Approved per staff

TC


Fireplace Surround

Savvy Stone

Includes Rustic Wood Mantel

Modern Marvel Clean and Chic

Arctic Arch

Includes Ceramic Tile Inlay

Actual Material May Differ In Color* Palm Harbor Homes Copyright Š 2018


MAGNUM Vent-Free Fireboxes

Models: MCUF36E-F, MCUF36D-R, MCUF42E-F, MCUF42D-R

WARNINGS If the information in this manual is not followed exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury or loss of life. – Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. – WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS • Do not try to light any appliance. • Do not touch any electrical switch; do not use any phone in your building. • Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. • If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. – Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency or the gas supplier.

Installation and Operating Instructions 264720 MCUF cover For use with a listed gas-fired unvented decorative room heater not to exceed 40,000 BTU/hr. Do Not Build a Wood Fire. Carefully review the instructions supplied with the decorative type unvented room heater for the minimum fireplace size requirement. Do not install an appliance in this firebox unless this firebox meets the minimum dimensions required for the installation.

INSTALLER: Leave this manual with the appliance. CONSUMER: Retain this manual for future reference. 26D4720 10/13 Rev. 11


MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

CONTENTS

PLEASE READ THE INSTALLATION & OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING APPLIANCE. Thank you and congratulations on your purchase of a Vermont Castings Group Vent-Free firebox. IMPORTANT: Read all instructions and warnings carefully before starting installation. Failure to follow these instructions may result in a possible fire hazard and will void the warranty.

Important Safety Information......................................................................................... 3 General Installation Information..................................................................................... 5 Before You Start........................................................................................................... 5 What You Will Need for Installation.............................................................................. 5 Firebox and Framing Dimensions................................................................................ 6 Minimum Hearth Dimensions....................................................................................... 6 Firebox Location............................................................................................................... 7 Clearances and Height Requirements............................................................................ 7 Fireplace Framing............................................................................................................ 9 Gas Line Installation...................................................................................................... 10 Canopy Installation.........................................................................................................11 Combustion Air............................................................................................................... 12 Optional Equipment....................................................................................................... 15 Brass or Chrome Trim................................................................................................ 15 Optional Wide Canopy............................................................................................... 15 Forced Air Kit............................................................................................................. 15 Replacement Parts......................................................................................................... 16 Warranty.......................................................................................................................... 19



26D4720


IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox OWNER

Please leave these instructions with the appliance.

Please retain these instructions for future reference.

WARNING

INSTALLER

• Any change to this heater or its controls can be dangerous. • Improper installation or use of the heater can cause serious injury or death from fire, burns, explosion or carbon monoxide poisoning.

• Do not allow fans to blow directly into the fireplace. Avoid any drafts that alter burner flame patterns.

• Do not use a blower insert, heat exchanger insert or other accessory, not approved for use with this heater where applicable.

1. Due to high temperatures, the appliance should be

located out of traffic and away from furniture and draperies. 2. Children and adults should be alerted to the hazard of high surface temperature and should stay away to avoid burns or clothing ignition. 3. Young children should be carefully supervised when they are in the same room with the appliance. 4. Do not place clothing or other flammable material on or near the appliance. 5. Any safety screen or guard removed for servicing an appliance, must be replaced prior to operating the heater. 6. Installation and repair should be done by a qualified service person. 7. To prevent malfunction and/or sooting, an unvented gas heater should be cleaned before use at least annually by a professional service person. More frequent cleaning may be required due to excessive lint from carpeting, bedding material, etc. It is imperative that control compartments, burners and circulating air passageways be kept clean.

8. CARBON MONOXIDE POISONING: Early signs of carbon monoxide poisoning are similar to the flu with headaches, dizziness and/or nausea. If you have these signs, obtain fresh air immediately. Have the heater serviced as it may not be operating properly. 9. The installation must conform with local codes or, in the absence of local codes, with the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.l/NFPA54. 10. This unit complies with ANSI Z21.91 ventless firebox enclosures for gas-fired unvented decorative room heaters. 11. Do not install heater in a bathroom or bedroom. 12. Correct installation of the logs, proper location of the heater, and annual cleaning are necessary to avoid potential problems with sooting. Sooting, resulting from improper installation or operation, can settle on surfaces outside the fireplace. See log placement instructions for proper installation. 26D4720

13. Avoid any drafts that alter burner flame patterns. Do not allow fans to blow directly into fireplace. Do not place a blower inside burn area of firebox. Ceiling fans may create drafts that alter burner flame patterns. Sooting and improper burning will occur. 14. Caution: Candles, incense, oil lamps, etc. produce combustion byproducts including soot. Vent-free appliances will not filter or clean soot produced by these types of products. In addition, the smoke and/or aromatics (scents) may be reburnt in the vent-free appliance which can produce odors. It is recommended to minimize the use of candles, incense, etc. while the vent-free appliance is in operation. 15. An unvented gas-fired heater uses air (oxygen) from the room in which it is installed. Provisions for adequate combustion and ventilation air must be provided. See installation guidelines. 16. Keep room area clear and free from combustible materials, gasoline and other flammable vapors and liquids. 17. Unvented gas heaters are a supplemental zone heater. They are not intended to be a primary heating appliance. 18. Unvented gas heaters emit moisture into the living area. In most homes of average construction, this does not pose a problem. In houses of extremely tight construction, additional mechanical ventilation is recommended. 19. During manufacturing, fabricating and shipping, various components of this appliance are treated with certain oils, films or bonding agents. These chemicals are not harmful but may produce annoying smoke and smells as they are burned off during the initial operation of the appliance; possibly causing headaches, or eye or lung irritation. This is a normal and temporary occurrence. The initial break-in operation should last two to three hours with the burner at the highest setting. Provide maximum ventilation by opening windows or doors to allow odors to dissipate. Any odors remaining after this initial break-in period will be slight and will disappear with continued use. 


MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

WARNING

20. Input ratings are shown in BTU per hour and are for elevations up to 2,000 feet. For elevations above 2,000 feet, input ratings should be reduced 4 percent for each 1,000 feet above sea level. Refer to the National Fuel Gas Code. 21. The appliance and its appliance main gas valve must be disconnected from the gas supply piping system during any pressure testing of that system at test pressures in excess of 1/2 psig (3.5 kPa). 22. The appliance must be isolated from the gas supply piping system by closing its equipment shutoff valve during any pressure testing of the gas supply piping system at test pressures equal to or less than 1/2 psig (3.5 kPa). 23. Do not use this room heater if any part has been under water. Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the room heater and to replace any part of the control system and any gas control which has been under water. 24. Never burn solid fuels in a fireplace where a unvented room heater is installed. 25. Always have a fireplace screen in place when the appliance is in operation, and unless other provisions for combustion air are provided, the screen shall have an opening(s) for induction of combustion air. 26. Do not fill spaces around the firebox with insulation or other materials. These spaces must be maintained to prevent the firebox from coming in contact with combustible materials.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY It is normal for fireplaces fabricated of steel to give off some expansion and/or contraction noises during the start up or cool down cycle. Similar noises are found with your furnace heat exchanger or car engine.

IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY It is not unusual for gas fireplace to give off some odor the first time it is burned. This is due to the manufacturing process. Please ensure that your room is well ventilated during burn off — open all windows. It is recommended that you burn your fireplace for at least ten (10) hours the first time you use it. Place the fan switch in the “OFF” position during this time.

Never connect unit to private (non-utility) gas wells. This gas is commonly known as wellhead gas.

Nous recommandons que nos appareils de chauffage au gaz soient installés et entretenus par des professionnels qui ont été accrédités aux È.U. par le National Fireplace Institute ® (NFI) comme étant des spécialistes du NFI en matièred’appareils de chauffage au gaz.



26D4720


Do not attempt to burn solid wood fuels, vented gas log sets, or any other combustible in this unvented firebox. Also, do not install a vent-free gas log set in this firebox if the minimum clearance and height requirements of the log set are too large for the firebox.

The MCUF36 and MCUF42 Series are vent-free fireboxes. They feature a self contained heat-circulating system. This installation manual will enable you to obtain a safe, efficient and dependable installation of your vent-free firebox. Do not alter or modify the firebox or its components under any circumstances. Any modification or alteration of the firebox system, including but not limited to the firebox and accessories, may void the warranty, listings and approvals of this system and could result in an unsafe and potentially dangerous installation.

BEFORE YOU START Carefully inspect the contents for shipping damage. If any parts are missing or damaged, immediately inform the dealer from whom you purchased the appliance. Do not attempt to install any part of the appliance unless you have all the parts in good condition. Make sure you have received all parts Check your packing list to verify that all listed parts have been received. You should have the following: 1. Vent-Free Gas Firebox 2. Canopy 3. Installation and Operating Instructions 4. Five (5) sheet metal screws for canopy

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

NOTICE

WARNING

GENERAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION

Illustrations shown in this manual reflect “typical” installations with nominal dimensions and are for design and framing reference only. Actual installations may vary due to individual design preferences. However, always maintain minimum clearances to combustible materials and do not violate any specific installation requirements.

In planning the installation for the appliance it is necessary to determine where the unit is to be installed and whether optional accessories are desired. Gas supply piping should also be planned. The following steps represent the normal sequence of installation. Each installation is unique, however, and might require a different sequence. 1. Position firebox prior to framing or into prepared framing. 2. Field wire main power supply to models with fan kit. (Electrical connections should only be performed by an experienced, licensed /certified tradesman). 3. Plumb gas line. (Gas connections should only be performed by an experienced, licensed/certified tradesman). 4. Install vent-free gas log heater per the instructions provided with the vent-free gas log heater. 5. Complete finish wall material, surround and optional hearth extension to your individual taste.

What you will need for installation TOOLS and BUILDING SUPPLIES

• Phillips screwdriver • Square • Framing materials • Hammer • Saw and / or sabersaw • Tee joint • Level • Pipe wrench • Measuring tape • Pliers • Electric drill and bits • Fireplace surround materials (noncombustible) • Caulking material (noncombustible) • Piping complying with local codes • Wall finishing materials • Pipe sealant approved for use with propane/L.P.G.

(resistant to sulfur compounds) Refer to the installation instructions provided with the log sets for items required for log set installation. 26D4720




FIREBOX, HEARTH and FRAMING DIMENSIONS

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

Min. Rough Opening  Depth

D F J

I E

C

L

H - Min.  Rough Opening Width

J

K

Min. Rough Opening Height 556M” 376M” 376 ”

3256 ” 2656M" 256O”

256O”

Ref. A B C D E F G H I J K L

MCUF36 41Z\v" 36" 18Z\v" 32" 20C\v" 27Z\v" 33M\," 41Z\v" 17C\v" 48C\v" 68M\," 34Z\x"

856M”

6”

Figure 1 Firebox and Framing Dimensions

G B A

MCUF42 47" 42" 18Z\v" 38" 20C\v" 33Z\v" 39M\," 47Z\v" 17C\v" 53" 74M\," 37Z\x"

96M”

A

D

E

264720 MCUF dims

C B

Ref. MCUF36E-F MCUF36D-R MCUF42E-F MCUF42D-R A 26Z\v" 25C\v" 32Z\v" 31C\v" FP2686 B 15" 14C\v" 15" 14C\v" hearth dims C 32B\," 31Z\," 38B\," 38Z\," D 25" 25" 25" 25" E 20Z\x" 20Z\x" 20Z\x" 20Z\x"

Figure 2 Minimum Hearth Dimensions



26D4720


FIREBOX LOCATION and CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

location of firebox

MINIMUM CLEARANCES

Carefully select the best location for installation of your vent-free firebox. The following factors should be taken into consideration:

Ensure that minimum clearances shown in Figures 4 through 7 are maintained. Left and right clearances are determined when facing the front of the firebox.

• Clearance to side wall, ceiling, woodwork and windows.

Follow these instructions carefully to ensure safe installation. Failure to follow these requirements may create a fire hazard.

• • • • • •

Refer to “Clearances/Height Requirements on Page 8. Minimum clearances to combustibles must be maintained. Location must not be affected by drafts caused by kitchen exhaust fans, ceiling fans, return air registers for forced air furnaces / air conditioners, windows or doors. Installation must provide adequate ventilation and combustion air. Location should be out of high traffic or windy or drafty areas. DO NOT INSTALL WHERE CURTAINS, FURNITURE, CLOTHING OR OTHER FLAMMABLE OBJECTS ARE LESS THAN 42" FROM FRONT OF HEATER. Never obstruct the front opening of the vent-free firebox or restrict the flow of combustion and ventilation air. Minimize modifications to existing construction. Refer to Figure 3 below for location suggestions. Do not install in the vicinity where gasoline or other flammable liquids may be stored. The vent-free firebox must be kept clear and free from these combustible materials.

1. Sidewall clearances: The clearance from the inside of the appliance to any combustible wall should not be less than 6". Figure 4 2. Ceiling clearance: The ceiling must be at least 42” from the top of the firebox opening. Figure 4 3. Back wall clearance: The appliance may be placed against a combustible back wall.

Mi 42" nim um

Mi 6" nim um

Mi 6" nim um

FP2687

Figure 4 Clearance and Height Requirements

FP2687

4. Floor clearance: This inner chamber firebox floor must minimum clearances be installed at least 6" above any combustible flooring material, such as carpeting or asphalt tile, which is closer than 14" to the base of the firebox. Figure 5 Or The inner chamber firebox floor may be installed nearer to the floor if a minimum of 14" of noncombustible material such as slate or marble is installed between the base of the firebox and the combustible flooring. Figure 6 Figure 3 Possible Firebox Locations

FP2440 fireplace locations 26D4720




CLEARANCE and HEIGHT REQUIREMENTS

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

12â&#x20AC;? 10â&#x20AC;? 23â&#x20AC;?

8â&#x20AC;? 21â&#x20AC;?

6â&#x20AC;? Combustible Material

19â&#x20AC;?

256Oâ&#x20AC;? 16â&#x20AC;? 12â&#x20AC;?

FP2688

6" Minimum

Figure 5 Minimum Clearance above Combustible Flooring

FP2842

Figure 7a Mantel Clearances

FP2688 min floor combustible

12â&#x20AC;?

8â&#x20AC;?

14â&#x20AC;?

FP2842 8â&#x20AC;? Mantel clearances

FP2691

May be Less than 6"

Noncombustible Material

Figure 7b Mantel Clearances for Wide Profile Canopy Only

FP2691 mantel clear wide canopy

FP2689

14â&#x20AC;? Minimum Figure 6 Minimum Clearances above Combustible Flooring with Noncombustible Material Installed at Base of Fireplace FP2689 5. Mantel clearances: The canopy supplied with the unit must be installed. min floor clear noncomb If a combustible mantel is installed, it must meet the clearance requirements as shown in Figure 7a. However, if lower mantel height is desired, refer to Figure 7b. NOTE: The Vermont Castings Group Barrington Cabinet Mantel Model series BWC300, BWC400 and BWC500 are specially designed to comply with all mantel temperature requirements. Any custom-built mantel must comply with all clearance requirements shown in this instruction manual.



Finish Wall

Fireplace

Combustible Material Area

1â&#x20AC;?

Hood

256Oâ&#x20AC;? 3â&#x20AC;?

FP2692

56Oâ&#x20AC;? 56Oâ&#x20AC;? 56Oâ&#x20AC;?

45°

5â&#x20AC;? 6â&#x20AC;?

Figure 8 Mantel Leg Clearance

FP2692 mantel leg clearance 26D4720


FIREBOX FRAMING Firebox framing can be built before or after the appliance is set in place. Construct firebox framing following Figure 1. Refer to Figure 1 on Page 6 for firebox dimensions. The framing headers may rest on the top of the firebox. The firebox may be installed directly on a combustible floor or raised on a platform of an appropriate height. When the firebox is installed directly on carpeting, tile, or other combustible material, other than wood flooring, the firebox shall be installed on a metal or wood panel extending the full width and depth of the enclosure.

WARNING

Combustibles may not come any closer to the top of the enclosure than the standoffs will allow.

WARNING

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

The fireplace must be installed giving full consideration to the clearance and height requirements identified in this manual.

When finishing a custom cabinet, mantel, or other built-in enclosure, the opening size to accommodate the fireplace with trim installed is as follows: A B

MCUF36 w/Trim 42" 38Z\,"

MCUF42 w/Trim 47C\v" 38Z\,"

Do not fill spaces around firebox with insulation or other materials. This could cause a fire. A

1. Bend out the nailing flanges located on each side of the firebox. 2. Slide the firebox into prepared framing or position firebox in its final position and frame later. 3. Level the firebox by checking the top edge of the firebox. Shim if necessary. 4. Anchor firebox to the side framing members using 8d nails or other suitable fasteners. Figure 9 5. The canopy must be installed for safe operation of the heater. Refer to Page 11 for canopy installation details.

B

FP2694

Figure 10 Custom Cabinet FP2694 custom cabinet

Nail Sides Through Nailing Flanges

Figure 9 Side Nailing Flanges

26D4720

FP2693 nailing flanges

FP2693




GAS LINE INSTALLATION

Consult all local codes. All gas piping must be installed to comply with local codes, or in the absence of local codes, with the latest edition of the National Fuel Gas Code ANSI Z223.1/NFPA54. Remove the baseplate for ease of gas line installation. Remove three (3) screws along the front edge of the baseplate. Remove four (4) screws which secure the baseplate to the combustion casing (two at rear and one along each side). Replace baseplate prior to connecting gas line to heater. Consult heater installation and operating instructions for correct installation of the heater into the firebox.

WARNING

Plumbing connections should only be performed by a qualified, licensed plumber. Main gas supply must be off when plumbing gas line to fireplace or performing service.

Connecting directly to an unregulated propane / L.P.G. tank can cause an explosion.

WARNING

WARNING

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

Do not connect directly to natural gas 1/2 PSI or 2 PSI systems. Always make sure natural gas pressure is regulated 10.5 w.c. (maximum before operating the unit).

After completing connection, test all gas joints from the gas meter to the gas heater regulator for leaks. Using soap and water solution or a gas sniffer. DO NOT USE AN OPEN FLAME.

The 1/2" gas line may enter either from the left side or right side of the firebox. Gas access holes are provided on both sides of the firebox. A listed manual shutoff valve must be installed upstream of the appliance. A union tee and plugged 1/8" NPT pressure tapping point should be installed upstream of hte appliance. IMPORTANT: Install main gas valve (equipment shutoff valve) in an accessible location. The main gas valve is for turning on or shutting off the gas to the fireplace. A sediment trap may be upstream of the heater to prevent moisture and contaminants from passing through trap to the heater controls and burners. Failure to do so could prevent the heater from operating reliably. Consult applicable codes. An external regulator must be used on all propane / L.P.G. heaters, in addition to the regulator fitted to the heater, to reduce the supply tank pressure to 13" w.c. (maximum). Any copper tubing used to supply propane / L.P.G. from the tank must be internally tinned. NOTE: When connecting propane / L.P.G. vent-free room heaters, you must use pipe sealant resistant to propane / L.P.G. IMPORTANT: Hold heater regulator with a wrench to prevent movement when connecting to inlet piping. Check gas type: The gas supply must be the same as stated on the heaterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s rating plate. If the gas supply is different, DO NOT INSTALL THE HEATER. Contact your dealer for the correct model.

10

26D4720


CANOPY INSTALLATION

WARNING

A canopy is furnished with each firebox and MUST be installed for safe operation. Figure 11

The firebox canopy must not be modified or replaced with a canopy that may be provided with the unvented decorative room heater.

WARNING

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

Close fireplace screen panel before operating a decorative type unvented room heater.

1. Remove the three (3) screws from the top front frame assembly. Also remove the two (2) screws on the side frames. Figure 11 2. Align the canopy with the holes in the top frame. 3. Replace the screws previously removed. 4. Tighten side screws. Make sure the canopy is level and secure. Hood

FP2695

Screws

Figure 11 Canopy Installation

FP2695 install canopy

26D4720

11


OPTIONAL AK-4 OUTSIDE AIR KIT

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox Combustion Air 1. Locate combustion air assembly at an exterior location which is not likely to be accidentally blocked in any manner. Locate assembly a min. of 12" above the snow line to prevent blockage by snow accumulation. 2. Never mount the combustion air inlet assembly in a garage or storage area where combustible fumes such as gasoline might be drawn into the fireplace. 3. Combustion air can be drawn from the crawl space under a house when an adequate supply of air is provided by open ventilation. 4. CAUTION: Do not take combustion air from attic space or garage space. 5. Locate air supply inlet at least 3' away from any appliance vent terminal. 6. Avoid extremely long runs and numerous turns in the duct leading from the fireplace to the combustion air assembly. These conditions increase the resistance to the free flow of air through the duct. Refer to Figures 12 through 15 for methods of installing the outside air for combustion assemblies.

8’ Max

Inlet Grille in Soffit (Overhang)

FP2844

Figure 13 Concrete Slab Installation (Optional Outside Air Runs) Duct Extended to Miss Joist

FP2844 OA concrete slab

To Outside Wall

Figure 14 Installation Above Basement or Crawl Space

Above Snow Level

FP2845

FP2845 crawl space

Outside Wall OA

FP2843

Ground Level

Figure 12 Basement Installation

FP2846

FP2843 OA basement Figure 15 45° Corner Installation on Slab Floor

26D4720

12

FP2846 OA corner install


WARNING

OPTIONAL AK-4 OUTSIDE AIR KIT

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

DO NOT remove the cover if the outside air will not be connected.

Screws Air Starting Collar Duct

The use of outside air for combustion is optional unless required by building codes. It is only necessary to supply outside combustion air to one side of the fireplace. Use the model AK4 combustion air kit.

Model AK-4 Combustion Air Assembly 1. Remove the cover plate from the 4" outlet opening location on the left or right outside of the fireplace. 2. Place the insulation ring between the AK-4 starting collar and fireplace wall. 3. Place the starting collar (4") into the hole on the side of fireplace. Fasten it in place with the four sheet metal screws provided. Figures 16 and 17 NOTE: The air starting collar extends through the fireplace outer wrap. When the air starting collar is securely attached, it will form a seal against the fireplace wall. 4. Attach outside duct to starting collar with duct clamp or screws. Figure 17

Left Side of Fireplace

FP2700

Figure 17 Attach Outside Duct to Starting Collar

FP2700 duct opening for model AK-4 in the 5. Cut a 6-inchOA diameter

outside wall covering where the outside vent is to be located. Figure 18 6. Select and cut a piece of duct long enough to attach to the fireplace and stick out at least 3" beyond the face of the wall to which the AK-4 inlet air vent will be attached. Figure 17

Insulation Ring 6" Diameter Hole Duct Extending 3" Min.

Shorter End of Air Starting Collar

Left Side of Fireplace

WARNING

Nail Hole

Sheet Meal AK-4 Starting Screws Collar

Figure 16 Attach Outside Air Starting Collar and Insulation Ring to Left Side of Fireplace

FP1900 OA start collar Use FP-4 U duct for maximum efficiency 8/08 and safety. Do not use a combustible duct.

Always use UL Listed Class 0 or 1 duct material.

26D4720

Screws

FP1904

AK-4 Inlet Air Vent

Figure 18 Combustion Air Assembly for Model AK-4

Screws

FP1904 AK4 install 8/08

13


MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox 7. If the duct is the insulated type, push the insulation back from one end of the duct approximately 2". Figure 19 8. Slip the exposed end of the duct over the starting collar on the fireplace. 9. Using the sheet metal screws provided, secure the duct end to the collar attached to the fireplace. 10.Nail or screw the combustion air assembly to the surface of the wall. NOTE: If the wall covering is brick or stone, use appropriate masonry fasteners. If necessary, splice the duct. Use a model 403-duct connector to splice duct sections.

OPTIONAL AK-4 OUTSIDE AIR KIT Insulation

Approximately 2”  Duct Connector

FP1907

Duct

Install model 403 duct connector 1. Push insulation back approximately 2" from the end of each duct. 2. Slip each duct over duct connector until an equal length of connector extends into each duct. 3. Place duct clamp over the end of each duct. Tighten duct clamp down snuggly. 4. Push insulation back into place and over duct clamp.

14

Duct Clamp

Figure 19 Install Duct Connector 403

FP1907 Duct connector 8/08

26D4720


OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

Brass or Chrome Trim

Forced Air Kit (BLOTMC) If you are installing the forced air kit, Model BLOTMC, on MCUF36 or MCUF42 models, refer to the installation instructions provided with the kit for electrical wiring requirements, or the blower installation section. The firebox must be connected to main power supply at time of firebox installation. The blower must be installed prior to the installation of the vent-free heater. The electrical connections must be made before the firebox is framed and enclosed in the finished walls. Any of the original wire as supplied with the fireplace must be replaced. Contact dealer for proper replacement wiring harness. (see parts list for part number). 120 volts, 60Hz, 1 amp. Electrical power cord (plug) can be routed to exit the MCUF36/MCUF42 on either the left side or the right side. Remove cord protector from side of unit, route power cord through hole opposite side. Reinstall cord protector. IMPORTANT: Always check local building codes. The installation must comply with local regulations as well as the national electric codes. Fan Switch

WARNING

The optional wide canopy can be installed. See installation instructions provided with kit.

WARNING

Optional wide canopy

WARNING

Optional brass trim kits can be used with unit when installed as a free standing fireplace with wood surround.

Electrical connections should only be performed by a qualified, licensed electrician, main power must be off when connecting to main electrical power supply or performing service. The blower when installed, must be electrically grounded in accordance with local codes or in the absence of local codes, with the National Electrical Code ANSI Z.223.1/NFPA 70. This fireplace has a three-prong, grounded electrical plug. This plug helps protect you against electrical shock. Only connect plug to a properly grounded, three-prong receptacle. Do not cut or remove the grounded prong from this plug.

Never attempt to service heater while it is plugged in, operating, or hot. Burns and/or electrical shock could result.

Thermostat Control

OFF 110/115V AC

Blower Motor Black

ON Black

White Green Figure 20 BLOTMC Wiring Diagram

JUNCTION BOX WIRING

1. This should be done before framing the fireplace. Wire the receptacle into an electrical circuit. Wire with minimum 60° C wire in accordance with prevailing codes. 2. Remove the external junction box cover by removing FP2847 the screw from the side of the outside firebox wall. BLOTMC wiring Junction box was installed at the factory. 3. The junction box cover has a factory installed “romex” style strain relief connector. After connecting the wires, Junction Box route the wire leads through this connector. Refer to Figure 21 the wiring diagram in Figure 21.

120V AC 60Hz Factory Supplied Not Supplied

Junction Box Wiring Diagram

15

26D4720

FP1912 Junction box wiring


REPLACEMENT PARTS

MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox 4

4b 6

4c 4a 1

3 5

2

Ref. 1. 2. 3. 4. 4a. 4b. 4c. 1. 1. 5. 6. 6. 6. 7.

16

Description Qty. Canopy 1 Screen Panel 2 Screen Rod 2 Brick Set 1 Right Side Brick 1 Rear Brick 1 Left Side Brick 1 Accessories Standard Brass Canopy 1 Wide Brass Canopy 1 Blower w/Rheostat 1 Brass Trim Curved Design 1 Pewter Trim Curved Design 1 Black Trim Curved Design 1 Outside Air Kit (not shown) 1

MCUF36E-F 71D0500 264720 26D4562 MCUF parts 26D0132K 20302364 20302359 20302360 20302361 BRCU36 BRC36 BLOTMC BRTKM36 PWTKM36 BLTKM36 AK-4

MCUF36D-R 71D0500 26D4562 26D0132K 71D3009 71D3011 71D3010 71D3012

MCUF42E-F 71D1000 26D4562 26D0133K 20302366 20302359 20302365 20302361

MCUF42D-R 71D1000 26D4562 26D0133K 71D3503 71D3011 71D3504 71D3012

BRCU36 BRC36 BLOTMC BRTKM36 PWTKM36 BLTKM36 AK-4

BRCU42 BRC42 BLOTMC BRTKM42 PWTKM42 BLTKM42 AK-4

BRCU42 BRC42 BLOTMC BRTKM42 PWTKM42 BLTKM42 AK-4

26D4720


MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

26D4720

17


MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox

18

26D4720


MCUF Series Vent-Free Firebox LIMITED LIFETIME WARRANTY POLICY The following components are warranted for life to the original owner, subject of proof of purchase: Firebox, Combustion Chamber, Heat Exchanger, Grate, and Stainless Steel Burners.

Five Year Warranty The following components are warranted for 5 years to the original owner, subject of proof of purchase: Vent Free Ceramic Fiber Logs, Catalytic Filter and Aluminized Burners.

Basic Warranty Vermont Castings Group warrants the components and materials in your gas appliance to be free from manufacturing and material defects for a period of two years from date of installation. After installation, if any of the components manufactured by Vermont Castings Group in the appliance are found to be defective in materials or workmanship, Vermont Castings Group will, at its option, replace or repair the defective components at no charge to the original owner. Vermont Castings Group will also pay for reasonable labor costs incurred in replacing or repairing such components for a period of two years from the date of installation. Any products presented for warranty repair must be accompanied by a dated proof of purchase. This Limited Lifetime Warranty will be void if the appliance is not installed by a qualified installer in accordance with the installation instructions. The Limited Lifetime Warranty will also be void if the appliance is not operated and maintained according to the operating instructions supplied with the appliance, and does not extend to (1) firebox/burner assembly damage by accident, neglect, misuse, abuse, alteration, negligence of others, including the installation thereof by unqualified installers, (2) the costs of removal, reinstallation or transportation of defective parts on the appliance, or (3) incidental or consequential damage. All service work must be performed by an authorized service representative. This warranty is expressly in lieu of other warranties, express or implied, including the warranty of merchantability of fitness for purpose and of all other obligations or liabilities. Vermont Castings Group does not assume for it any other obligations or liability in connection with the sale or use of the appliance. In states that do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow exclusion of indirect damage, those limitations of exclusions may not apply to you. You may also have additional rights not covered in this Limited Lifetime Warranty. Vermont Castings Group reserves the right to investigate any and all claims against the Limited Lifetime Warranty and decide upon method of settlement.

IF WARRANTY SERVICE IS NEEDED... 1. Contact your supplier. Make sure you have your warranty, your sales receipt and the model/ serial number of your Vermont Castings Group product. 2. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DO ANY SERVICE WORK YOURSELF.

26D4720

19


Vermont Castings Group 149 Cleveland Drive â&#x20AC;¢ Paris, Kentucky 40361 www.vermontcastingsgroup.com


Installation Manual

Installation and Fireplace Setup INSTALLER: Leave this manual with party responsible for use and operation. OWNER: Retain this manual for future reference.

NOTICE: DO NOT discard this manual!

Model(s): MEL36 MEL42

WARNING: If the information in these instructions is not followed exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury, or death. • DO NOT store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. • DO NOT overfire. Overfiring will void your warranty. • Comply with all minimum clearances to combustibles as specified. Failure to comply may cause house fire.

WARNING HOT SURFACES! Glass and other surfaces are hot during operation AND cool down. Hot glass will cause burns. • DO NOT touch glass until it is cooled • NEVER allow children to touch glass • Keep children away • CAREFULLY SUPERVISE children in same room as fireplace. • Alert children and adults to hazards of high temperatures.

WOODBURNING FIREPLACE Manufactured Home Approved

Installation and service of this fireplace should be performed by qualified personnel. Hearth & Home Technologies recommends NFI certified professionals, or technicians supervised by an NFI certified professional.

High temperatures may ignite clothing or other flammable materials. • Keep clothing, furniture, draperies and other flammable materials away.

WARNING Fire Risk. For use with solid wood fuel only. Other fuels may overfire and generate poisonous gases (i.e. carbon monoxide).

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

1


Safety Alert Key: DANGER! Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided will result in death or serious injury. WARNING! Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION! Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. NOTICE: Indicates practices which may cause damage to the fireplace or to property.

• • • •

Table of Contents 1 Product Specific & Important Safety Information A. Fireplace Certification B. Non-Combustible Materials C. Combustible Materials

2 Getting Started

A. Typical Fireplace System B. Design and Installation Considerations 1. Selecting Fireplace Locations 2. Locating Fireplace & Chimney C. Tools and Supplies Needed D. Inspect Fireplace and Components E. Fireplace System Requirements

3 Framing and Clearances

A. Fireplace Dimensions B. Clearances Minimum Clearances to Combustibles C. Frame the Fireplace D. Secure and Level the Fireplace E. Protective Metal Hearth Strips F. Install Outside Air Kit

4 Chimney and Termination Requirements A. Chimney Requirements B. Offsets/Returns C. Termination Requirements

5 Chimney Installation

A. Typical Chimney System B. Assemble Chimney Sections C. Roof Penetration D. Thimble Instalation E. Install Ceiling Firestops F. Install Attic Insulation Shield G. Termination Cap Requirements

2

3 3 3 4 6 6 6 6 6 6

7 8 8 9 9 10 10

6 Finishing

A. Finishing Material B. Hearth Extension, Building and Finishing 1.Hearth Extension 4” or more below fireplace Opening 2. Hearth Extension less than 4” below fireplace Opening C. Non-Combustible Sealant Material D. Mantel and Wall Projections E. Sidewalls/Surrounds

7 Fireplace Setup

A. Gas Log/Lighter Provision B. Wood Burning Inserts

8 Reference Materials

A. Chimney Components B. Optional Components

11 12 13 14 15 15 16 17 18 18

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

19 20 21 21 21 22 23 24 24 25 27


1

Product Specific & Important Safety Information

A. Fireplace Certification

B. Non-Combustible Materials

If installed with a gas log set, provisions for the National Fuel Gas Code must be met.

• Materials which will not ignite and burn, composed of any combination of the following: - Steel - Iron - Brick - Tile - Concrete - Slate - Glass - Plasters • Materials reported as passing ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials, in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750° C

This fireplace complies with the installation requirements for HUD.

C. Combustible Materials

This fireplace system has been tested and listed in accordance with UL 127 and ULC-S610 standards by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for installation and operation in the United States and Canada. This fireplace may be installed in manufactured homes, except in sleeping rooms.

CAUTION! The structural integrity of the manufactured home floor, wall, and celing/roof must be maintained. Heatilator is a registered trademark of Hearth & Home Technologies. Warning! Risk of Fire! Hearth & Home Technologies disclaims any responsibility for, and the warranty and agency listing will be voided by the following actions.

• Materials made of or surfaced with any of the following materials: - Wood - Compressed paper - Plant fibers - Plastic - Plywood/OSB - Sheet rock (drywall) • Any material that can ignite and burn; flame proofed or not, plastered or un-plastered

DO NOT: • install or operate damaged fireplace • modify fireplace • install other than as instructed by Hearth & Home Technologies • operate the fireplace without fully assembling all components • overfire • install unvented gas log set • install any component not approved by Hearth & Home Technologies • install parts or components not Listed or approved Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service or maintenance can cause injury or property damage. For assistance or additional information, consult a qualified installer, service agency or your dealer.

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

3


2

Getting Started

A. Typical Fireplace System Additional lateral support for chimney above roof (or enclosed in chase) if needed Non-combustible roof flashing maintains minimum clearance around chimney

Termination cap Roof Flashing

Storm Collar Chimney penetrates roof preferably without affecting roof rafters

Support straps on rafter support chimney (not shown)

Offset & Return (with hanger straps) Attic insulation shield or thimble (not shown) must be used here to keep insulation away from chimney if attic is insulated

Ceiling firestop on floor of attic Chimney system

Framing headed off in ceiling joists

Combustible framing/header on top of V-shaped standoffs

Enclosed space above and around fireplace Mantel and surround

))))) )))))))))))))))) )))

Decorative facing and trim Hearth extension

Outside combustion air

Factory-built fireplace Protective metal hearth strip(s)

Figure 2.1 Typical Fireplace System

4

*Glass doors not shown.

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


B. Design and Installation Considerations

outlets or returns, or other locations of considerable air movement can affect the performance.

Notice: Check building codes prior to installation.

Outside air must be used for combustion. This fireplace comes equipped with the necessary components. Consideration should be given to these factors before deciding on a location.

• Installation MUST comply with applicable local, regional, state and national codes and regulations. • Consult insurance carrier, local building inspector, fire officials or authorities having jurisdiction over restrictions, installation inspection and permits. • Before installing, determine the following: - Where the fireplace is to be installed. - The vent system configuration to be used. - Gas supply piping. - Electrical wiring. - Framing and finishing details. Note: A raised hearth extension built flush with the fireplace opening or less than 4 in. (102 mm) below the fireplace opening requires the fireplace be installed on a non=combustible surface.

NOTICE: In addition to these framing dimensions, also reference the following section: • Clearances (Section 3). NOTICE: • Illustrations and photos reflect typical installations and are FOR DESIGN PURPOSES ONLY. • Illustrations/diagrams are not drawn to scale. • Actual installation/appearance may vary due to individual design preference. • Hearth & Home Technologies reserves the right to alter its products.

1. Selecting Fireplace Locations This fireplace may be used as a room divider, installed along a wall or across a corner. See Figure 2.2. Locating the fireplace in a basement should be avoided. Locating near frequently opened doors, central heat G

Note: 1/2 in. (13 mm) min. air space from fireplace to combustible materials.

F

* 8 in. (203 mm) extra space included for outside air connection. If outside air duct has no bend, this dimension may be reduced as long as minimum clearances are met.

I A

C

Across a corner

E H As a room divider Along a wall

D A

I

B*

48 in. (1219 mm) minimum

1/2 in. (13 mm) all configurations

A H

Note: Measurements are FRAMING dimensions only and do not include drywall either in the cavity or on the interior walls. Model ME L36 ME L42

inches mm inches mm

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

42 1067 48 1219

50 1270 56 1422

67 7/ 8 1724 73 7/ 8 1876

59 1/ 2 1511 65 1/ 2 1664

34 864 37 1/ 4 946

14 356 14 356

48 1219 52 1/ 4 1327

21 1/ 2 546 21 1/ 2 546

I 12 in. (305 mm) Minimum from FP opening to any perpendicular wall.

Figure 2.2 Fireplace Locations

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

5


2. Locating Fireplace & Chimney Location of the fireplace and chimney will affect performance. To reduce spillage of combustion products into the living space avoid: • Install within the warm airspace enclosed by the building envelope. This helps to produce more draft, especially during lighting and die-down of the fire. • Penetrate the highest part of the roof. This minimizes the effects of wind loading. • Minimize the use of chimney offsets. • Consider the fireplace location relative to floor and ceiling and attic joists. Negative pressure in the structure can cause spillage of combustion products into the living space. To minimize effects of negative pressure: • Ensure adequate outdoor air for all combustion appliances and exhaust equipment. • Ensure furnace and air conditioning return vents are not located in the immediate vicinity of the fireplace. • Avoid installing the fireplace near doors, walkways or small isolated spaces. • Recessed lighting should be a “sealed can” design.

C. Tools and Supplies Needed Before beginning the installation be sure the following tools and building supplies are available: Reciprocating saw

Framing material

Pliers

Non-combustible sealant

Hammer

Gloves

Phillips screwdriver

Framing square

Flat blade screwdriver

Electric drill and bits

Plumb line

Safety glasses

Level

Tape measure

D. Inspect Fireplace and Components Warning! Risk of Fire and/or Explosion! Damaged parts could impair safe operation. Do NOT install damaged, incomplete or substitute components. Keep fireplace dry. • Remove fireplace and components from packaging and inspect for damage. • Vent system components are shipped in separate packages. • Report to your dealer any parts damaged in shipment. • Read all the instructions before starting the installation. Follow these instructions carefully during the installation to ensure maximum safety and benefit.

E. Fireplace System Requirements The Heatilator fireplace system requirements consist of the following: • Fireplace - Refractory (included with fireplace) - Firescreen (included with fireplace) - Grate (included with fireplace) - Hearth Extension (required, sold separately) - Glass Doors (included with fireplace) • Outside Air System - Air Inlet (included with fireplace) - Flex (required, included with fireplace) • Chimney System - Chimney air kit (required in Canada, sold separately) - Chimney termination cap (required, sold separately) - MH Thimble Kit (required, sold separately) • Non-combustible finish material

1/2-3/4 in. length, #6 or #8 self-drilling screws Misc. screws and nails

6

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


3

Framing and Clearances

A. Fireplace Dimensions

C

7.37 in. (187 mm)

D

21.37 in. (543 mm)

B

7.50 in. (191 mm) Outside Air

17.83 in. (453 mm)

21 in. (533 mm)

21 in. (533 mm)

18.75 in. (476 mm)

Gas Knockout

9.25 in. (235 mm)

39.50 in. (1003 mm) Gas Knockout 9.25 in. (235 mm)

7.50 in. (191 mm) A

7.50 in. (191 mm) 13.45 in. (476 mm)

Model # MEL36 MEL42

14.13 in. (359 mm)

A

B

C

D

in.

36

41

23.75

11.87

mm

914

1041

603

302

in.

42

47

29.75

14.87

mm

1067

1194

756

378

7.50 in. (191 mm)

Figure 3.1 Fireplace Dimensions

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

7


B. Clearances

Minimum Clearances to Combustibles

Warning! Risk of Fire!

WITHIN ENCLOSURE AREA

You must comply with all minimum air space clearances to combustibles as specified in Figure 3.2. Do NOT pack required air spaces with insulation or other materials. Framing or finishing material used on the front of, or in front of, the fireplace closer than the minimums listed must be constructed entirely of non-combustible materials (i.e., steel studs, concrete board, etc.). Failure to comply may cause fire.

Fireplace to backwall

1/2 in. (13 mm)

Fireplace to sidewall

1/2 in. (13 mm)

Top standoffs to header

0 in. (0 mm)

Door opening to sidewall

12 in. (305 mm)

MANTEL Mantel minimum height

12 in. (25 mm) from top of opening

Maximum mantel depth

12 in. (305 mm)

Storm Collar f)

(roo

Roof Flashing

Thimble application shown (attic)

(insulation)

(ceiling)

Ceiling Firestop Must have 2 in. (51 mm) minimum clearance to header

Shaded areas represent 2 in. (51 mm) min. air space clearance required around pipe

Combustible Object

0 in. to level of standoffs 1/2 in. (13 mm) to back & sides of appliance 48 in. 1219 mm 0 in. to floor

Figure 3.2 Clearances to Combustible Materials

8

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


C. Frame the Fireplace

Caution! Risk of Cuts/Abrasions. Wear protective gloves and safety glasses during installation. Sheet metal edges are sharp.

Notice: Hearth extension design should be determined before installation of fireplace.

D. Secure and Level the Fireplace

Warning! Risk of Fire! A hearth extension built flush with the fireplace opening or less than 4 in. (102 mm) below the fireplace opening requires the fireplace be installed on a non-combustible surface.

This fireplace may be placed on either a combustible or noncombustible continuous flat surface. Follow the instructions for framing in Section 3. Slide the fireplace into position. Be sure to provide the minimum 1/2 in. air clearance at the sides and back of the fireplace.

Figure 3.3 shows a typical framing of the fireplace, assuming combustible materials are used. All required clearances to combustibles around the fireplace must be adhered to. See Figure 3.2. Any framing across the top of the fireplace must be above the level of the top standoffs.

The fireplace should be positioned so the face of the noncombustible material on the fireplace will be flush with the face of the drywall on the walls. Level the fireplace and shim as necessary.

The finished cavity depth must be no less than 21 1/2 in. (546 mm) from the finished backwall to the outside of front wall framing. WARNING! Risk of Fire! Comply with all minimum clearances specified. • A minimum 1/2 in. (13 mm) air clearance must be maintained at the back and sides of the fireplace assembly. • Chimney sections at any level require a 2 in. (51 mm) minimum air space clearance between the framing and chimney section. • Clearance of Radiation Shield thimble to chimney is set at 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) Warning! Risk of Fire! You must comply with all minimum air space clearances to combustibles. Do NOT pack required air spaces with insulation or other materials.

The fireplace must be secured to the manufactured housing structure to prevent the fireplace from shifting during transportation. This can be done by securing through the nailing flanges on the sides of the fireplace and tabs on the bottom pan. CAUTION! The structual integrity of the manufactured housing floor, wall, ceiling and roof must be maintained. Warning! Risk of Fire! Prevent contact with sagging, loose insulation. • DO NOT install against vapor barriers or exposed insulation. • Secure insulation and vapor barriers. • Provide minimum air space clearances at the sides and back of the fireplace assembly.

2 in. (51 mm) min. air space clearance from chimney.

Fireplace must be set out 1/2 in. (13 mm) in front of the face of the framing material.

1/2 in. (13 mm)

Header MUST NOT be notched! D = extra space needed for outside air connection. If outside air duct has no bend, this dimension may be reduced as long as minimum clearances are met.

C D A

B

Model ME L36 ME L42 *

in. mm in. mm

A

B*

C**

D

42 1067 48 1219

21 1/ 2 546 21 1/ 2 546

39 3/ 4 1010 39 3/ 4 1010

8 203 8 203

If interior of chase will be drywalled, add the thickness to this measurement.

** Adjust header height for a raised floor under fireplace.

Figure 3.3 Framing the Fireplace

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

9


E. Protective Metal Hearth Strips

F. Install Outside Air Kit

Warning! Risk of Fire! Protective metal hearth strips MUST be installed on combustible surfaces. DO NOT cover metal strips with combustible materials. Sparks or embers may ignite flooring.

• Outside air kit is required in a manufactured housing fireplace installation. • Keep duct runs short and straight to minimize restriction. • A small dip is acceptable for a cold air trap. • The outside air kit must be installed on the left side of the fireplace. • The inlet tube assembly provided can be installed through the floor into a ventilated crawl space as shown in Figure 3.6. • An outside air hood is available to install through the side of the house. • The air duct may be run vertically terminate and at least 3ft. (.91m) below the top of the uppermost chimney section.

• Hearth extensions MUST be installed exactly as specified. • Locate the two protective metal hearth strips measuring approximately 26 in. x 4 in. (660 mm x 102 mm) included with this fireplace. • Slide each metal strip 2 in. (51 mm) under front edge of fireplace. • Overlap strips in the middle of fireplace opening by 1 in. (25 mm) minimum. • Metal strips must extend beyond the front and sides of the fireplace opening by at least 2 in. (51 mm), Figure 3.4). • Protect the front of a platform elevated above the hearth extension with metal strips (not included with fireplace) per Figure 3.5. See Section 7 for hearth extension instructions.

Caution! Risk of Fire or Asphyxiation! Do not draw outside combustion air from wall, floor or ceiling cavity, or enclosed spaces such as an attic or garage.

• Do not place outside air hood close to exhaust vents or chimneys. Fumes or odor could be drawn into the room through the fireplace. • Locate outside air inlet to prevent blockage from leaves, snow/ice, or other debris. Blockages could cause combustion air starvation.

*Flexible Duct

((((( ( (

Protective metal strips are placed 2 in. (51 mm) under the front of the fireplace and must extend beyond the front and sides of fireplace opening by 2 in. (51 mm).

( ) ))))

1 in. (25 mm) overlap

Outside Air Plate Assembly

2 Zip Ties

Figure 3.4 Position the Protective Metal Hearth Strips

Top piece must overlap bottom piece

Figure 3.6 Outside Air Installation

Raised Platform 2 in. (51 mm)

1 in. (25 mm) min. overlap

*Use UL181 Class O or Class 1 rigid or flexible ducting.

Floor 2 in. (51 mm)

Figure 3.5 Protect the Front of an Elevated Platform

10

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


4

Chimney and Termination Requirements

A. Chimney Requirements Vertical distances are measured from the base of the fireplace as shown in Figure 4.1.

Table 4.1 Chimney Requirements Minimum overall straight height

13 ft

3.96 m

14.5 ft

4.42 m

Double offset/return minimum height

20 ft

6.1 m

Maximum height

90 ft

27.43 m

Maximum chimney length between an offset and return

20 ft

6.1 m

Maximum distance between chimney stabilizers

35 ft

10.67 m

Maximum unsupported chimney length between the offset and return

6 ft

1.83 m

Maximum unsupported chimney height above the fireplace

35 ft

10.67 m

Maximum unsupported chimney above roof

6 ft

1.83 m

Minimum height with single offset/ return

NOTICE: A maximum of two pairs of offsets and returns may be used.

NOTICE: You must provide support for the pipe during construction and check to be sure inadvertent loading has not dislodged the chimney section from the fireplace or at any chimney joint.

Table 4.2 Chimney Component Dimensions HEIGHT OF CHIMNEY COMPONENTS

in.

mm

4-3/4

121

SL315

13-3/8

340

SL330

15-1/2

394

SL306

4-3/4

121

SL312

10-3/4

273

SL318

16-3/4

425

SL324

22-3/4

578

SL336

34-3/4

883

SL348

46-3/4

1187

Chimney Stabilizer SL3 Offsets/Returns

Chimney Sections*

* Dimensions reflect effective height.

Warning! Risk of Fire! You must maintain 2 in. (51 mm) air space clearance to insulation and other combustible materials around the chimney system. Failure to do so may cause overheating and fire.

6 ft (1.83 m) max. unsupported chimney above roof

Thimble application shown Ceiling Firestop

13 ft. (3.96m) min. straight

39 1/2 in. (1003 mm) Effective Height

Figure 4.1 Chimney Requirements

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

11


B. Offsets/Returns • Use an offset/return to bypass overhead obstructions. • An offset and return can be used as a single entity or separated by chimney section(s). Warning! Risk of Fire! Do not use offset/returns greater than 30°. Chimney draft will be restricted and could cause overheating and fire. Secure offsets with screws ( not to exceed 1/2” / 13 mm in length) Secure returns with strapping. Straight chimney sections may be secured with screws. Keep chimney sections from separating or twisting. • Measure the shift needed to avoid the overhead obstruction. Refer to dimension A in Figure 4.2. • Find the appropriate A dimension listed in Table 4.3. The B dimension coinciding with the A dimension measurement in Table 4.3 represents the required vertical clearance needed to complete the offset/return. • Read across the chart to find the number of chimney sections/model numbers needed between the offset and return. Example:

A

Your “A” dimension from Figure 4.2 is 14-1/2 in. (368 mm). Using Table 4.3, the dimension closest to, but not less than 14-1/2 in. (368 mm) is 14-1/2 in. (368 mm) using a 30° offset/return.

B

Figure 4.2 Chimney Offset/Return

You determine from the table that you need 34-1/8 in. (867 mm) (Dimension “B”) between the offset and return. The chimney component that best fits your application is one SL324.

1-1/4 in. (32 mm) OVERLAP

Table 4.3 Offset Dimensions 15-degree A

30-degree B

A

B

in.

mm

in.

mm

in.

mm

in.

mm

1 5/8

41

13 3/8

340

3 5/8

92

15 1/2

394

SL306 SL312 SL318 SL324 SL336 SL348 -

-

-

-

-

-

2 7/8

73

17 3/4

451

5 1/2

140

18 5/8

473

1

-

-

-

-

-

4 1/8

102

22 3/8

568

7 1/4

184

21 3/4

552

2

-

-

-

-

-

4 1/2

114

23 5/8

600

8 1/2

216

23 3/4

603

-

1

-

-

-

-

5 3/4

146

28 1/4

718

10 1/4

260

27

686

1

1

-

-

-

-

6

152

29 3/8

746

11 1/2

292

29

737

-

-

1

-

-

-

7 1/4

184

34

864

13 1/4

337

32 1/8

816

-

2

-

-

-

-

7 3/4

197

36 1/8

918

14 1/2

368

34 1/8

867

-

-

-

1

-

-

8 3/4

222

39 3/4

1010 16 1/4

413

37 3/8

949

1

-

-

1

-

-

10 3/8

264

45 5/8

1159

19 1/4

489

42 1/2 1080

-

-

2

-

-

-

10 5/8

270

46 3/4

1187

20 1/2

521

44 5/8

1133

-

-

-

-

1

-

11 7/8

302

51 3/8

1305 22 1/4

565

47 3/4 1213

1

-

-

-

1

-

13 1/2

243

57 1/4

1454 25 1/4

641

52 7/8 1343

13 3/4

349

58 3/8

1483 26 1/2

673

55

-

-

-

2

-

-

1397

-

-

-

-

-

1

15

381

63

1600 28 1/4

718

58 1/8 1476

1

-

-

-

-

1

16 1/2

419

68 3/4

1746 31 1/4

794

63 1/4 1607

-

1

-

-

-

1

18

457

74 5/8

1895 34 1/4

870

68 1/2 1740

-

-

1

-

-

1

19 5/8

498

80 3/8

2042 37 1/4

946

73 3/4 1873

-

-

-

1

-

1

20 5/8

524

84 1/8

2137 39 1/8

994

76 7/8 1953

1

-

-

1

-

1

22 3/4

578

91 7/8

2334 43 1/4 1099 84 1/8 2137

-

-

-

-

1

1

24

610

96 1/2

2451 45 1/8

87 1/4 2216

1

-

-

-

1

1

25 7/8

657

103 1/2 2629 49 1/4 1251 94 1/2 2400

-

-

-

-

-

2

1146

Proper assembly of air-cooled chimney parts result in an overlap at chimney joints of 1-1/4 in. (32 mm). Effective length is built into this chart.

12

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


C. Termination Requirements • • • •

Install a cap approved and listed for this fireplace system. Locate cap where it will not become plugged by snow or other materials. Locate cap away from trees or other structures. The bottom of the termination cap must be at least 3 ft (.91 m) above the roof AND at least 2 ft (.61 m) above any portion of roof within 10 ft (3.05 m).

Slanted Roofs

Chimney must extend 3 ft (.9 m) above the roof

Flat Roofs

Chimney must extend 2 ft (.6 m) above any portion of the roof or adjacent structures within 10 ft (3 m) of the chimney

Chimney must extend 2 ft (.6 m) above any portion of the roof or adjacent structures within 10 ft (3 m) of the chimney

Chimney must extend 3 ft (.9 m) above the roof

Figure 4.3 Termination Cap Locations

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

13


5

Chimney Installation

A. Typical Chimney System

Storm Collar Roof Flashing

f)

(roo

Thimble Extension Mobile Home Thimble

(insulation)

(attic) (ceiling)

Must have 2 in. (51 mm) minimum clearance to header

Shaded areas represent 2 in. (51 mm) min. air space clearance required around pipe Figure 5.1 Typical Chimney System - Thimble Application

Chimney must extend beyond combustible roof structure Maintain minimum height of chimney above roof Install roof flashing according to minimum requirements

Offsets/returns may not exceed 30° from vertical

Lock chimney sections together firmly to resist movement

Termination Cap Additional support for tall chimneys Storm Collar Maintain minimum clearances to combustibles as specified Support straps for offsets (not shown) must be secured to adequate framing Offsets/returns must be secured with the screws provided (outer pipe only) Attic shield Ceiling firestops are required where chimney passes through ceiling or floor

Figure 5.2 Typical Chimney System - Attic Shield Application

14

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


B. Assemble Chimney Sections Warning! Risk of Fire! Do NOT install substitute or damaged chimney components. • Use only those components described in this manual. Substitute or damaged chimney components could impair safe operation and cause overheating and fire. • Support the pipe during construction and check to be sure inadvertent loading has not dislodged the chimney section from the fireplace or at any chimney joint. • Attach a straight chimney section or an offset to the top of the fireplace. • Place inner flue to the inside of the chimney section below it. Place the outer casing outside the outer casing of the chimney section below it. Refer to Figure 5.3. Notice: Chimney sections cannot be disassembled once locked together. Plan ahead! • Lock chimney sections and/or offsets/returns together by pushing downward until the top section meets the stop bead on the lower section. • Pull on the top section to make sure it is fully engaged and will not separate. • You may use #6 or #8 sheet metal screws no longer than 1/2 in. (13 mm) to fasten chimney sections together. Do NOT penetrate inner flue. Warning! Risk of Fire! You MUST use screws to fasten offset/returns to chimney sections to keep the chimney parts from twisting. Failure to do so could cause fire.

Ceiling Firestop

Straps

Optional Additional Support

Joint Band (Optional)

Figure 5.4 Secure the Chimney

C. Roof Penetration • • • •

Refer to Figure 5.5. Plumb from roof to center of chimney. Drive a nail up through roof to mark center of pipe. Measure to either side of nail and mark the 14-1/2 in. x 14-1/2 in. (368 mm x 368 mm) opening required. • Measure opening on the horizontal; actual length may be larger depending on roof pitch. • Cut out and frame opening. • Refer to local codes for roof framing details.

• Fasten offset/returns to chimney sections. Insert the screws through the predrilled holes. Do NOT penetrate inner flue. • Secure chimney returns with hanger straps provided; fasten to studs or joists. • Vertical straight runs of chimney must be supported every 35 ft (10.7 m).

Figure 5.5 Ceiling/Attic Construction Figure 5.3 Assembling Chimney Sections

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

15


D. Thimble Installation Attic insulation shield not required when thimble application is used. • The thimble must extend completely through the roof structure shielding combustible materials. Five location holes have been provided to allow for a variety of ceiling/ roof thicknesses. The thimble extension is required when the ceiling/roof thickness exceeds 12 1/2 in. The extension should overlap the thimble 1 in. • Drill 1/8 in. holes through the outer shield of the thimble using the predrilled holes in the extension as guides. Attach the extension to the thimble using the screws provided with the extension. • Install the thimble assembly and nail/screw it securely to the framing members. • Center the flashing over the chimney and fasten it appropriately to the roof using nails or screws. Keep gaps between the flashing plate and the roof to a minimum. • Caulk the flashing plate and roof junction as well as the vertical seam on the flashing. All nail/screw heads must be caulked with a roofing sealant. • Finish assembling the chimney, storm collar and termination cap following the installation instructions provided with them. Note: Roofing shingles must be below the flashing plate on the lower side of a sloped roof and over the flashing plate on the sides and top.

Figure 5.6 MH Installation

16

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


If the attic space is ventilated and the fireplace system height from floor to the flue outlet of the termination is 13’6’’ or more, it is not necessary to use the Thimble and extend the radiation shield into the roof flashing. The installation can be done as a normal residential installation using the standard firestop attic shield.

Warning! Risk of Fire! Do NOT seal area between firestop opening and chimney pipe except where they enter the attic or leave the warm air envelope of the home (use 600° F sealant).

E. Install Ceiling Firestops

Warning! Risk of Fire! You MUST install an attic insulation shield when there is any possibility of insulation or other combustible material coming into contact with the chimney.

Caution! Risk of Fire! Ceiling firestops must be used whenever the chimney penetrates a ceiling/floor. • The ceiling firestop slows spread of fire and reduces cold air infiltration. • Install a ceiling firestop whenever chimney penetrates ceiling/floor. • Mark and cut an opening in ceiling as shown in Figure 5.7. • Frame the opening with the same size lumber used in the ceiling joists. • Nail the ceiling firestop to the bottom of the ceiling joists when there is a room above. • Use an attic insulation shield if the ceiling is insulated. The ceiling firestop may then be attached above or below the joists. ROOM ABOVE (non-insulated ceiling) B

A

Ceilng firestop attached to bottom of framing

F. Attic Insulation Shield Installation

Thimble application not required when attic insulation shield is used. • Do NOT pack insulation between the chimney and the attic insulation shield. • Failure to keep insulation and other materials away from chimney pipe could cause fire. • Do NOT offset chimney inside insulation shield. Installation of a ceiling firestop is required: • Refer to Figures 5.7, 5.9, 5.10. • Roll the shield (around the chimney if already installed). The three holes on each side will match up (large holes on top). • Insert three screws into the matching holes to form a tube. • Bend the tabs on the bottom of the tube inward to 90° to maintain chimney air space. • Rest the insulation shield on the ceiling firestop below. • Bend the tabs at the top of the shield inward to 90° to maintain the 2 in. (51 mm) air space from the chimney.

2 in. (51mm) clearance

ATTIC ABOVE (insulated ceiling) Ceiling firestop attached to top of framing

2 in. (51mm) clearance Note: Use same dimensional lumber for framing ceiling firestop and joists.

A

B

Catalog #

in.

mm

in.

mm

FS338

14-1/2

368

14-1/2

368

FS339

14-1/2

368

18-3/8

467

FS340

14-1/2

368

23

584

Figure 5.7 Installing the Ceiling Firestop

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

17


If you wish to make a custom shield or barrier, follow these guidelines: • Metal is preferred, although any material stiff enough to hold back the insulation can be used. Warning! Risk of Fire! Use of cardboard or other materials that can deflect under humidity or other environmental conditions is not recommended. • The shield or barrier must be tall enough to extend above the insulation and prevent blown-in insulation from spilling into the cavity. • Maintain specified air spaces around chimney. • Check instructions and local codes for further details.

Insert three screws

Tabs bent 90°

Double-check the Chimney Assembly Continue assembling the chimney sections up as needed. While doing so, be aware of the height and unsupported chimney length limitations given under Section 4. Check each section by pulling up slightly from the top to ensure proper engagement before installing the succeeding sections. If they have been connected correctly, they will not disengage when tested.

Figure 5.8 Prepare Attic Insulation Shield

Pipe 2 in. (51 mm) air space

G. Termination Cap Installation

Attic Insulation Shield Tabs bent in 90° and taped

• Install a cap approved and listed for this fireplace system. • The bottom of the termination cap must be at least 3 ft (.91 m) above the roof AND at least 2 ft (.61 m) above any portion of roof within 10 ft (3.05 m). Insulation

Tabs bent 90° to rest against pipe

Pipe

14-1/2 in. (368 mm) diameter Ceiling Firestop

Insulation

10-1/2 in. (267 mm) Figure 5.9 Install Attic Insulation Shield (firestop above ceiling)

Pipe 2 in. (51 mm) air space Tabs bent in 90° and taped Insulation 10-1/2 in. (267 mm)

Tabs bent 90° to rest against pipe

Attic Insulation Shield 14-1/2 in. (368 mm) diameter

Insulation

Pipe

Ceiling Firestop

Figure 5.10 Install Attic Insulation Shield (firestop below ceiling)

18

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


6

Finishing

A. Finishing Material Refer to Sections 1.B. and Sections 1.C. for combustible/ non-combustible materials. Refer to Figure 6.1 for noncombustible zone.

These surfaces may be covered with non-combustible material.

Warning! Risk of Fire! You must maintain clearances.

Non-combustible sealant.

• Do NOT cover metal fireplace front with combustible materials. • Install combustible materials only to specified clearances on top front and side edges. • Do NOT place header or combustible framing below top standoffs. • Complete framing and apply facing material (drywall) over framing. • Facing material can butt up to metal face and columns of fireplace. • Only non-combustible materials may be used to cover the metal fireplace front. • A bead of 300-deg F minimum non-combustible sealant must be used to close off any gaps at the top and sides between the fireplace and facing to prevent cold air leaks.

Figure 6.1 Non-combustible Facing

Finished combustible wall Flat 2 x 4 stud wall Combustible material

2 x 4 header, flush with front of stand-offs

Non-combustible decorative facing Continuous, non-combustible sealant Tile, stone or other non-combustible material

Hearth Refractory

1/2 in. Micore or equivilent Metal strips are placed 2 in. (51 mm) insulation under the front of the fireplace and must extend beyond the front and sides of fireplace opening by 2 in. (51 mm)

Figure 6.2

Floor constructed of wood or other combustible material

Decorative Facing

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

19


B. Hearth Extension, Building and Finishing

Warning! Risk of Fire! • Maintain clearances. • Framing or finishing material used on the front of the fireplace closer than the minimums listed, must be constructed entirely of non-combustible materials (i.e., steel studs, concrete board, etc.).

WARNING! Risk of Fire! High temperatures, sparks, embers or other burning material falling from the fireplace may ignite flooring or concealed combustible surfaces. • Protective metal hearth strips MUST be installed. • Hearth extensions MUST be installed exactly as specified.

Table 6.1

R = 1/k x inches of thickness

A hearth extension must be installed with all fireplaces to protect the combustible floor in front of the fireplace from both radiant heat and sparks.

Table 6.2 Hearth Extension Insulation Alternatives, R Value = 1.03

• You MUST use a hearth extension with this fireplace. • Refer to Figure 6.3 for minimum dimensions of combustible material. • This fireplace has been tested and approved for use with a hearth extension insulated to a minimum R value of 1.03. • The hearth extension material MUST be covered with tile, stone or other non-combustible material. • Manufactured hearth materials will usually have a published R value (resistance to heat) or k value (conductivity of heat). Refer to the formula in Table 6.1 to convert a k value to an R value, • Refer to Table 6.2 for hearth extension insulation alternatives.

Material Hearth & Home HX3, HX4

0.49

2.06

1/2 in.

USG Micore 300™

0.49

2.06

1/2 in.

USG Durock™ Cement Board

1.92

0.52

2 in.

Cement Mortar

5.0

0.20

5 1/8 in.

Common Brick

5.0

0.20

5 1/8 in.

Ceramic Tile

12.50

0.08

12 1/4 in.

Armstrong™ Privacy Guard Plus

0.46

2.18

1/2 in.

14.3-20.0

0.07-0.05

14 5/8 in. - 20 3/8 in.

Marble

Model # MEL36 MEL42

A

B

C

D

in.

36

52

8

16

mm

914

1321

203

406

in.

42

66

12

20

mm

1067

1676

305

508

C A B

C D

Figure 6.3 Minimum Non-Combustible Hearth Extension Dimensions

20

Minimum thickness required

k per inch r per inch thick thick

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


warning! Risk of Fire. A raised hearth extension built flush with the fireplace opening or less than 4 in. (102 mm) below the fireplace opening requires the fireplace be installed on a non-combustible surface.

1. Hearth Extension 4” or more Below Fireplace Opening Fireplace Opening

Continuous, non-combustible sealant 1/2 in. Micore Hearth Extension (or equivalent insulation)

Tile, stone or other non-combustible material

Floor constructed of wood or other combustible material

Noncombustible Framing Material

4 in. (102 mm) min.

HX4 or equivalent

Figure 6.6 Raised Platform Hearth Extension-Framing

2 in. (51 mm) of the Protective Metal Hearth Strip is required under the front of the fireplace

Figure 6.4 Hearth Extension Construction

2. Hearth Extension Less Than 4” Below Fireplace Opening The hearth framing must be constructed of non-combustible materials (such as metal framing or equivalent material) and placed on HX3(s), HX4(s), or equivalent material. See Figures 6.4 and 6.5. When creating the platform, allow for the thickness of the non-combustible finishing materials. Seal gaps between the hearth extension and the front of the fireplace with a bead of non-combustible sealant or grout.

Non-combustible material must be used under the fireplace if top of hearth is less than 4 in. (103 mm) below the fireplace opening.

Note: The bottom of the fireplace opening is 7.5 in. (191 mm) above the bottom of the fireplace. Finished hearth must NOT extend above this level.

Non-combustible Finishing Materials Figure 6.7 Raised Platform Hearth Extension-Finishing

C. Non-Combustible Sealant Material

After completing the framing and applying the facing materials over the framing, a bead of noncombustible sealant must be used to close off any gaps at the top and sides between the fireplace and hearth.

Non-combustible Sealant

Non-combustible Finishing Material Non-combustible Framing Material 1/2 in. Micore or equivalent insulation

Protective Metal Hearth Strips

Floor or platform

Figure 6.5 Raised Hearth Extension Detail

Figure 6.9 Place Non-combustible Sealant

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

21


D. Mantel and Wall Projections A combustible mantel may be positioned no lower than 12 in. (25 mm) above the fireplace opening. The combustible mantel may have a maximum depth of 12 in. (305 mm). Combustible trim pieces that project no more than 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) from the face of the fireplace can be placed no closer than 6 in. (152 mm) from the top of the fireplace opening. Combustible trim must not cover:

WARNING! Risk of Fire!

Hearth & Home Technologies is not responsible for discoloration, cracking or other material failures of finishing materials due to heat exposure or smoke.

• Choose finishing materials carefully.

• the metal surfaces of the fireplace • where the non-combustible board is placed over the metal surfaces • the space between the metal face of the fireplace and framing members

Combustible Wall

2 x 4 stud wall

Combustible Decorative Facing

12 in./305 mm

Standoffs

Seal joint with non-combustible sealant 1 1/2 in./38 mm maximum

Non-combustible Decorative Facing such as: Steel, iron, brick, tile, concrete, slate, glass, plasters.

12 in./305 mm minimum

6 in./152 mm minimum

Measured from top of fireplace opening

Figure 6.10 Mantel Specifications

22

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


E. Sidewalls/Surrounds • Locate adjacent combustible sidewalls a minimum of 12 in. (305 mm) from fireplace opening. • Mantle leg, surround, stub wall, whether combustible or non-combustible, may be constructed as shown in Figure 6.11.

A

°a

ng

BRICK FRONT

50

11 1/4 in. [286 mm]

le

FLUSH FRONT

B

12 in. [305 mm]

39

°a

ng

le

12 in. [305 mm]

4 in. [102 mm] 9 3/4 in. [248 mm] A B Fireplace Outside Opening Dimensions

Model # ME L36 ME L42

in.

36

41

mm

914

1041

in.

42

47

mm

1067

1194

Figure 6.11 Mantel Leg, Surround or Wall Projection (acceptable on both sides of opening)

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

23


7

Fireplace Setup

A. Gas Log/Lighter Provision

B. Wood Burning Inserts

Warning! Fire and/or Asphyxiation Risk! Use with solid wood fuel or decorative gas appliance only. Gas fire generates fumes. • DO NOT install unvented gas logs • Damper must be locked fully open when gas logs are installed

Warning! Risk of Fire! Improper installation of wood inserts may cause fireplace or chimney system to overheat.

A certified gas log lighter or decorative gas log set can be installed in this fireplace. • Maximum input is 100,000 BTU/hr. • Decorative gas appliance must be certified to ANSI Z21.60 “Standard for Decorative Gas Appliances for Installation in Vented Fireplaces”. • Must be installed in accordance with the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1. • A gas log set must incorporate a gas shutoff. • Gas Log set requires the damper to be locked fully open. • A listed automatic damper system with safety interlock may be used in this fireplace with only compatible, listed gas log sets. See damper system manufacturer’s instructions. • Knockouts are provided on both sides of the fireplace and in refractories for 1/2 in. (13 mm) iron pipe. • Seal refractory around pipe with fireplace mortar or a non-combustible sealant.

Firebox

If a wood burning insert is being installed in this fireplace, Hearth & Home Technologies recommends full reline of the chimney. • Cooling air openings at the top of the chimney must not be obstructed in any manner. • Hearth & Home Technologies recommends securing the reline at the top of the flue and using the cap certified for use with this fireplace system.

Outer shell of fireplace Maintain air clearance to combustibles.

Refractory Combustible materials

Seal with fireplace mortar or non-combustible sealant

Gas line

Repack insulation knockout

Gas line

4 in. (102 mm)

1 1/2 in. (38 mm) air space around pipe Combustible materials may be located at zero clearance to gas line beyond 4 in. (102 mm) from fireplace side.

Figure 7.1 Gas Line Installation

24

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


8

Reference Materials

A. Chimney Components Catalog #

Description

ID6

Insulated Duct/Outside Air

UD6

Uninsulated Duct/Outside Air

SL306

Chimney Section - 6 in. (152 mm) long

SL312

Chimney Section - 12 in. (305 mm) long

SL318

Chimney Section - 18 in. (457 mm) long

SL324

Chimney Section - 24 in. (610 mm) long

SL336

Chimney Section - 36 in. (914 mm) long

SL348

Chimney Section - 48 in. (1219 mm) long

SL3

Chimney Stabilizer

SL315

Chimney Offset/Return - 15 deg

SL330

Chimney Offset/Return - 30 deg

FS338

Ceiling Firestop - Straight

FS339

Ceiling Firestop - 15 deg

FS340

Ceiling Firestop - 30 deg

JB877

Chimney Joint Band

CB876

Chimney Bracket

RF370

Roof Flashing - Flat to 6/12 Pitch

RF371

Roof Flashing - 6/12 to 12/12 Pitch

TR344

Round Termination Cap

MH841

Manufactured Housing 20 in. Thimble Extension

MH842

Manufactured Housing Thimble

ID6 Insulated Duct 6 in. (152.4 mm) i.d.

Inside Diameter 8 in. (203 mm) Outside Diameter 10-1/2 in. (267 mm)

Effective Height 4-3/4 in. (121 mm)

SL315/SL330 Offset/Return

A 10-1/2 in. (267 mm)

8 in. (203 mm) B Chimney Sections A Catalog #

in

B mm

in

mm

SL306

6

152

4-3/4

121

SL312

12

305

10-3/4

273

SL318

18

457

16-3/4

425

SL324

24

610

22-3/4

578

SL336

36

914

34-3/4

883

SL348

48

1219

46-3/4

1187

A = Actual Length B = Effective Length (length of chimney part after it has been snapped to another)

42 in. (1067 mm)

UD6 Uninsulated Duct 6 in. (152.4 mm) i.d. 42 in. (1067 mm)

20-3/4 in. (527 mm)

4-3/4 in. (121 mm) Effective Height

Inside Diameter 8 in. (203 mm) Outside Diameter 10-1/2 in. (267 mm)

SL3 Chimney Stabilizer

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

25


12 in. (305 mm)

10-1/2 in. (267 mm)

2 in. (51 mm)

24-5/8 in. (625 mm)

27-3/8 in. (695 mm)

JB877 Chimney Joint Band

RF370 Roof Flashing

10-1/2 in. (267 mm)

12 in. (305 mm)

CB876 Chimney Joint Band

A

B

24-5/8 in. (625 mm)

31 in. (787 mm) RF371 Roof Flashing

14-1/2 in. (368 mm) Ceiling Firestop

Catalog #

A

B

FS338

0-deg.

14-1/2 in.

368 mm

FS339

15-deg.

18-3/8 in.

467 mm

FS340

30-deg.

23 in.

584 mm

15-3/4 in. (400 mm)

TR344 Round Termination Cap

MH841

MH842 Roof Thimble & Flashing

26

Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15


B. Optional Components 52 in. (1321 mm)

16 in. (406 mm)

66 in. (1676 mm)

HX4 Hearth Extension

HX3 Hearth Extension

1/2 in. (13 mm)

20 in. (508 mm)

1/2 in. (13 mm)

See your Heatilator dealer for a complete list of optional components. Heatilator, a brand of Hearth & Home Technologies 7571 215th Street West, Lakeville, MN 55044 www.heatilator.com Please contact your Heatilator dealer with any questions or concerns. For the location of your nearest Heatilator dealer, please visit www.heatilator.com. Heatilator • MEL36, MEL42 Installation Manual • 4044-212 • Rev D • 01/06/15

27


Warning! Owning a home without www.palmharbor.com

Energy Management System Many of our Energy Management features qualify your home for utility rebates or incentives. Check with your local provider for more details.

Energy Management Package Our package can lower your utility costs by approximately 30%*. Insulated, Sealed Airtight Ducts –Tested for

expensive leakage using state-of-the-art duct blaster equipment. Sealed ducts prevent insulation and structural damage from condensation.

Graduated Air Delivery System – Provides

balanced airflow and comfort from room to room in your new home.

High Performance Air Return – Prevents pressure differences that allow outside airflow into your home. This also ensures even distribution of conditioned air. No “hot spots.”

Builder-Installed Seals – Installed along building

sections to significantly slow the inflow of untreated air and water vapor. Caulking all openings such as windows, electrical outlets, doors and plumbing makes your home more comfortable and water resistant.

Whole-house Insulation Envelope of a minimum of R-54 – Total combined R-Values of floors, walls and ceilings are calculated for each home, based on location and thermal zone. The right balance of insulation surrounding your home allows heating and cooling equipment to operate in the most energy efficient manner.

Optimally-sized for High Efficiency Air Conditioner – Provides for greater comfort, lower

installation and maintenance costs and continued savings every month because your home is equipped with correctly sized systems.

* When compared to homes built to the 1993 standard energy code.

our EnerGmiser System could cost you

$24,998 more in utility expenses before your home is paid for.

Good for you. Good for your wallet. good for the environment.

Plus

Energy Management Package Our Plus package includes all of the features in the basic package and adds these important options. Dual Pane Low-E Windows –

Reflect up to 70% of the sun’s radiant heat and its harmful Ultraviolet rays. They also help retain heat in the home during the winter. This significantly reduces the cost of heating and cooling your home.

Radiant Barrier Roof Sheathing

Reflects up to 97% of the sun’s radiant heat, lowering attic temperatures and improving your home’s energy efficiency. It increases indoor comfort while reducing energy consumption and costs to cool your home.

Other Available Green Options We can build our homes to meet the construction requirements for certification with ENERGY STAR, LEED, NAHB and most other local and national greenbuilt programs. All final certifications must be provided locally by properly authorized third-party agencies. Check with your local housing consultant for a complete list of all the green options available in your area such as these: ENERGY STAR Appliances Tankless Water Heaters Dual Flush Commodes Low VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) Paints Green Floor Coverings

greenback.palmharbor.com

Low-flow Faucet Aerators and Showerheads


ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY

LIVE GREEN www.palmharbor.com

Energy Management System

ENERGY EFFICIENT Owning a Palm Harbor home

costs less

365 days a year.


Our Green Packages Energy Management Package

T

Our package can lower your utility costs by approximately 30%*. Insulated, Sealed Airtight Ducts –Tested for expensive leakage using state-of-the-art duct blaster equipment. Sealed ducts prevent insulation and structural damage from condensation. Graduated Air Delivery System – Provides balanced airflow and comfort from room to room in your new home. High Performance Air Return – Prevents pressure differences that allow outside airflow into your home. This also ensures even distribution of conditioned air. No “hot spots.” Builder-Installed Seals – Installed along building

sections to significantly slow the inflow of untreated air and water vapor. Caulking all openings such as windows, electrical outlets, doors and plumbing makes your home more comfortable and water resistant.

Whole-house Insulation Envelope of a minimum of R-54 – Total combined R-Values of floors, walls and ceilings are calculated for each home, based on location and thermal zone. The right balance of insulation surrounding your home allows heating and cooling equipment to operate in the most energy efficient manner.

Optimally-sized for High Efficiency Air Conditioner – Provides for greater comfort, lower

Palm Harbor is the only factory built home builder to be the Gold Award Winner of the Prestigious NAHB “National Housing Award”

installation and maintenance costs and continued savings every month because your home is equipped with correctly sized systems. * When compared to homes built to the 1993 standard energy code.


Many of our Energy Management features qualify your home for utility rebates or incentives. Check with your local provider for more details.

Plus

Energy Management Package Our Plus package includes all of the features in the basic package and adds these important options. Dual Pane Low-E Windows – Reflect up to 70% of the sun’s radiant heat and its harmful Ultraviolet rays. They also help retain heat in the home during the winter. This significantly reduces the cost of heating and cooling your home. Radiant Barrier Roof Sheathing

– Reflects up to 97% of the sun’s radiant heat, lowering attic temperatures and improving your home’s energy efficiency. It increases indoor comfort while reducing energy consumption and costs to cool your home.

Other Available Green Options We can build our homes to meet the construction requirements for certification with ENERGY STAR, LEED, NAHB and most other local and national green-built programs. All final certifications must be provided locally by properly authorized third-party agencies. Check with your local housing consultant for a complete list of all the green options available in your area such as these: ENERGY STAR Appliances Tankless Water Heaters Dual Flush Commodes Low VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) Paints Green Floor Coverings Low-flow Faucet Aerators and Showerheads


Good for you. Good for your wallet. Good for the environment. Green Home Construction. Naturally. Green building takes place when construction and design practices are able to increase the efficiency with which a home uses resources such as energy, water and materials, while reducing the home’s impact on the environment. Palm Harbor’s systems-built construction method inherently produces green homes that are constructed more efficiently, built more tightly and produce less waste.

Palm Harbor was the first builder to build a home certified to the Department of Energy’s Builders’ Challenge program. EPA’s ENERGY STAR® Homes Program Award Winner in 1997, 1998 and 2005

First factory-built home builder named Gold Award Winner of the U.S. Department of Energy’s EnergyValue Housing Award for best practices in energy efficient home construction

Good for You. Owning a

Palm Harbor home provides more peace of mind for daily living. Our precise construction and sealed air duct system greatly reduce the presence of pollen, dust and other outside allergens. They also restrict noise pollution from the outside, creating a quieter, more peaceful living environment.

EPA’s ENERGY STAR® Partner of the Year Award in 2007

Good for your Pocketbook. Owning

a Palm Harbor home means you will save money on monthly utilities because of its energy efficiency. Our precision construction and sealed ducts create a tight construction envelope that significantly reduces the loss of precious heated and cooled air. This means your heating and cooling systems work less to keep you comfortable, which will save you money month after month.

Good for the Environment. Our high

performance construction means you consume less natural resources to heat and cool your home. Palm Harbor homes also allow less treated air to escape, reducing your impact on the environment.


WARNING! Owning a home without

I am amazed at the utility costs of this home. We have 4 kids and a household of six. In our previous 1,900 sq. ft. home our bills came to over $300 during the hot Texas summers. Imagine how I feel now that my electric bills for our new 2,500 sq. ft. home are half of what they used to be!

our EnerGmiser System could cost you

$24,998 MORE

in utility expenses before your home is paid for.

Unlike conventional site built construction, our sensitive construction materials are protected from rain, snow and other mold-inducing elements. This results in a healthier home for your family. Because our homes are constructed in building centers, site work can begin while your home is under construction. This means we reduce the project time to completion. So you can move into your Palm Harbor home much sooner than with a conventional builder who must wait on the completion of the foundation and his subcontractors’ schedules before he can even begin to build. By shortening the construction time, we reduce the impact on the environment. The natural run off of valuable top soil, noise pollution and disturbances to the surrounding neighborhood are significantly diminished. Quite simply, investing in a Palm Harbor home means you own a home you can feel good about without spending more for it.

The Jacksons

Texas Homeowners

“Unbelievable Savings!”

Building our homes to 80% completion in environmentally-protected building centers before delivering them to your home site results in important green benefits. For example, in conventional site built home construction, dumpsters of excess materials are taken to landfills daily. In our building centers, however, we can capture the excess materials from one home and carefully use them in the construction of the next home. Consequently, we can literally measure our waste in dustpans, knowing we are not creating ever-expanding land fills.

Our new Palm Harbor home is beautiful. We just love it! But we were worried when we realized the cost of power was rising and we had just purchased a home more than twice the size of what we had before. Luckily Puget Sound Energy created a Conservation Incentive Credit. If you reduced your power consumption more than 10% over the same month last year, you received a 5 cent credit for every kilowatt-hour you saved over the 10% goal. Even though it is more than twice as big as our old home, our new Palm Harbor is so energy efficient that we’ve had three months without a power bill this year and even built up credit! We have not had to pay anything!

Vic and Mandy Johnson

Washington Homeowners

Copyright © 2009, Palm Harbor Homes. All rights reserved.


No matter where you live, genuine construction saves you money all year long! Our Energy Management System is designed to maximize your home’s energy efficiency through improved construction techniques and additional thermal scaling. These improvements substantially reduce your heating and cooling costs – effectively lowering the total cost of owning your Palm Harbor home all year long. A better built home simply costs less to own! 1

2

3

Zone 3

4 17

18

7

6

16

10

8

11 9

14

12

25

20

15 21

24

CITY Tacoma, WA Spokane, WA Portland, OR Medford, OR Las Vegas, NV Phoenix, AZ Grand Junction, CO Albuquerque, NM El Paso, TX

SAVINGS $10,387 $16,538 $16,256 $19,081 $19,126 $10,375 $18,500 $14,818 $16,642

CITY 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Amarillo, TX Dallas, TX Austin, TX Corpus Christi, TX Shreveport, LA Little Rock, AR Tulsa, OK Ft. Wayne, IN Columbus, OH

See how much green

Zone 1

22 23

13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Zone 2

26

19

5

SAVINGS $24,998 $20,018 $17,738 $15,494 $16,486 $16,253 $17,086 $18,690 $20,265

CITY 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Bowling Green, KY Chattanooga, TN Birmingham, AL Tallahassee, FL Tampa, FL Augusta, GA Raleigh, NC Lynchburg, VA

SAVINGS $13,042 $13,378 $15,311 $10,353 $7,900 $17,154 $17,162 $17,439

can save you!

* Depending on your location, it is estimated that over the lifetime of your mortgage (30 years), you can save between 26% and 43% on heating and cooling costs. This is not a guarantee because many factors determine utility expense including lifestyle and property use. Calculations are based on our most popular 1,500 sq. ft. multi-sectional home. Savings estimates are based on established local 12-month electrical heating and cooling utility costs for specific geographic areas. Utility cost may vary significantly for your area. Programmable thermostat settings are 78 degrees cooling, 70 degrees heating. Comparison is made between identical homes with minimum HUD insulation values for each zone and the addition of the Palm Harbor Energy Management System. Testing, research and calculations conducted by the Florida Solar Energy Center, University of Central Florida, Cocoa, FL in partnership with the U.S. Department of Energy’s “Building America Program.”


Why Modular is Right For You

The Discovery

Modular Home

Advantage


What is a Modular

M

Home?

odular homes are the fastest-growing segment of the home building industry today. A modular home is simply a home built to local building codes in a controlled, environmentally protected building center using precise and efficient construction technology. The finished units or “modules” are then transported to the site for final assembly.

Skilled and experienced craftsmen construct each modular home one piece of lumber at a time to the same state, county or other specific local building codes as any site-constructed home. These homes are inspected throughout every construction phase for strict quality conformance. At the site, the finished units or modules are lifted by crane or rolled over a permanent foundation and secured. Once erected, modular homes are indistinguishable from sitebuilt homes in appearance, appreciation and performance. Here are just a few advantages of choosing a modular home: The timeless charm of the Cedar Key provides plenty of curb appeal with its full porch and walk-up entry. On the cover: The award-winning Cambria has 2,640 sq. ft., 4 bedrooms and 2.5 baths.

The Construction Advantage The Quality And Value Advantage The Appearance Advantage

And when you choose any of our modular homes built with our SmartPlus® building process, you benefit from the advantage of our decades of homebuilding experience and expertise. Your new SmartPlus® modular home will not only meet or exceed the appropriate building code for your chosen location, but must also meet our additional rigid quality requirements.


Advantag Advantage

The Construction

B

ecause modular homes are built in a protected environment and are designed to be transported, modular construction is far more precise than that of site-built homes. Skilled craftsmen build each modular home one piece of lumber at a time under experienced supervision and adhere to our rigorous quality control process. Home components are assembled using advanced technology to insure square and precise framing. The protected construction environment insures that no building materials are ever compromised by rain or other weather damage. Professional engineers design each of our SmartPlusÂŽ modular homes. Drawings are then reviewed and approved by an independent third party approval agency and state agencies, as appropriate by state.

Modular homes are engineered and built to withstand transportation and final assembly. This requires additional materials and fastening schedules over and above those required for sitebuilt homes. Additional material mass means added strength and durability for the life of your home. Of course, this also translates into higher long-term performance value.

An extra engineered combination of fastening, steel strapping and advanced adhesives are used to permanently secure the modular home to the foundation with strength that site-built homes simply cannot match. Our modular homes are built to meet or exceed your local building code for complete peace of mind. Crane setting a 2-story Rosemont from Discovery Custom Homes.


The Quality and Value

M

odular homes typically offer savings of 15 to 20% below comparably featured site-built homes. With our SmartPlusÂŽ modular building system, these savings are the result of engineering, construction and purchasing efficiencies created in our national network of environmentally protected building centers that site builders cannot match. Building your modular home with our SmartPlusÂŽ building system assures you of a well-built home that is a sound investment that will provide you with the lifestyle you have dreamed of for years to come. Modular homes capitalize on the efficiencies of the central building center, providing considerable cost savings over site-built homes that are not feasible in a site or subdivision setting. This makes a modular home a much better option, especially for building on privately owned, scattered or suburban infill lots.

Our modular homes feature name brand, top-quality materials purchased with our national buying power. You get the added beauty, value and peace of mind these products provide.

Adv

Advantage

Better building efficiencies, national buying power, faster building cycles and less waste during modular construction translate into prices that can be 15% to 20% below comparably featured site-built homes.

Zoning officials and appraisers do not distinguish between site-built and modular homes. Consequently, appraisals for modular homes are on par or even higher than the actual cost of the home.


vantage Modular homes qualify for FHA and conventional mortgages and lower finance rates.

Modular homes appreciate over time just like other homes in your neighborhood. Increased building materials, adherence to Energy Star ® guidelines and precision craftsmanship in our modular homes result in lower utility bills, higher structural soundness and greater resale values. Our modular homes typically include our exclusive EnerGmiser ® system and many qualify for Energy Star ® certification when the home is finished with the appropriate heating and cooling units. Owning an Energy Star ® home means that you will save 30% or more over homes built to the 1993 energy code.

Our centralized, protected building centers create building efficiencies that cannot be rivaled by traditional builders. Since 1997, we have proudly partnered with Energy Star ® to build homes with superior energy efficiency that will save you money on heating and cooling costs month after month.

Our EnerGmiser ® Home has been awarded the coveted energy efficiency award, the Energy Star ® by the U.S. Department of Energy and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.


The Appearance

Advantage

E

rected on a permanent foundation, modular homes typically cannot be distinguished from site-built homes in appearance, appreciation or appraisals.

The Discovery Cinci Cape provides a large, traditional home for the modern family. The Carthage offers nostalgic, front-porch living.

Cape cod, craftsman, ranch or even twoand three-story homes are all options when you build with our SmartPlusÂŽ modular construction. The features of our modular elevations are skillfully balanced to create charming curb appeal that will make coming home the best part of your day.

Modular homes, like site-built homes, are erected and secured to a permanent foundation for an attractive home that is appropriate in any environment.

Most of our modular homes feature architecturally designed exterior elevations reminiscent of the craftsman era as well as optional exteriors designed with geographical sensitivity. While our nostalgic elevations appeal to many rural homeowners for their warmth, character and attractiveness, they also help our homes integrate with surrounding aged homes in urban infill lots and revitalization projects.


Advantage Advanta

Our SmartPlus® Features and Options

O

ur modular homes built with SmartPlus® construction feature the distinctive exterior elevations, name brand products and custom quality options you want in your new home. Here are our standard building specifications for modular homes: Attractive 5:12 or higher roof pitches and deep eaves that vary by design Lofty 8 and 9 foot ceilings with optional tray features Beautiful ceramic tile options for flooring, edging accents and showers A variety of distinctive exterior elevations Energy-saving dual-pane glass windows Beautiful DuraBuilt ® cabinets for added strength, features and quality Professionally designed decors with the latest colors and designs Name brand products such as GE, Moen, Shaw and others Wide selection of exterior materials Money saving Energy Efficiency System Our Gold Key Set and 2-10 Year Homeowners’ Protection Plan

Our wide variety of other high quality options varies from region to region. Please ask your local Discovery Custom Homes representative for more details.

Our DuraBuilt® cabinets, solid-surface counters and ceramic tile backsplashes and floors create absolutely stunning dream kitchens which are beautiful and functional.


Our SmartPlus® Building

C

hoosing to build your new modular home with Discovery Custom Homes assures you of a well-built home that is a sound investment and provides you the lifestyle you have dreamed of for years to come. Each SmartPlus® home is constructed to give you complete peace of mind throughout your homebuilding experience. Here’s how we do it. Our Commitment to Satisfaction – Each of our associates is committed to your complete satisfaction. And we follow up to insure that we keep our promises. Our focus on satisfying every customer has consistently set us apart with an enviable customer referral rate of over 61%. We are proud to say that 95% of our customers report that they are satisfied and would and do recommend us. Our Ability to Customize – From carpet to cabinets to building codes, we can customize your home to fit your lifestyle. Our Unique Precision Building – Environmentally protected building centers, skilled engineers and craftsmen and our commitment to quality insure that you will be in your new home in a fraction of the time and cost required with traditional builders. Our EnerGmiser® system is available on every home to provide added quality and utility savings.

Advantage

Your Personal Factory Set Manager – Our BuilderPlus program provides you with your own Personal Factory Set Manager who is your one point of contact for complex construction sites. Your Complete Peace of Mind – Our own associates work with you throughout the buying and building process. Associates who are committed to satisfying you and constructing a home that will meet or exceed your expectations and local building codes. Plus, our Gold Key Set and industry-leading 2-10 Year Homeowners’ Protection Plan assure your complete peace of mind. Your Beautiful New Home – From the inviting exterior elevations to the customized details and options, we are committed to building a home that provides the luxury and lifestyle you deserve and reflects your unique personality and style.

Copyright © 2015 by Palm Harbor Homes. All Right Reserved.


COLOR SELECTION LIST July 25, 2018

FLOORING: STANDARD CARPET FOR PALM HARBOR ENCORE PRODUCT BY SHAW MANTRA Description:  18 oz.  100% Nylon 5-Year Limited Warranty Against Soiling and Liquid Spills Color Choices: Hopsack .................. 00100 Pine Cone……..00704 Wood Smoke .......... 00703 Truffle…………..00700 Ginger Snap............ 00702 Rock Ridge…….00500 Hemp ...................... 00701 Basil…………….00300 Baled Hay ............... 00200 Golden Pear……00201

STANDARD CARPET FOR DISCOVERY PRODUCT BY SHAW ******Included in Palm Harbor Encore (EVAP)  MACRAME` is a 25-ounce PET solid in a traditional cut-pile construction.  TACTILE has a longer pile height, giving it more texture. Description:  25 oz.  100% Polyester  10-Year Quality Assurance Warranty  5-Year Limited Warranty Against Soiling and Liquid Spills Color Choices: Angora .................... 00100 Brindle ..................... 00300 Cloudburst .............. 00502 Tahoe ...................... 00701 Coconut Shell ......... 00704

Sand Dollar ............. 00101 Pumice Stone ......... 00500 Spicewood .............. 00600 Mushroom Cap ....... 00702 Truffle ..................... 00705

-1-

Sesame .................. 00102 Rainy Day ............... 00501 Shopping Bag ......... 00700 Hickory Bark ........... 00703 Peat ........................ 00706


OPTIONAL UPGRADE CARPET OFFERINGS BY SHAW  THAT’S AWESOME Description:  25 oz.  5-Year Limited Warranty Against Soiling and Liquid Spills  5-Year TextureGard Warranty Color Choices: Toffee Smoke ......... 00732 Mineral Glaze ......... 00532 Flax Seed ................ 00130 Gravel ..................... 00531 Concrete ................. 00530 Sandy Brown .......... 00733

Pebble Path ............ 00730 Hearth..................... 00731 Beach Glass ........... 00300 Warm Sand ............ 00131

 FRESHEN UP Description:  38 oz.  Only available as 15’3” width  5-Year Limited Warranty Against Soiling and Liquid Spills  5-Year TextureGard Warranty Color Choices: Winter White ........... 00100 Dunes……..…………00102 Chamois…………00200 Cold Water…………..00500 Sea Salt .................. 00501 Townhouse………...

ENCORE STANDARD BEAUFLOR VINYL (ROLL GOODS) FLOORING  BEAUFLOR (ROLL GOODS) Color Choices: 669D…Forrest Oak ...... 639M…Sugar Maple

976D…Texas Oak

STANDARD VINYL FLOORING ******Included in Palm Harbor Encore (EVAP)  ELEMENTS OF NATURE FLOORING (VINYL TILE) Description:  5-year extreme performance residential warranty Color Choices: 9” x 18” Tile Lake House PT -265 .... Smoke House PT-264 Barnwood PT-267

 VENTURES LVT VINYL PLANK GLUE DOWN    

Color Choices: 1769 Dogwood 1762 Ashwood 1761 Chestnut 9245 Hickory

-2-


Nationwide Homes Color Selection List

 CLASSIC RECLAIMED LAMINATE FLOATING FLOOR     

Color Choices: 1017 Snowhill Pine 2266 Cottage Oak 7710 Bistro Oak 8008 Crimson Pine 7029 Sterling Oak

OPTIONAL LAMINATE FLOORING  ENDURA PVC LAMINATE FLOATING FLOOR     

Color Choices: 150 Cinnamon Walnut 556 Smoky Oak 138 Ivory Oak 762 Hazel Oak 734 Umber Oak

 COREtex ENGINEERED VINYL PLANK GLUELESS FLOOR  

Color Choices: 1211 Orion 1860 Volans

OPTIONAL CERAMIC TILE FLOORING  FLOOR TILE Color Choices: LINDEN POINT BIANCO LP19 (navajo brown) LINDEN POINT BEIGE LP20 (harvest)

12” X 24”

6” x 24”

X X

LINDEN POINT GRIGIO LP21 (ivory)

X

SANTINO BIANCO SN06 (harvest)

X

SANTINO GRIGIO SN08 (warm gray)

X

X

SANTINO BRUNO SN09 (ivory)

X

X

SANTINO CHIARO SN07 (ivory)

6” x 36”

X

X

X

YORKWOOD DEEP WALNUT YM03 (cocoa)

X

YORKWOOD BIRCHTREE YM01 (ivory)

X

YORKWOOD PECAN YM02 (harvest)

X

Page 3 of 14


Nationwide Homes Color Selection List

MOSAIC : CRYSTAL SHORES RANDOM LINEAR ONLY

Color Choices: SAPPHIRE LAGOON CS95 (ivory)

X

EMERALD ISLE CS96 (ivory) AURELIAN SEAS CS98 (harvest)

X X

SHOWER FLOOR APPLICATION:  

2X2 MATTE FINISH Urban Carrara G4569 Marble Attaché Travertine – MA85

WALL TILE: OPTIONAL CERAMIC WALL TILE  WALL TILE *SHOWER WALLS ONLY + SHOWER WALLS OR BACKSPLASH ^FULL BACKSPLASH ONLY

Color Choices:

SANTINO BIANCO SN06* (harvest) SANTINO GRIGIO SN08* (warm gray) SANTINO BRUNO SN09* (ivory) SANTINO CHIAROSN07* (ivory) YORKWOOD PECAN YM02* (harvest) YORKWOOD DEEP WALNUT YM03* (cocoa) YORKWOOD BIRCHTREE YM01* (ivory)

ELEVARE LUNAR EL40+ (white) ELEVARE MATTE LUNAR EL47+ (white) ELEVARE CRATER EL41+ (white) ELEVARE SAND EL42+ (white) ELEVARE ELEMENT EL43+ (white) ELEVARE CARBON EL44+ (white) ELEVARE CACAO EL45+ (white)

12”X24”

6”X24”

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

6”x36”

4” x 16” CAN BE 1 ROW OF BULLNOSE OR FULL BS

6” x 18” FULL BS ONLY

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X X

Page 4 of 14

24” X 48”


Nationwide Homes Color Selection List

ELEVARE COAL EL46+ (white) DESIGNATE SATIN OR POLISHED FOR MARBLE ATTACHE

X

X

MARBLE ATTACHE CALACATTA MA87* (warm gray) MARBLE ATTACHE AMANI MA88* (cocoa) MARBLE ATTACHE TURKISH SKYLINE MA86* (ivory) MARBLE ATTACHE CRUX MA84* (ivory) MARBLE ATTACHE NERO MA83* (charcoal) MARBLE ATTACHE TRAVERTINE MA85* (navajo brown)

X X X X X X

OPTIONAL CERAMIC WALL TILE 12”X24” LINDEN POINT BIANCO LP19* (navajo) LINDEN POINT BEIGE LP20* (harvest) LINDEN POINT GRIGIO LP21* (ivory) URBAN CLASSIC CARRARA G4569 (white) FULL BS ONLY

4”X12”

2”X8”

4”X8”

8”x24”

X X X X

BRICKWORKS #06 CORRIDOR BRICKWORKS #04 ALCOVE BRICKWORKS #01 STUDIO NO GROUT, 3 ROWS OR FULL BS SKYBRIDGE OFF WHITE SY95 (ivory) SKYBRIDGE GRAY SY98 (warm gray)

X

X

X

1 ROW (NO BULLNOSE) OR FULL BS

AO COLOR APPEAL PEARL C101 GRAY C121 MOONLIGHT C106 NO GROUT, 1 ROW (NO BULLNOSE) OR FULL BS

X

Page 5 of 14


Nationwide Homes Color Selection List

WALL TILE : RITTENHOUSE SQUARE ^ONLY AVAILABLE AS FULL BACKSPLASH AND IN SEMIGLOSS OR MATTE FLAT TILE ONLY *ALL STANDARD WITH WHITE GROUT* GLOSS ARCTIC WHITE 0190

3” X 6”

X

ALMOND 0135

X

URBAN PUTTY 0161

X

DESERT GRAY X114

X

*ALL STANDARD WITH WHITE GROUT* MATTE 0790 ARCTIC WHITE MATTE

X

X735 MATTE ALOMND

X

0761 MATTE URBAN PUTTY

X

X714 DESERT GRAY MATTE

X

STANDARD GROUT COLORS: (MAPEI brand) #00 white #39 ivory #47 charcoal #93 warm gray #79 cocoa

#06 harvest #35 navajo brown

FIREPLACES:  TRADITIONAL WHITE MANTEL WITH TILE SURROUND Color Choices: MA 83 MARBLE ATTACHE NERO MA 85 MARBLE ATTACHE TRAVERTINE

 MROCK/STONE FIREPLACE WITH UNFINISHED MANTEL Color Choices: Huntington Ledge Stone

 MODERN GLASS GAS FIREPLACE

Page 6 of 14


Nationwide Homes Color Selection List

COUNTERTOPS: STANDARD COUNTERTOP OFFERINGS  LAMINATE Description:  For Kitchen & Bath Color Choices: Autumn Carnival............. 1877-52 Breccia ........................... 4951K-22 Bronzite .......................... 4971K-52 Pebble Piazza ................ 50009-60 Mercury Vest .................. 4988K-07 Marmo Bianco ................ 1885K-07 Andorra Shadow ............. 4998K-22

Cote D’Azur Noir .... 5006K-07 Potters Clay ........... 5011K-22 Spring Carnival ....... 1876K-52 Andorra Fog ........... 4999K-22 Hebron White ......... 1888K-22 Antique Limed Pine.. YO469K-22* Winter Carnival ..... 1874K-52

*Antique Limed Pine not available with crescent edging

OPTIONAL UPGRADE COUNTERTOP OFFERINGS  HIGH DEFINITION LAMINATE Description:  For Kitchen & Bath Color Choices: Granito Amerelo…….1878-35

Bianco Romano…1872K-35

 GRANITE Description:  For Kitchen & Bath Color Choices: Moonlight Luna Pearl

Uba Tuba Beige Butterfly

Gold brazil New Venetian Gold

Silver Brown

 QUARTZ Description:  For Kitchen & Bath by MSI – only available with ceramic backsplash Color Choices: Carrara Grigio Toasted Almond Iced White Arlington

 SOLID SURFACE BY LG HI-MACS Description:  LG Hi-Macs Acrylic Solid Surface  For Kitchen & Bath Color Choices: Level I: Breeze Vanilla Sugar Desert Sand Venetian Sand Almond Pearl Black Pearl

Level II: Umber Granite Maui Quartz

Level III: Tambora Merapi

Page 7 of 14


SOLID SURFACE SINK Description:  May only purchase with LG Hi-Macs Solid Surface Counter Top  Under Mount  For Kitchen & Bath Color Choices: Artic White

 BATH FIXTURES BY BAYMONT / TUBS AND SHOWERS Color Choices: White

HARDWARE: CABINET HARDWARE OFFERINGS  CABINET HARDWARE Description:  1 ¼” Round Knobs – Standard  Pipeline – Optional  Contemporary Pull BN - Optional Color Choices: Brushed Nickel Finish Oil Rubbed Bronze – * Round Knobs Only

 EXTERIOR SHUTTERS COLORS – RAISED PANEL OR 3 BOARD OPEN B&B Color Choices: Red Green Blue Black

SHINGLES: STANDARD SHINGLE FOR PALM HARBOR ENCORE SERIES  SHINGLES BY IKO (3-TAB) Description:  Limited Lifetime Warranty  Laminated – 3 Tab Fiberglass Color Choices: Dual Black Weatherwood

Page 8 of 14


STANDARD SHINGLE OFFERINGS FOR ALL SERIES EXCLUDING “PALM HARBOR ENCORE SERIES”  CAMBRIDGE ARCHITECTURAL SHINGLES BY IKO Description:  Limited Lifetime Warranty  Laminated (Architectural)  15-Year Algae Resistance Color Choices: Charcoal Grey Dual Black Earthtone Cedar Weatherwood

 IKO - OTHER SELECTIONS ON SAMPLE BOARD *SPECIAL REQUEST ONLY*

SIDING: STANDARD VINYL SIDING OFFERINGS  ELM GROVE Description:  .040” Average Thickness  DOUBLE 5” Dutchlap  Lifetime Warranty to Original Owner Color Choices: Harbor Blue Greystone Saddle

Bone Mocha Clay

Country Beige Rye Driftwood Aspen White

Wheat Cypress Pearl

OPTIONAL UPGRADE VINYL SIDING OFFERINGS  MARKET SQUARE Description:  .044 Thickness  Double 4” – Traditional Lap Only  Limited Lifetime Warranty Smart Styles Series Color Choices: Aspen White Rye Bone Clay Cypress Country Beige Driftwood

Pearl Harbor Blue Honey Oak Mocha Wheat Saddle Greystone

Smart Style Expressions Color Choices: Lighthouse Red*

Oceanside* Page 9 of 14


Regatta* Olive* Graphite* Hillside Green* Carbon*

Espresso* Slate* Canyon* Indigo*

 BOARD & BATTEN (7” UNINSULATED) Limited Lifetime Warranty Smart Styles Series Color Choices: Aspen White Saddle Clay Greystone Pearl Rye Bone

Country Beige Driftwood Cypress Harbor Blue Honey Oak Mocha Wheat

Smart Style Expressions Color Choices (Dark Colors): Lighthouse Red Oceanside Regatta Canyon Espresso Hillside Green Olive Indigo Graphite Carbon Slate

 DOUBLE 7 CEDAR SHAKE SHINGLE Smart Styles Series Color Choices: Aspen White Wheat Saddle Clay Rye

Pearl Country Beige Driftwood Cypress Greystone

Smart Style Expressions Color Choices: Lighthouse Red Olive Espresso Carbon

Regatta Slate Graphite Indigo

 TRIPLE 6 SOLID CORE Limited Lifetime Warranty Smart Styles Series Color Choices: Aspen White Wheat Saddle Clay Rye Harbor Blue Greystone

Pearl Country Beige Driftwood Mocha Bone Cypress Honey Oak

Smart Style Expressions Color Choices: Lighthouse Red Regatta Olive Graphite

Canyon Oceanside Slate Espresso

Page 10 of 14


 DOUBLE 7 SOLID CORE Limited Lifetime Warranty Smart Styles Series Color Choices: Aspen White Wheat Saddle Clay Rye Harbor Blue Greystone

Pearl Country Beige Driftwood Mocha Bone Cypress Honey Oak

Smart Style Expressions Color Choices: Lighthouse Red Regatta Olive Graphite

Canyon Oceanside Slate Espresso

 BOARD & BATTEN

(20” SOLID CORE)

Limited Lifetime Warranty Smart Styles Series Color Choices: Aspen White Wheat Saddle Clay Rye Harbor Blue Greystone

Pearl Country Beige Driftwood Mocha Bone Cypress Honey Oak

Smart Style Expressions Color Choices: Lighthouse Red Regatta Olive Graphite

Canyon Oceanside Slate Espresso

 BEADED CAROLINA SANDS Limited Lifetime Warranty Color Choices: Aspen White Driftwood Country Beige Harbor Blue

Clay Pearl Saddle Honey Oak

Rye Mocha Bone Wheat

Cypress Greystone

Page 11 of 14


CABINETS:  STANDARD – FOREVERMARK RAISED PANEL HARDWOOD Color Choices: Espresso “KE” Cinnamon Glaze “KM”

 OPTIONAL – FOREVERMARK SHAKER HARDWOOD Color Choices: Pepper Shaker “AP” Ice White Shaker “AW” Greystone Shaker “AG”

 MARSH CABINETS – UPGRADE SERIES: CAMBRIDGE – ATLANTA I & II – BRUNSWICK I & II - FLORENCE Color Choices: BIRCH Alpine* Linen* Autumn Greystone* Ivory* Espresso Tuscany Cordovan Café Unfinished

 MARSH CABINETS – UPGRADE SERIES: ARLINGTON – WILMINGTON – WENTWORTH – CHARLESTON I & II – APEX – NANTUCKET I & II – ARDMORE II & III – JEFFERSON I & II – SUMMERFIELD I & II – SEDGEFIELD II – TRENTON I & III – NORTHBROOK – ARCADIA – CAMBRIDGE – ATLANTA I & II – FLORENCE – ARCH FLORENCE - SAVANNAH I & II – JAMESTOWN I & II – HAMPTON II Color Choices: CHERRY Autumn Saddle Café’ Wheat Cordovan Tuscany Espresso Sienna Graphite Unfinished

 MARSH CABINETS – UPGRADE SERIES: CAMBRIDGE – FLORENCE – ARCH FLORENCE - BRUNSWICK I & II – ATLANTA I & II – SAVANNAH I & II – JAMESTOWN I & II – WILMINGTON I – HAMPTON I – APEX – CHARLESTON I & II – ARLINGTON I – NANTUCKET I & II – SUMMERFIELD I & II – JEFFERSON I & II – SEDGEFIELD I – WENTWORTH I – ARDMORE II & III TRENTON I & III – NORTHBROOK - ARCADIA Color Choices: MAPLE Alpine* Autumn Café’ Cordovan Espresso Graphite Greystone* Ivory* Linen* Natural Onyx*

Unfinished Saddle Storm Canvas Wheat Tuscany Sienna

Page 12 of 14


 MARSH CABINETS – UPGRADE SERIES: ATLANTA I & II – BRUNSWICK I & II – FLORENCE – ARCH FLORENCE - CAMBRIDGE Color Choices: OAK Autumn Café’ Espresso Natural Sienna Tuscany Saddle Unfinished *Painted Finish Cabinets

Page 13 of 14


Page 14 of 14


St andar dI nt e r i o rWal l s

Ext e r i o rShut t e r s


Disclosure Acknowledgment Nationwide Custom Homes is very appreciative that your builder (_______________) has decided to purchase the modular structures for your home from our company. As you move forward with the home buying experience we want to provide you the benefit of the following important and helpful information. 1. The Builder is an independent company that is NOT an agent, employee, or subsidiary of Nationwide Custom Homes. 2. Nationwide Custom Homes is a supplier to the Builder. 3. You are contracting with the Builder, not Nationwide Custom Homes. Nationwide Custom Homes does not have any information regarding your contract with the Builder.

By signing this acknowledgement you are not entering into a contract with Nationwide. Instead you are simply acknowledging that your Builder has provided the foregoing information to you and confirming your understanding that you have contracted solely with your Builder for the purchase of your home. If you have any questions, you should contact your Builder. Acknowledged: ____________________________________ Signature of Homebuyer

_____________________ Date

____________________________________ Print Name of Homebuyer

____________________________________ Signature of Homebuyer

____________________________________ Print Name of Homebuyer

_____________________ Date


Granite Surfaces  Acknowledgment   Nationwide  Homes  is  pleased  to  offer  high-­‐performance  granite  countertops.    Granite  provides   a  natural,  durable  surface  that  will  make  a  beautiful  &  valuable  addition  to  your  home.   Granite  stone  is  a  natural  product  and  will  always  vary  in  color,  shading,  veining  and  texture.  We   have  endeavored  to  display  samples  that  show  the  general  characteristics  of  each  granite  color   offered  as  accurately  as  possible.  However,  every  piece  will  vary  to  a  degree,  some  more  so  than   others.      Nationwide  Homes  takes  no  warranty  of  differences  that  may  be  seen  between  the   displayed  examples  and  the  original  stone.  Samples  and  pictorial  representations  of  our   products  must  not  be  taken  as  a  substitute  to  the  actual  stone  prior  of  delivery.    Additionally   seams  may  be  visible  as  part  of  the  fabrication  &  installation  process.   Please  acknowledge  your  acceptance  of  these  conditions.    Thank  you  for  building  a  Nationwide   Home.        

Acknowledged  

Date

 

Print Name      

Nationwide Authorized,  Independent  Builder  


Quartz Surfaces  Acknowledgment   Nationwide  Homes  is  pleased  to  offer  high-­‐performance  quartz  countertops.    Quartz  provides  a   natural,  durable  surface  that  will  make  a  beautiful  &  valuable  addition  to  your  home.   Quartz  stone  is  a  natural  product  and  will  always  vary  in  color,  shading,  and  texture.  We  have   endeavored  to  display  samples  that  show  the  general  characteristics  of  each  quartz  color   offered  as  accurately  as  possible.  However,  every  piece  will  vary  to  a  degree,  some  more  so  than   others.      Nationwide  Homes  takes  no  warranty  of  differences  that  may  be  seen  between  the   displayed  examples  and  the  original  stone.  Samples  and  pictorial  representations  of  our   products  must  not  be  taken  as  a  substitute  to  the  actual  stone  prior  of  delivery.    Additionally   seams  may  be  visible  as  part  of  the  fabrication  &  installation  process.   Please  acknowledge  your  acceptance  of  these  conditions.    Thank  you  for  building  a  Nationwide   Home.        

Acknowledged  

Date

 

Print Name      

Nationwide Authorized,  Independent  Builder  

Profile for Pro Tech Builder

Palm Harbor Products and Decor  

Palm Harbor Products and Decor